Manual Fuel POS - eMIS - English

Add to my manuals
449 Pages

advertisement

Manual Fuel POS - eMIS - English | Manualzz

Fuel POS – eMIS

User manual

Version 24

February 16, 2009

Tokheim

Everdongenlaan 31

B-2300 Turnhout

Tel. : 0(032)14/44.85.90

All Rights Reserved

Copyright © 1993-2009 Tokheim

This manual and the information it contains have been compiled with the greatest of care. Tokheim is not liable for any lack of clarity, errors and/or loss or defect arising from the use of this manual.

All intellectual rights arising from, accruing to, and residing in this manual belong to Tokheim No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of Tokheim.

Tokheim reserves the right to apply changes to this document without further notice. ii © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

1.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION .............................................................................. 1-1

2. WORKING IN EMIS .......................................................................... 2-1

2.1

2.1.1

2.1.2

2.1.2.1

2.1.2.1.1

2.1.2.1.2

2.1.2.1.3

2.1.2.1.4

2.1.2.2

2.1.2.2.1

2.1.2.2.2

2.1.2.2.3

2.1.2.2.4

2.1.2.2.5

2.1.2.3

2.1.3

2.1.4

2.1.4.1

2.1.4.2

2.1.5

2.2

2.3

T

HE SCREEN STRUCTURE

...................................................................... 2-1

The title bar .................................................................................... 2-1

The menu bar .................................................................................. 2-2

The menu File ...................................................................................... 2-3

Save ............................................................................................................ 2-3

Cancel / Refresh ............................................................................................ 2-3

Print ............................................................................................................. 2-3

Close ............................................................................................................ 2-4

The menu Edit ...................................................................................... 2-5

Add .............................................................................................................. 2-5

Link .............................................................................................................. 2-5

Unlink ........................................................................................................... 2-7

Delete .......................................................................................................... 2-7

Find ............................................................................................................. 2-7

The menu Favorites ............................................................................... 2-8

The toolbar ..................................................................................... 2-9

The working area ........................................................................... 2-10

Pop-up windows ................................................................................. 2-10

Tabs ................................................................................................. 2-11

The status bar ............................................................................... 2-14

P

RINTING LISTS AND REPORTS

.............................................................. 2-15

I

NFORMATION

ERROR MESSAGES

........................................................ 2-17

3. THE EMIS FUNCTIONS ..................................................................... 3-1

3.1

3.1.1

3.1.2

3.1.3

3.1.3.1

3.1.3.1.1

3.1.3.1.2

3.1.3.1.3

3.1.3.2

3.1.3.2.1

3.1.3.2.2

3.1.3.2.3

A

CCESS

(1) ...................................................................................... 3-1

Login (1,1) ..................................................................................... 3-1

Logout (1,2) ................................................................................... 3-5

User management (1,3) .................................................................... 3-6

Users (1,3,1) ....................................................................................... 3-6

Tab ‘General’............................................................................................... 3-10

Add a new user ........................................................................................... 3-13

Printing a user list ........................................................................................ 3-14

Profiles(1,3,2) .................................................................................... 3-15

Tab ‘General’ (All profiles) ............................................................................. 3-18

Tab ‘General’ (Individual profile) ..................................................................... 3-20

Tab ‘General’ (Individual user) ........................................................................ 3-21

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24 iii

3.1.3.2.4

3.1.3.2.5

3.1.3.2.6

3.1.3.2.7

3.1.4

3.2

3.2.1

3.2.1.1

3.2.1.1.1

3.2.1.2

3.2.1.3

3.2.1.3.1

3.2.1.3.2

3.2.2

3.2.2.1

3.2.2.2

3.2.2.3

3.2.2.3.1

3.2.2.3.2

3.2.2.4

3.2.2.5

3.2.2.5.1

3.2.2.5.2

3.2.2.5.3

3.2.2.6

3.2.2.7

3.2.3

3.2.3.1

3.2.3.2

3.2.3.3

3.2.3.3.1

3.2.3.3.2

3.2.4

3.2.4.1

3.2.4.2

3.2.5

3.3

3.3.1

3.3.1.1

3.3.1.1.1

3.3.1.1.2

3.3.1.1.3

3.3.1.1.4

3.3.1.1.5

3.3.1.1.6

3.3.1.1.7

3.3.1.2

3.3.1.2.1

3.3.1.2.2

3.3.1.2.3

3.3.1.2.4

3.3.1.2.5

Tab ‘General’ (User rights) ............................................................................ 3-23

Tab ‘General’ (favorites) ............................................................................... 3-26

Add a new profile ........................................................................................ 3-29

Add a new favorite ...................................................................................... 3-30

License (1,4) ................................................................................. 3-31

R

EPORTS

(2) ................................................................................... 3-33

Shift (2,1) .................................................................................... 3-34

Cash drawer contents (end shift) (2,1,1) ................................................ 3-34

Tab ‘General’............................................................................................... 3-37

View report (2,1,2) ............................................................................. 3-38

Configuration (2,1,3) ........................................................................... 3-40

Tab ‘Configuration’ ...................................................................................... 3-41

Tab ‘Layout’ ................................................................................................ 3-43

Day (2,2)...................................................................................... 3-45

Close (2,2,1) ...................................................................................... 3-45

View report (2,2,2) ............................................................................. 3-48

Configuration (2,2,3) ........................................................................... 3-49

Tab ‘Configuration’ ...................................................................................... 3-50

Tab ‘Layout’ ................................................................................................ 3-53

Subtotal fuel sales (2,2,4) .................................................................... 3-55

Check report (cash sheet) (2,2,5) .......................................................... 3-56

General principle .......................................................................................... 3-56

Check report obliged .................................................................................... 3-58

The actual check.......................................................................................... 3-59

View cash sheet (2,2,6) ...................................................................... 3-70

Enter additional information (2,2,7) ....................................................... 3-71

Month (2,3) .................................................................................. 3-73

Close (2,3,1) ...................................................................................... 3-73

View report (2,3,2) ............................................................................. 3-75

Configuration (2,3,3) ........................................................................... 3-76

Tab ‘Configuration’ ...................................................................................... 3-77

Tab ‘Layout’ ................................................................................................ 3-78

Accounting day (2,4) ..................................................................... 3-80

Close (2,4,1) ...................................................................................... 3-80

View report (2,4,2) ............................................................................. 3-82

Automatic closure (2,5) .................................................................. 3-83

F

ORECOURT

(3) ............................................................................... 3-86

Fuel and tank management (3,1) ...................................................... 3-86

Fuels (3,1,1) ...................................................................................... 3-86

Tab ‘General’ (All fuels) ................................................................................ 3-89

Tab ‘General’ (Specific fuel) .......................................................................... 3-93

Tab ‘Codes’ (Specific fuel) ............................................................................ 3-99

Tab ‘Preset’ (Specific fuel) .......................................................................... 3-101

Tab ‘Loyalty’ (Specific fuel) ......................................................................... 3-102

Tab ‘Blend’ (Specific fuel) ........................................................................... 3-104

Printing a fuel list ....................................................................................... 3-105

Criteria alternative prices (3,1,2) ......................................................... 3-107

Tab ‘General’ (All alternative prices) ............................................................. 3-110

Tab ‘General’ (Specific alternative price) ....................................................... 3-111

Tab ‘Timetable’ (Specific alternative price) .................................................... 3-113

Tab ‘Criteria’ (Specific alternative price) ........................................................ 3-115

Adding a new alternative price ..................................................................... 3-117 iv © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.2.1

3.3.2.2

3.3.2.3

3.3.2.4

3.3.2.5

3.3.2.6

3.3.3

3.3.3.1

3.3.3.1.1

3.3.3.1.2

3.3.3.1.3

3.3.3.1.4

3.3.3.2

3.3.3.3

3.3.3.3.1

3.3.3.3.2

3.4

3.3.1.3

3.3.1.4

3.3.1.4.1

3.3.1.4.2

3.3.1.4.3

3.3.1.4.4

3.3.1.4.5

3.3.1.4.6

3.3.1.5

3.3.1.5.1

3.3.1.5.2

3.3.1.5.3

3.3.1.5.4

3.3.1.5.5

3.3.1.6

3.3.1.6.1

3.3.1.6.2

3.3.1.6.3

3.3.2

3.4.1

3.4.1.1

3.4.1.2

3.4.1.3

3.4.1.4

3.4.1.5

3.4.1.6

3.4.1.7

3.4.2

3.4.3

3.4.4

3.4.5

3.4.5.1

3.4.5.2

3.4.5.3

3.4.5.4

Fuel bonus (3,1,3) ............................................................................ 3-118

Tank groups and nozzles (3,1,4) ......................................................... 3-120

Tab ‘Stock data per tank group’ ................................................................... 3-123

Tab ‘Manual gauging / Stock adjustment’ ...................................................... 3-125

Tab ‘General’ (Specific tank) ....................................................................... 3-128

Tab ‘General’ (Specific nozzle) ..................................................................... 3-130

Tab ‘Alarm’ (Specific nozzle) ....................................................................... 3-132

Printing stock data of tank groups ................................................................ 3-134

Tanks (3,1,5) ................................................................................... 3-137

Tab all tanks ............................................................................................. 3-139

Tab ‘Tank status’ (Specific tank) .................................................................. 3-140

Tab ‘Configuration’ (Specific tank) ............................................................... 3-144

Tab ‘Tank check’ (Specific tank) .................................................................. 3-146

Printing the tank data ................................................................................. 3-148

Deliveries (3,1,6) .............................................................................. 3-152

Tab ‘General’............................................................................................. 3-154

Adding a new delivery ................................................................................ 3-159

Printing deliveries ....................................................................................... 3-161

Pumps (3,2) ................................................................................ 3-162

Tab ‘Pump mode’ (All pumps) ............................................................. 3-164

Tab ‘Day/night’ (All pumps) ................................................................ 3-168

Tab ‘Buffers’ (All pumps) ................................................................... 3-169

Tab ‘Totalisers’ (Specific pump) .......................................................... 3-170

Tab ‘Totalisers’ (Specific nozzle) ......................................................... 3-172

Printing pump data ............................................................................ 3-176

OPT (3,3) ................................................................................... 3-181

Configuration and status (3,3,1) ......................................................... 3-181

Tab ‘Status’ (All outdoor terminals) .............................................................. 3-184

Tab ‘Receipt’ (All outdoor terminals) ............................................................. 3-185

Tab ‘General’ (Specific outdoor terminal) ....................................................... 3-186

Tab ‘Print’ (Specific outdoor terminal) ........................................................... 3-189

Replace paper (3,3,2) ........................................................................ 3-191

BNA (3,3,3) ..................................................................................... 3-196

Tab ‘BNA money’ ...................................................................................... 3-197

Tab ‘Exchange rates BNA’ ........................................................................... 3-198

S

HOP ARTICLES

(4) ......................................................................... 3-199

Articles (4,1) .............................................................................. 3-199

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-202

‘Codes’ Tab ..................................................................................... 3-204

Tab ‘Loyalty’ .................................................................................... 3-207

Tab ‘Stock’ ...................................................................................... 3-209

Tab ‘Bar codes’ ................................................................................ 3-211

Adding a new article ......................................................................... 3-213

Printing an article list ......................................................................... 3-215

Article buttons (4,2) .................................................................... 3-218

Promotions (4,3) ......................................................................... 3-224

Special bar codes (4,4) ................................................................. 3-225

Report codes (4,5) ....................................................................... 3-227

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-229

Tab ‘Articles’ ................................................................................... 3-230

Tab ‘Fuels’....................................................................................... 3-231

Adding a new report code .................................................................. 3-232

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24 v

3.4.6

3.4.6.1

3.4.6.2

3.5

3.5.4.1

3.5.4.2

3.5.5

3.5.5.1

3.5.5.2

3.5.6

3.5.6.1

3.5.6.2

3.6

3.5.1

3.5.1.1

3.5.1.2

3.5.1.3

3.5.2

3.5.2.1

3.5.2.2

3.5.2.3

3.5.2.4

3.5.3

3.5.3.1

3.5.3.1.1

3.5.3.1.2

3.5.3.1.3

3.5.3.1.4

3.5.3.1.5

3.5.3.1.6

3.5.3.1.7

3.5.3.1.8

3.5.3.2

3.5.4

3.6.1

3.6.1.1

3.6.1.2

3.6.1.3

3.6.1.4

3.6.1.5

3.6.2

3.6.3

3.7

3.7.1

3.7.1.1

3.7.1.2

3.7.1.3

Operator messages (4,6) .............................................................. 3-233

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-235

Adding a new operator message ......................................................... 3-237

P

AYMENT MODES

(5) ...................................................................... 3-238

Cash (5,1) .................................................................................. 3-238

Tab ‘Exchange rates’ ......................................................................... 3-239

Tab ‘Rounding off cash transactions’ ................................................... 3-241

Printing a list with exchange rates ....................................................... 3-242

Credit cards (5,2) ........................................................................ 3-243

Tab ‘General’ (all card types) .............................................................. 3-245

Tab ‘General’ (individual card type) ...................................................... 3-246

Tab ‘Local card settings’ (individual card type) ...................................... 3-248

Printing a list with credit card data ...................................................... 3-249

Local customers (5,3) .................................................................. 3-250

Programming (5,3,1) ......................................................................... 3-250

Tab ‘General’ (Customer) ............................................................................ 3-253

Tab ‘Loyalty’ (Customer) ............................................................................. 3-255

Tab ‘Status’ (Customer) .............................................................................. 3-257

Tab ‘General’ (Customer identification) ......................................................... 3-259

Tab ‘Product restrictions’ (Customer identification) ......................................... 3-262

Adding a new customer .............................................................................. 3-263

Adding a new customer identification ........................................................... 3-264

Printing a customer list ............................................................................... 3-266

Transaction lists (5,3,2) ..................................................................... 3-268

Extra payment modes (5,4) ........................................................... 3-275

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-276

Printing a list with extra payment modes .............................................. 3-277

Litre coupons (5,5) ...................................................................... 3-278

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-279

Printing a list with litre coupons .......................................................... 3-280

Delayed payments (5,6) ................................................................ 3-281

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-282

Printing a list with delayed payments ................................................... 3-284

POS

(6) ...................................................................................... 3-285

POS configuration (6,1) ................................................................ 3-285

Tab ‘General’ (all cash points) ............................................................. 3-287

Tab ‘Customer display’ (individual POS) ............................................... 3-289

Tab ‘Receipt’ (individual POS) ............................................................. 3-290

Tab ‘Simplified invoice’ (individual POS) ............................................... 3-292

Tab ‘Cash drawer limit’ (individual POS) ............................................... 3-294

Print receipts (6,2) ....................................................................... 3-296

Touchscreen calibration (6,4) ........................................................ 3-299

S

YSTEM

(7) .................................................................................. 3-301

VAT codes (7,1) .......................................................................... 3-301

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-302

Tab ‘VAT number’ ............................................................................ 3-304

Printing a list with VAT codes ............................................................. 3-305 vi © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7.2

3.7.3

3.7.4

3.7.5

3.7.5.1

3.7.5.2

3.7.6

3.7.7

3.7.7.1

3.7.7.1.1

3.7.7.1.2

3.7.7.2

3.7.7.3

3.7.7.3.1

3.7.7.3.2

3.7.8

3.8

3.8.1

3.8.1.1

3.8.1.2

3.8.1.2.1

3.8.1.2.2

3.8.1.2.3

3.8.1.2.4

3.8.1.3

3.8.1.4

3.8.1.4.1

3.8.1.4.2

3.8.1.4.3

3.8.2

3.8.2.1

3.8.2.2

3.8.3

3.8.4

3.8.4.1

Types of receipts (7,2) ................................................................. 3-306

Types of expenses (7,3) ............................................................... 3-308

Types of additional information (7,4) .............................................. 3-310

Language selection (7,5) ............................................................... 3-312

Tab ‘Indoor’ ..................................................................................... 3-313

Tab ‘Outdoor’ .................................................................................. 3-315

Date and time (7,6)...................................................................... 3-317

Communication (7,7) ................................................................... 3-318

Mail (7,7,1) ..................................................................................... 3-318

Tab ‘General’............................................................................................. 3-320

Printing electronic mail ................................................................................ 3-321

Modem (7,7,2) ................................................................................. 3-322

Back Office Computer (7,7,3) ............................................................. 3-323

Restart communication (7,7,3,1) .................................................................. 3-323

Print status (7,7,3,2) .................................................................................. 3-323

Station (7,8) ............................................................................... 3-324

D

IAGNOSTICS

(8) ........................................................................... 3-325

Journal (8,1) ............................................................................... 3-325

Display journal (8,1,1) ....................................................................... 3-325

Journaal queries (8,1,2) ..................................................................... 3-327

Tab ‘General’ (Variable query) ...................................................................... 3-330

Tab ‘General’ (Criterion of a variable query) ................................................... 3-332

Adding a new variable query........................................................................ 3-335

Executing a query ...................................................................................... 3-336

Fiscal journal logging (8,1,3) ............................................................... 3-339

Export (8,1,4) .................................................................................. 3-341

Export fiscal journal (8,1,4,1) ...................................................................... 3-341

Export journal files (8,1,4,2) ........................................................................ 3-347

Export day reports (8,1,4,3) ........................................................................ 3-349

Software versions (8,2) ................................................................ 3-351

Tab ‘General’ ................................................................................... 3-351

Tab ‘MID’ ........................................................................................ 3-352

List print jobs (8,3) ...................................................................... 3-353

IP device configuration (8,4) ......................................................... 3-355

Communication test (8,4,1) ................................................................ 3-355

4. APPENDIX ...................................................................................... 4-1

4.1

4.1.1

4.2

4.2.1

4.2.2

4.2.2.1

C

ARD CODES

.................................................................................... 4-1

UK & Ireland ................................................................................... 4-1

E

XAMPLES OF REPORTS

........................................................................ 4-3

Shift report ..................................................................................... 4-3

Day report .................................................................................... 4-11

Part 1 : POS transactions ..................................................................... 4-12

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24 vii

4.2.2.2

4.2.2.3

4.2.2.4

4.2.2.5

4.2.2.6

4.2.2.7

4.2.3

4.2.4

4.2.5

4.3

4.3.1

4.3.2

4.3.3

Part 2 : Outdoor payment terminal transactions + manual service.............. 4-20

Part 3 : Total ..................................................................................... 4-23

Part 4 : Indexes .................................................................................. 4-30

Part 5 : Tank data ............................................................................... 4-34

Part 6 : Local customers ...................................................................... 4-37

Part 7 : Additional information .............................................................. 4-38

Cash sheet ................................................................................... 4-39

Accounting day ............................................................................. 4-41

Month report ................................................................................. 4-42

D

IVISION OF THE JOURNAL

.................................................................. 4-43

Journal type ‘System condition’ ....................................................... 4-43

Journal type ‘Local customer’ .......................................................... 4-45

Journal type ‘Special payment mode’ ............................................... 4-46

4.3.4

4.3.5

4.3.6

4.3.7

Journal type ‘Operator surveillance’ ................................................. 4-47

Journal type ‘Transaction registrations’ ............................................ 4-49

Journal type ‘Card registrations’ ...................................................... 4-53

Journal type ‘Reporting’ ................................................................. 4-54

4.3.8

4.3.9

Journal type ‘Articles’ .................................................................... 4-56

Journal type ‘Fuels’ ....................................................................... 4-57

4.3.10 Journal type ‘Totalisers’ ................................................................. 4-59

5. INDEX ............................................................................................ 5-1 viii © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

1. I

NTRODUCTION

For more than 10 years, the Tokheim Fuel POS has been established as a prominent system in the world of service stations. During these years, the system has developed along with the newest technologies in order to meet the demands of the continuous evolving market. The Tokheim Fuel POS is the pounding heart of your service station and it stands for quality, certainty and ease of use.

The Fuel POS contains a whole range of functionalities and possibilities. It is much more than just a system that is used for managing the forecourt. It is also a complete cash register system in which all current possibilities of payment are integrated, both the classic methods of payment as well as the complete range of electronic payments.

Obviously, it is not only limited to the sale of fuels; the management and the sale of shop articles also belong to the standard possibilities. Furthermore, it contains a complete tank management application, extended reporting possibilities, an electronic journal with ‘query’ possibilities, loyalty schemes,…

In order to execute all these tasks, two different screens are used in the Fuel POS, namely the sales screen and the programming screen. Each of these two screens is provided with a button, which helps you to switch from one screen to the other at any time.

The sales screen:

In the sales screen, you select this button to switch to the programming screen.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

1-1

The programming screen:

In the programming screen, you select this button to switch to the sales screen.

“eMIS” is the name of the programming screen that is discussed thoroughly in this manual. It is the successor to the MIS screen, which you might already know for years.

Welcome to eMIS !

1-2 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2. W

ORKING IN E

MIS

2.1 The screen structure

When no windows are opened, the screen will look like this:

The screen is composed of a title bar, menu bar, toolbar, and a working area. The status bar appears at the bottom of the screen.

2.1.1 The title bar

On the left of the title bar, you will see the name of the screen: ‘eMIS’. When a window is opened, the name of the active window is added between braces next to the name of the screen.

Contrary to most Windows applications, there are no pictograms present. To the right of the screen you have the following commands: Minimize, Maximize/Restore and

Close. The eMIS screen is always visible.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-1

2.1.2 The menu bar

The menu bar is located under the title bar; this contains a total of eleven menus.

When the menu is highlighted, the menu name will appear as a button, click on this to open the menu.

Alternatively you can use the access keys (the underlined figure or letter in the menu name). Both methods can be used.

Unless otherwise mentioned, you must close the actions with the mouse by clicking on the left button.

The menus contain actions that appear as windows and can be activated in several ways:

• by clicking on it

• by pressing the access key (when the menu is opened, you only need to press the button with the figure or letter that is underlined in the menu text)

• by using the shortcut key. This is the function key or key combination, which is represented next to the menu text (for example [Ctrl] + [P] for the command Print).

Consequently, you do not need to open the menu first.

If a small black triangle is shown to the right of the screen, this indicates that the menu items can split up into a submenu.

If a menu item (which gives access to a window) is represented in grey, then this means that you have no access to this window. Access is limited by the user profile that is currently logged in. A menu item is greyed out to indicate that the command is not applicable at that time. For example, the command to save data will not be available when there have not been any modifications.

As soon as you have opened a window, all menu items in the menu bar which gives access to a window, will be shown in grey. In eMIS it is not possible to open two windows simultaneously.

In this chapter, the menus File, Edit and Favorites are discussed. All the other menus will be discussed in great detail in the following chapter.

2-2 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2.1.2.1 The menu File

2.1.2.1.1 Save

When you have opened a window, and have made some modifications, then these modifications will only be saved actively when you execute the command ‘Save’.

2.1.2.1.2 Cancel / Refresh

With this command, you can renew the shown data. This means that you will collect the most recent data out of the different files. If you have made some modifications, which haven’t been saved yet, then these will be cancelled. After executing this command, you can continue working in the open window.

To avoid accidental cancellations to modifications, which have not yet been saved, the

Fuel POS will ask you an additional question to confirm any changes:

2.1.2.1.3 Print

With this command you can create and print lists in the different windows.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-3

2.1.2.1.4 Close

With this command you can close the open window again. You can also execute this command by choosing the cross at the right side of the menu bar, which is added each time you open a window.

If you have made modifications in the window, you should save these before closing the window. Nevertheless when you decide to close the window, the Fuel POS will ask you what you want to do with the different modifications:

2-4 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2.1.2.2 The menu Edit

2.1.2.2.1 Add

With this command you can add new data such as a new shop article, a new user, a new local customer etc. A pop-up window will be opened each time, in which you have to fill in the new data. You have to confirm this by means of the ‘Add’ button. In general this means that you can keep adding new data via the pop-up window until you close it again with the ‘Cancel’ button.

For example, the following pop-up window is used to add a new barcode to a shop article:

2.1.2.2.2 Link

Sometimes you do not have to add new data, and you only need to link two already existing elements to each other. For example: you want to link an already existing user to an already existing user profile. With this command the linking can be executed. A pop-up window will be opened each time.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-5

When we want to link users to a user profile, we first have to choose the desired user profile. The following pop-up window is shown if we then choose the command ‘Link’:

On the right side, the users are shown that are already linked to the chosen user profile. On the left, the users that still can be linked to the chosen user profile, are shown. with the arrow to the right. The user will be moved from the list ‘Available’ to the list ‘Selected’.

‘Available’ by pressing the button with the arrow to the left. In this way, you break up the link between this user and the user profile.

Finally you confirm the links by pressing the button ‘OK’.

2-6 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2.1.2.2.3 Unlink

With this command you can break up again the existing link between two elements without removing the individual elements. You can for example break the link of a user to a user profile without erasing the user and the user profile.

2.1.2.2.4 Delete

With this command you can remove existing data such as an article that is no longer sold, a user that no longer works at the service station etc.

2.1.2.2.5 Find

Currently this command is not active.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-7

2.1.2.3 The menu Favorites

To the menu Favorites, you can add shortcuts for menu items that you frequently use or lists that you regularly collect. This means that often used functions can even be executed quicker.

Favorites are programmed per user profile. After all, as station manager you will execute other functions more frequent than your employees. Each time a user logs on in eMIS, the shortcuts linked to the profile of this user will automatically be put in the menu Favorites.

The programming of the favorites will further be discussed in this manual.

2-8 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2.1.3 The toolbar

The toolbar contains the same commands as the menus File and Edit. Depending on the window that is opened, one or more buttons will be active in this toolbar.

The buttons correspond to the following commands:

Save

Cancel / Refresh

Close

Print

Find

Add

Link

Unlink

Delete

Switch to sales screen

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-9

2.1.4 The working area

When a window is opened from the menu bar, this is placed in the working area. In general, two different types of windows are used: pop-up windows and tabs.

2.1.4.1 Pop-up windows

For example the window that is opened to log on in eMIS, is a pop-up window:

At the bottom, there are always the following 2 buttons:

By pressing this button, you confirm the completed data.

By pressing this button, you close the pop-up window again without confirming or saving the completed data.

So in a pop-up window you do not use the commands ‘Save’ and ‘Cancel / Refresh’ of the menu bar or toolbar.

2-10 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2.1.4.2 Tabs

For example, this is the program shop articles window, tab keys are used to navigate:

In some windows, such as the above, a list is shown on the left side. The different elements in this list are sorted. This is indicated by means of an arrow in the column heading:

Here the articles are sorted according to number. By pressing ‘Number’ in the column heading, you can turn round the sorting (the arrow will then also be turned round). By pressing ‘Name’ in the column heading, you can sort the articles according to name instead of number.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-11

In some other windows, this list adopts the form of a tree, for example by programming the local clients:

Pressing this, you can expand the tree.

Pressing this, you can collapse the tree.

By clicking on an element in the list or tree, the properties of this element can be updated on the right side. The properties of each element are divided in one or more tabs:

You activate a tab by pressing on its title. For example click on ‘Stock’ to show and update the stock data of an article. You can also click on the arrow on the right and then choose the desired tab out of a list:

2-12 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

As soon as you have made a modification to an element, a symbol is added, which shows the status of this element. The following symbols are possible:

The properties of an existing element have been modified or a new element was added. The modifications are only committed when the command ‘Save’ is executed.

There was chosen to erase the element. However the removal is only committed when the command ‘Save’ is executed.

The properties of an existing element were modified but cannot be saved since not all required fields are completed or since incorrect data was filled in. You can easily find where the mistake is situated.

In the title of the tab in which the mistake is situated, an extra symbol is added:

When you open the tab, which contains the mistake, the same symbol will also be shown in front of the field that was not correctly filled in. For example:

By moving the mouse over the symbol, extra information is shown that indicates what exactly is missing or wrong. For example:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-13

2.1.5 The status bar

The status bar is always shown at the bottom of the screen:

From the left to the right, the following information will be shown:

• The user profile (OPERATOR) of the user that is currently logged on in eMIS.

• The name of the user (Peter Jackson) that is currently logged on in eMIS.

• The station number (8010).

• The name of the station (Station Tokheim).

• The following pictograms can be displayed informatory:

At least one nozzle on the forecourt is automatically put out of service due to a problem. This happens if for example the tank, to which the nozzle is linked, is empty.

At least one outdoor terminal is automatically put out of service, for example due to a fraud alarm.

The MIS server has sent electronic mail to the Fuel POS. The envelope will only disappear if all messages have been read.

From a host, new fuel prices were sent to the Fuel POS, which the station has to activate. As long as the station has not yet activated these new prices, the current fuel prices remain applicable and the envelope stays on the screen.

If you put the mouse on the pictogram, extra information will be displayed.

• The current date and time (14/11/2006 18:11).

2-14 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2.2 Printing lists and reports

With eMIS, a large number of lists and reports can be made and printed. These are discussed in detail in the following chapters.

Some lists are printed on the receipt printer, but most of them are intended for the A4printer.

When you ask for a list or a report, intended for the A4-printer, then an automatic print preview is displayed. You can then decide whether you want to print the information or not. While asking for a list or a report, you sometimes receive an extra pop-up window with extra options. In this pop-up window, you can then choose to send the list directly to the printer or to show a print preview first. The lists intended for the receipt printer, do not have a print preview. These are always sent directly to the receipt printer.

An example print preview is as follows:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-15

Options available are:

Press this button if you want to print the list or the report on the A4printer. The following pop-up window will automatically be opened:

You can print the entire document or only the displayed page.

The page settings can only be modified if eMIS is used remotely.

The printer settings can only be modified if eMIS is used remotely.

Press this button to show the previous page.

Press this button to show the next page.

This field allows you to zoom in or out. The desired percentage can be chosen out of a dropdown box.

By choosing a page number in this dropdown box, you can show the desired page directly on the screen.

2-16 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2.3 Information – error messages

While working in eMIS, it might be possible that suddenly a message appears on the right at the bottom of the screen. This message can be about error messages as well as general information. For example:

After 5 seconds the message clears. The message can also be cleared by clicking on it.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2-17

3. T

HE E

MIS

FUNCTIONS

3.1 Access (1)

3.1.1 Login (1,1)

This menu item is always available for everyone. It is used to gain access to the different functions of the programming screen. If ‘Login’ is selected, the following popup window is displayed:

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Language

During the installation of the Fuel POS, the technician sets the language. This language is then used in the sales screen and for composing lists and reports. While logging on, the user can however choose another language for the programming screen.

User

Each Fuel POS user is programmed individually in advance. The linking of the user to a profile then determines his access rights. In this field, the user has to insert his identification as known in the Fuel POS. This identification is composed of maximum

4 characters. Here the General Manager can read the magstripe card, which he has received as identification.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-1

Access code

In this field the access code has to be entered. An access code is composed of minimum 4 characters and maximum 14 characters. While entering the access code, asterisks are shown so that other persons cannot see what is actually entered.

In the status bar, the name of the user that is logged on in eMIS, is shown:

3-2 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Each attempt to log on (succeeded or not) is registered in the Fuel POS journal.

Hereafter you will find a number of examples.

• Example 1 : The General Manager logs on.

# POS 1 17-08-2006 11:54:26 #

eMIS Login by the general manager: General Manager (GMAN)

• Example 2 : A user, linked to a Station Manager profile, logs on.

# POS 1 17-08-2006 12:24:47 #

eMIS Login by the manager: Albert Jones (MANA)

• Example 3 : A user, linked to an Operator profile, logs on.

# POS 1 17-08-2006 13:57:32 #

eMIS Login by user: Peter Jackson (PJ)

• Example 4 : The user enters a non-existent (not programmed) user identification.

# POS 1 18-08-2006 14:06:35 #

eMIS Login refused; unknown user: (KZ)

• Example 5 : The user enters an invalid access code.

# POS 1 18-08-2006 14:13:44 #

eMIS Login refused; wrong password: Peter Jackson (PJ)

• Example 6 : The user has reached the maximum number of login attempts and is blocked automatically.

# POS 1 18-08-2006 15:07:50 #

eMIS User account locked: Peter Jackson (PJ)

• Example 7 : Here it is no longer possible to log on since the user account is disconnected (temporarily).

# POS 1 18-08-2006 15:13:12 #

eMIS User account disabled: Peter Jackson (PJ)

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-3

When the access code of the user has expired, he will still be able to use his old access code temporarily. The Fuel POS shows the user how many times he can still log on with the expired access code:

When confirming this message, the user will be logged on and it would be best to program a new access code as quickly as possible.

3-4 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.1.2 Logout (1,2)

A logout implies always a return to the lowest level: no one has logged on. Some basic functions are still accessible after a logout.

The logout is registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# POS 1 18-08-2006 14:28:43 #

eMIS Logout by user: Peter Jackson (PJ) Login: 18/08/2006 13:23:56

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-5

3.1.3 User management (1,3)

3.1.3.1 Users (1,3,1)

Before someone can work with the Fuel POS, he has to be programmed as a user in the Fuel POS system. A user can, if he has the necessary access rights, open and close a shift in the sales screen. Furthermore, user rights can be given to each user in order to execute certain functions in the programming screen. This menu item is used for user programming.

The main functions of this menu item are:

• Adding a new user.

• Deleting an existing user.

• Managing and modifying access codes.

• Disable a user account.

• Unlocking a user account.

• Modifying the properties of an existing user.

• Linking a user to a certain user profile.

• Printing a list with the programmed users.

3-6 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

The user programming screen has the following lay-out:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-7

On the left of the screen, the already programmed users are shown:

For showing the users, the following prescriptions are applicable:

• When the General Manager is logged on, all users are shown.

• When a user, linked to the Station Manager profile, is logged on, then this user and all other users that are linked to the Operator profile, are shown.

• When a user linked to an Operator profile, is logged on, then only this user is shown.

By clicking at the regarding column heading, the users can be sorted according to identification or name.

At the installation of the Fuel POS, one user, linked to the General Manager profile, is standard present.

3-8 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When deleting a user, the following prescriptions are applicable:

• The user that is linked to the General Manager profile, cannot be deleted.

• The General Manager can delete again every user (except himself) from the

Fuel POS.

• A user that is linked to a Station Manager profile, can delete every other user that is linked to an Operator profile.

• A user that is linked to an Operator profile, never has the access to delete a (or another) user.

The user that has opened a shift, can only be deleted after having closed this shift and, if applicable, after having entered the content of the cash drawer.

By choosing an already programmed user in the list, the properties of this user can be updated in the tab at the right of the screen. Here are also several restrictions applicable:

• The General Manager can modify his own name and access code. Furthermore, he can modify the access code and all the other properties of each other user.

• A user that is linked to the Station Manager profile can modify his own name.

Furthermore, he can modify his own access code on condition that he has received permission from the General Manager. He can also modify the access code and all other properties of the users that are linked to an Operator profile.

• A user that is linked to an Operator profile can modify his own access code on condition that he has received permission from the General Manager or Station

Manager.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-9

3.1.3.1.1 Tab ‘General’

On the tab ‘General’ we find the following information:

User

In the Fuel POS, each user has an identification of maximum 4 characters (digits and/or letters). This identification is assigned at the moment that the user is added and cannot be modified afterwards. The identification can only be modified by erasing the user and adding the user again with the modified identification.

Access code

An access code of minimum 4 and maximum 14 character (digits and/or letters) is assigned to each user. The initial access code is assigned at the moment that the user is added. Once he is programmed, the access code is no longer visible and asterisks are shown.

3-10 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

A new access can be programmed if the ‘Change’ box is pressed. When a user modifies his own access code, he first has to enter his own old access code and then he has to enter his new access code twice to avoid mistakes:

When a General Manager or Station Manager modifies the access code of another user, he does not need to know the old access code. For example, this can be used when someone has forgotten his access code. The new access code then also has to be entered twice:

Some oil companies might impose strict regulations for choosing an access code:

- The minimum length can be more than 4 characters.

- One can demand that an access code is a combination of digits and letters.

- The access code can expire after a certain period of time so that the user is obliged to program a new access code regularly.

- One can impose that the new access code is not yet used in the past.

Name

In this field the complete name of the user is entered. When the user logs on in eMIS, his name appears in the status bar. When he opens a shift, his name will be shown at the top of the sales screen. At the customer receipts, only the user identification is printed not the complete name.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-11

Profile

The user rights are determined in different user profiles. At the installation of the

Fuel POS, standard 3 profiles are activated: the General Manager profile, the Station

Manager profile and the Operator profile. The General Manager or a Station Manager can create supplementary Operator profiles.

Each user is then linked to a profile. The desired profile is chosen out of a drop down list.

The General Manager can link a user to the Station Manager profile or an Operator profile. A Station Manager can only link a user to an Operator profile.

The user must change his access code at the next logon

When a new user is added, an initial access code is entered that most probably was not chosen by the user himself. By activating this field, the user will receive the message while logging on the next time, that his access code has expired and that he will have to enter a new access code.

When this option is activated, the user will automatically gain access to program a new access code by its own.

The user cannot change his access code

By activating this field, one indicates that the access code of a Station Manager can only be modified by the General Manager and that the access code of an Operator can only be modified by the General Manager or a Station Manager.

When this option is activated, the option that the user has to modify his access code at the next login, is automatically switched off.

The access code never expires

This field indicates automatically for each user whether his access code expires after a certain period of time. Therefore, it depends on the regulations that the oil company has imposed concerning the management of access codes. It is not possible to switch this option on or off manually. Standard no expiry date is applied in the Fuel POS.

The user account is disabled

This option deactivates the user so that he can no longer log on to eMIS. The same field is used to activate the user account again.

The user account is locked out

This field can only be selected if the user has automatically been locked, for instance when he had reached the maximum number of wrong login attempts. This field is used to unlock the user account again.

3-12 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.1.3.1.2 Add a new user

The following pop-up window is opened when the function ‘Add’ is activated in order to create a new user:

The following data have to be filled in obligatory for the new user:

User

Each user is marked by a unique user identification. This is the first field that has to be filled in when a new user is created. The user identification, which exists of maximum 4 characters (digits and/or letters), is inserted and confirmed with the

Enter key. As identification, the initials of the person can be used or a cashier number or…

Access code

Name

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-13

3.1.3.1.3 Printing a user list

By choosing this button, a list of all Fuel POS users can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

USERS

25-08-2006 13:33

User User name Profile name

GMAN General Manager GENERAL MANAGER

MANA Manager STATION MANAGER

PJ Peter Jackson OPERATOR

PB Paul Brown OPERATOR

JW Jack White OPERATOR

LOC Leo O’Conner OPERATOR

TD Tom Doyle OPERATOR

3-14 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.1.3.2 Profiles(1,3,2)

In order to determine the rights of the individual Fuel POS user, different user profiles can be created. Each user will be linked to one of these profiles.

The most important functionalities of this menu item are:

• Adding a new profile.

• Modifying the properties of an existing profile.

• Deleting an existing profile.

• Showing the regulations that are applicable at the management of the access codes.

• Modifying the properties of an existing user.

• Linking an existing user to another profile.

The screen for the profile management will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-15

On the left of the screen, the already programmed profiles are shown:

By choosing the option ‘Profiles’ in the tree, the regulations that in general are applicable concerning the management of the access codes of users, will be shown on the tab on the right of the screen.

By choosing a user in the tree that is linked to a certain profile, the properties of the user can be modified in the tab on the right of the screen. If necessary, the user can be linked to another profile.

By choosing ‘User rights’ in the tree, the rights of the profile can be modified.

By choosing ‘favorites’ in the tree, the shortcuts to frequently used functions can be programmed. These shortcuts will be put in the menu Favorites of the selected profile.

3-16 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Upon the installation of the Fuel POS, there are 3 standard profiles:

• The profile GENERAL MANAGER

The rights of this profile can only be modified by a technician. The profile cannot be deleted.

• The profile STATION MANAGER

The General Manager can change the access rights this profile contains. Several users can be linked to this profile. This profile cannot be deleted.

• The profile OPERATOR

The General Manager and a Station Manager can both change the rights of this profile. It is however not possible to give access rights to this profile, which are not assigned to the Station Manager profile. Several users can be linked to this profile. The profile cannot be deleted.

Both the General Manager as the Station Managers can create supplementary Operator profiles and give it a specific name. These supplementary profiles can be deleted again.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-17

3.1.3.2.1 Tab ‘General’ (All profiles)

When the option ‘Profiles’ in the tree is chosen, the regulations to which the access codes have to meet are shown on the tab ‘General’. These regulations are the same for all profiles. They are automatically activated at the installation of the Fuel POS and cannot be modified. The oil company imposes the regulations. We retrieve the following information:

Minimum password size

A password is always composed of minimum 4 number of characters. characters and maximum

14 characters. However, the oil company can decide to increase the minimum

Number of entries in password history

When the user programs a new password (whether the previous password has expired or not), the Fuel POS can control whether the user chooses a password which has not yet been used in the past. This field indicates how many old passwords are saved and controlled. Standard no checking is executed.

Password needs to contain digits AND letters

For his password, the user can insert digits as well as letters. The oil company can decide that every password has to be a combination of digits and letters.

3-18 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Number of days after which the password expires

Standard, no expiry date is active on the password. However, the oil company can decide that each user has to program a new password on regular periods of time.

Number of grace logins after the password has expired

When the password has expired, the user can still log on several times with his old password. The oil company indicates how many times the user can still log on with the expired password.

Number of bad passwords entered before account is locked

Standard the user can try to insert a correct password for an infinite number of times. This can however be limited so that the user is locked automatically after a number of incorrect attempts.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-19

3.1.3.2.2 Tab ‘General’ (Individual profile)

When a specific profile is chosen in the tree, the following information will be displayed:

Profile

Each profile in the Fuel POS belongs to one of the following three levels:

- GENERAL

- STATION

- OPERATOR

At the installation of the Fuel POS, there is standard 1 profile ‘GENERAL MANAGER’ profile ‘STATION MANAGER’ present. It is not possible to create supplementary Operator profiles of this level.

At the installation of the Fuel POS, there is standard also 1 profile ‘OPERATOR’ present. It is possible to create supplementary Operator profiles.

Profile name

Of each of the Operator profiles that are created supplementary, the name can be chosen freely.

3-20 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.1.3.2.3 Tab ‘General’ (Individual user)

When in the tree a specific user is chosen, then the properties of this user can be modified. The lay-out of this screen was already discussed at page 3-10.

If one wants to link a user to another profile, then this can be executed in 2 different ways:

1 Open the drop down list ‘Profile’ and choose the desired profile. The user will be moved to the chosen profile in the tree.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-21

2 Press this button to break up the link between the chosen user and the profile. Then choose in the tree the option ‘Users’ of the profile to which you want the link the user.

Press this button to link the user to the chosen profile. The following pop-up window will be opened:

3-22 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.1.3.2.4 Tab ‘General’ (User rights)

The purpose of a profile is to assign certain access rights to the different users of the

Fuel POS and this in the sales screen as well as in the programming screen. These access rights can be determined by choosing ‘User rights’ in the tree.

The user rights are divided into a number of main categories. Each main category contains a number of subcategories:

The rights are indicated by means of a symbol:

For each user that is linked to the chosen profile, the indicated function will be activated. In the example above, this means that the user is allowed to program shop articles.

Some functions cannot be activated. In the example above, the user has the right to display promotions. Since promotions cannot be programmed in the

Fuel POS but only via a back office, it is also not possible to activate this function.

Each user that is linked to the chosen profile, has reading rights for the indicated function. In the example above, this means that the user is allowed to show the programmed promotions on the screen.

For some functions, no reading rights can be granted. For example the opening and closing of a shift can only be switched on or off.

When no symbol is shown, then the indicated function is switched off or hidden for each user that is linked to the chosen profile. In the example above, this means that the user has no access to the programming or the displaying of the article buttons in eMIS.

Some functions cannot be switched off. The login screen of eMIS is for example accessible for everyone.

The user rights can be modified per subcategory, but they can also be modified for a complete main category.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-23

When you choose a main category in the tree, the following screen is displayed:

By pressing this button, all subcategories of the indicated main category are activated. There are however a number of exceptions:

* The user will only gain reading rights for the subcategories that never can be activated.

* When for example an Operator profile is programmed, then this function cannot be switched on if this one is not switched on for the Station Manager profile.

By pressing this button, reading rights are assigned for all subcategories of the indicated main category. This of course on condition that reading rights exist for the subcategories and that no conflict occurs with a higher profile.

By pressing this button, all subcategories of the indicated main category are switched off, on condition that they can be switched off.

3-24 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When you choose a subcategory in the tree, the following screen is displayed:

By choosing this option button, the indicated function is activated.

There are however a number of exceptions:

* Some functions can never be switched off.

* When for example an Operator profile is programmed, then a function cannot be switched on if this one is not activated for the

Station Manager profile.

By choosing this option button, the reading rights are assigned for the indicated function. This again on condition that reading rights exist for this function and that no conflict occurs with a higher profile.

By choosing this option button, the indicted function is switched off, on condition that it can be switched off.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-25

3-26

3.1.3.2.5 Tab ‘General’ (favorites)

For each profile, you can program up to 10 shortcuts to menu items or print jobs that will often be used by the users of this profile. Each time a user logs on in eMIS, the shortcuts linked to the profile of this user will automatically be put in the menu

Favorites.

In the tree, the programmed favorites will be displayed like this:

If you select the line ‘Favorites’ in the tree, the following tab will be displayed:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

In this tab, you will see again the programmed shortcuts of the selected profile and if necessary you can change the order of it. The shortcuts are put in the menu Favorites in the displayed order. Therefore, it would be best to put the most frequently used shortcuts at the top.

To modify the order, you select in the list the favorite that you want to move. Then you use one of the two buttons on the right of the screen:

Press this button to move the selected favorite upwards.

Press this button to move the selected favorite downwards.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-27

If you select in the tree one of the programmed favorites, the following tab will be displayed:

In this tab, the properties of a favorite can be modified. You will see the following information:

Description

For each favorite or shortcut, a description has to be entered. This description will be used in the menu Favorites.

Action

A favorite can be used to execute two different actions:

- Activate a menu item

The shortcut causes that a certain eMIS screen will be opened. Select the preferred menu item from the drop down list at which the eMIS menu structure will be displayed as a tree. This tree only contains the menu items that are accessible for the profile of which the favorites are programmed.

- Activate a print job

The shortcut will cause that a print job will be started. Select the preferred print job from the drop down list.

3-28 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.1.3.2.6 Add a new profile

The following pop-up window is displayed when the function ‘Add’ is activated to create a new profile:

In this pop-up window, we retrieve the following information:

Profile

Each profile that is added in the Fuel POS, is an Operator profile.

Profile name

For each new profile a profile name can be inserted freely.

Profile to copy

Creating a new profile is always done by making a copy of an existing Operator profile. The desired Operator profile is chosen out of a drop down list. This means that by default the new profile standard will have the same rights as the original profile. Then the rights of this new profile can be modified.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-29

3.1.3.2.7 Add a new favorite

The following pop-up window will be displayed when the function ‘Add’ is activated in order to create a new favorite:

The following data must be filled in to create a new favorite:

Description

Action

You must program the action that has to be executed when the favorite is selected.

3-30 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.1.4 License (1,4)

The Fuel POS only functions if a valid licence number is entered. This license number is provided by Tokheim. Via this menu item, the license number is entered and it can also be shown afterwards.

Upon the installation of the Fuel POS or when the Fuel POS is reconfigured, a temporary license will automatically be provided. This license remains valid for

10 days. Within these 10 days, a definitive license number has to be entered.

The user is informed twice a day (every 12 hours) that the Fuel POS is working with a temporary license and that a definitive license still has to be registered. During the last

24 hours, there is even every hour a notification. Each time a receipt is printed.

Example of a receipt:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

09-09-2006 03:27:20

A L A R M

PLEASE CALL THE HELPDESK

Temporary license, register license

within 228 hours

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-31

After having chosen this menu item, the following pop-up window is opened if a valid license number was not yet registered:

Once a valid licence number is registered, this can no longer be modified:

3-32 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2 Reports (2)

This menu item covers all the possibilities concerning the reporting of the Fuel POS.

The Fuel POS contains three different types of reports:

Shift report

This type of report comprises all the sales data that were registered at one particular

Fuel POS terminal. As a consequence, it never contains transactions that were started via an outdoor payment terminal. The period of the shift report starts at the moment that the cashier opens a shift till the moment that he closes this shift.

Day report

This type of report comprises the sales data of the entire station, the transactions registered via the Fuel POS terminal as well as the transactions that were started at the outdoor payment terminal. At the closure of the day report, a new day is started automatically. It is however possible to close several day reports within a period of

24 hours. Normally this report is closed once a day (every 24 hours).

Month report

This type of report comprises the sales data of the entire station for a longer period of time. At the closure of the month report, a new month is started automatically. It is however possible to close several month reports within one month. Normally this report is closed once a month and it always concurs with a day closure. As a consequence, the month report always corresponds with the sum of all day reports since the previous month closure.

A day report can be closed at any time, so also when a shift is still open. If this causes problems at the administration of a service station, then one can make use of an accounting day. An accounting day is not a fourth type of report, but it is a mechanism, which causes that a day report is closed when not a single shift is open.

When an accounting day is closed, one receives a normal day report knowing that all shifts were closed at that moment.

The day report, the month report and the accounting day can be closed manually as well as automatically.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-33

3.2.1 Shift (2,1)

3.2.1.1 Cash drawer contents (end shift) (2,1,1)

The cashier opens and closes his shift via the sales screen. The manager can decide to program the Fuel POS so that one has to enter the content of the cash drawer at each change of shift.

If this option is activated, the cashier has to enter the initial content of the cash drawer in the sales screen when opening his shift. The initial content will be shown on the shift report afterwards.

When the shift is closed, the cashier has to count the money in the cash drawer and enter the total amount in the Fuel POS. Contrary to the opening of the shift; these amounts are not entered in the sales screen but in eMIS via this menu item.

The shift report will only be printed when the content of the cash drawer is entered, even when the Fuel POS is set up to print the shift report automatically after closing the shift. In this way, the cashier cannot verify in advance how much money he should have at the end of his shift.

3-34 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

The screen for entering the content of the cash drawer will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-35

On the left of the screen, the different users are shown that still have to enter the content of the cash drawer for one or more shifts.

Concerning the preview of the shift reports of which the content of the cash drawer still has to be entered, the following rules are applicable:

• When the General Manager is logged on in eMIS, all the shift reports will be shown.

• When a user is logged on in eMIS, who is linked to the Station Manager profile, all the possible shift reports of this user will be shown as well as all shift reports of the users that are linked to an Operator profile.

• When a user is logged on in eMIS, who is linked to an Operator profile, then only the shift reports of this user will be shown.

In the tree the following data are put in a row for each shift report:

• The date and time of closing the shift in the sales screen.

• The terminal number.

• The sequence number of the shift.

By choosing a shift report in the tree, the content of the cash drawer at the end of the shift can be entered in the tab on the right of the screen. After saving the entered data, the shift report will be closed definitively. It is not possible to enter the content of the cash drawer of several shift reports at the same time. After entering the data of the first shift report, the data have to be saved before you can continue with the next report.

3-36 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.1.1.1 Tab ‘General’

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Cash

For each currency unit that is accepted in the service station, the user has to enter the amount that he has counted at the end of the shift.

Extra payment modes

For each extra payment mode that is programmed, the user has to enter the amount that he has counted at the end of the shift.

Litre coupons

Per type of litre coupon, the user has to fill in the total number of litres that he finds in the cash drawer at the end of his shift.

The cash drawer was empty at the end of the shift

When the cash drawer was empty at the end of the shift, by example because a safe drop was executed just before closing the shift, this option has to be indicated.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-37

3.2.1.2 View report (2,1,2)

The most important functions of this menu-item are:

• Asking for a closed shift report.

• Asking for a subtotal of the actual shift.

A pop-up window will be shown. In this pop-up window, the desired report can be chosen and certain options concerning layout can be made:

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

POS

A shift report always represents the sales of one individual Fuel POS terminal. The desired Fuel POS number is chosen out of a drop down list.

Current (open) shift

Indicate this option in case you want to retrieve the subtotal of the actual shift at a certain Fuel POS terminal. During the retrieval of this subtotal, the intervening content of the cash drawer does not need to be entered.

3-38 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Closed shift

Indicate this option in case you want to retrieve a closed shift report. Then choose the desired report out of the drop down list. Per terminal, the last 45 shift reports are saved. In the drop down list, we will find these 45 reports that are indicated with the sequence number of the report and the closure date and time.

Layout of the report

The shift report can be retrieved in 2 different ways, complete or simplified. Even if a simplified report was printed when closing the shift, it can be retrieved completely afterwards.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-39

3.2.1.3 Configuration (2,1,3)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Defining whether the shift report has to be printed automatically at the closure or not.

• Defining whether the content of the cash drawer has to be entered at the shift change.

• Choosing the standard layout of the shift report.

• Programming the layout of the simplified shift report.

The screen for the configuration of the shift report will look like this:

3-40 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.1.3.1 Tab ‘Configuration’

On the tab ‘Configuration’ we will find the following information:

Automatically print the shift report when it is closed

When the cashier has access to the A4 printer and the manager doesn’t want that he can look at his own shift report, then one can make sure that the shift report is not printed automatically at the closure. Therefore, it is sufficient to switch off this option. However, one still has to make sure that the same cashier does not receive rights to retrieve the shift report via eMIS.

The contents of the cash drawer has to be entered

By indicating this option, the content of the cash drawer has to be entered at each shift change. When opening the shift, the cashier has to enter the starting content in the sales screen. After closing the shift, he has to count the money in the cash drawer and enter the amount in eMIS. When this option is switched on, the starting content, the amount at the end and the possible cash difference will be included in the shift report.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-41

Layout of the report

The volume of information, available on the shift report is very extensive. However, not all information is relevant for each service station. Therefore, you have the possibility to program the layout of the simplified shift report. In this kind of shift report, a number of sections of the shift report can be left out. When the shift report is printed automatically at the closure, then the option is offered to print the shift report completely or simplified at that particular moment.

3-42 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.1.3.2 Tab ‘Layout’

As already mentioned, the volume of information available on the shift report, is very extensive and is not always relevant for each station. Via this tab, the layout of the simplified shift report can be programmed.

On the tab ‘Layout’ the different information blocks of the shift reports are shown in a tree. The title of the information block in this tree always corresponds with the title that is printed on the shift report. When the option of the information block is indicated, this information block will be a part of the simplified shift report.

The option ‘ALL’ allows you to switch on or off easily all information blocks. It functions as follows:

When the option is indicated and the check mark is black, this means that all information blocks are enabled. By clicking again at this box, all information blocks will be switched off.

When the option is switched off, this means that all the information blocks are disabled. By clicking again at this box, all information blocks will be enabled.

When this option box is indicated and the check mark is grey, then this means that some information blocks are enabled and some are disabled. By clicking at this box, all information blocks will be disabled. By clicking a second time at this box, all information blocks will be enabled.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-43

Right after the installation of the Fuel POS, we recommend you to work with the complete shift report at least during a certain period of time. This allows you to obtain a complete view of the information offered. After a certain period, it will be clear which information is never used. You can then switch to the simplified report. This procedure will avoid that some information, which seams superfluous at first sight but is actually very useful, will be left out and that you afterwards have forgotten that it is available.

3-44 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.2 Day (2,2)

3.2.2.1 Close (2,2,1)

The day report enables the manager to check the sales figures of the entire station, both transactions registered via the Fuel POS terminal as well as transactions that were started via the outdoor payment terminal. It is possible to close several day reports within a period of 24 hours. Normally this report is closed once a day (every 24 hours).

When closing the day report, a new day is started automatically.

When credit cards are accepted via the Fuel POS for which the transactions have to be saved off line, then it is absolutely necessary to make a day closure every day. Only the card transactions that occurred during a closed day, can be collected by the Petrol

Server.

The Fuel POS can be programmed in such a way that the day report is closed automatically. It is also possible to execute a manual closure via this menu item. The following pop-up window will then be opened:

If you want, you can also decide to close an accounting day or month report via this pop-up window.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-45

When closing the day report manually, two special situations can occur:

• In some service stations, it is not possible to close a day report without closing the accounting day. This can be obliged by the oil company, but it can also be a limitation of the linked payment terminal. The pop-up window will then look like this:

3-46

• The oil company can impose restrictions on the modification of fuel prices, so that new fuel prices can only be activated at a day closure. The field, in which you can indicate if the new prices have to be activated, is added to the pop-up window:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When the day report is closed, the Fuel POS will print automatically a receipt as confirmation:

05-09-2006 15:46:01

REPORTS

Day 0098 closed

Each day closure is also registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# System 05-09-2006 15:46:31 #

Close day 0098 OK

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-47

3.2.2.2 View report (2,2,2)

The last 45 day reports can be retrieved via this menu item. A pop-up window is shown in which the desired report can be chosen and in which certain choices concerning layout can be made:

In the pop-up window we will find the following information:

Report / list to be printed

Choose the desired report out of the drop down list. In this drop down list, the day reports are indicated with the sequence number of the report and the date and time of closing the report.

Layout of the report

The day report can be retrieved in 2 different ways, completely or simplified. A day report can always be printed completely, even if a simplified version has already been printed when closing the day.

3-48 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.2.3 Configuration (2,2,3)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Defining whether the day report has to be printed automatically when closing the day or not.

• Defining for each day report whether a cash sheet can be made.

• Choosing the standard layout for the day report.

• Consulting the preconditions that are applicable at the day closure.

• Programming the layout of the simplified report.

The screen for configuring the day report will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-49

3.2.2.3.1 Tab ‘Configuration’

On the tab ‘Configuration’ we will find the following information:

Automatically print the day report when it is closed

When the A4 printer is accessible for the cashier and you do not want that he can view the day report when it is closed automatically, then you can program that the day report is not printed automatically when closing the day. It is sufficient to disable the check box. However, take into account that you do not give rights to the same cashier to retrieve the day report via eMIS.

Check day report after closure

By enabling this check box, the function ‘Check day report’ can be activated. If the oil company has obliged the station to check each day report, this function is activated automatically and it cannot be deactivated.

3-50 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Layout of the report

The volume of information available on the complete day report is very extensive.

However, not all information is relevant for each service station. Therefore, you have the possibility to program the layout of the simplified day report. In this kind of day report, a number of sections of the day report can be left out. If the day report is printed automatically when closing the day, the option is offered to print the day report completely or simplified at that moment.

All transactions need to be settled (clean day end)

On demand of the oil company, the option “Clean day end” can be activated. A

“Clean day end” means that at the moment of closing the day, every transaction has to be closed or paid.

What is the purpose of this?

A possible consequence of an unpaid self-service transaction at the moment when closing the day, is that the filling is already processed in the theoretical stock and the totaliser, but not yet in the sales data. The difference between the theoretical stock at the beginning of the day and at the end of the day (corrected with possible deliveries) will not correspond with the sales data (there will be a difference of one transaction).

When a day is closed under the conditions of a “Clean day end”, then such differences are excluded.

What is the disadvantage?

When the task for the day closure is given and at that moment there is still a filling active, then the other customers will not be able to start another filling as long as that particular active filling is not yet ended and paid.

Are there any exceptions?

The day closure simply continues when at that moment a fuel delivery occurs.

When the option “Clean day end” is active and a task to close the day is given, then all pumps are blocked automatically. When at that particular moment, a customer is filling, then the related pump will only be blocked after finishing the filling. The cashier receives every minute a notification that the day closing will continue as soon as the pumps are free again. As soon as all fillings are paid, the day is actually closed and new fillings can be started.

Minimum 1 day report per 24 hours

The oil company can oblige the service station to close at least 1 day report per

24 hours. The check will take place at 00:15. If at this moment, the Fuel POS sees that no day report has been closed in the last 24 hours, it will automatically close a day.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-51

Mandatory to close an accounting day

In some service stations it is not possible to close a day report without closing an accounting day. This can be obliged by the oil company, but it can also be a limitation of a linked payment terminal. This field indicates whether the obligation of closing an accounting day is active or not.

3-52 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.2.3.2 Tab ‘Layout’

As already mentioned before, the volume of information available on the complete day report is very extensive and not all information is relevant for each station. Via this tab, the layout of the simplified day report can be programmed.

The day report is divided into 7 parts. Each part contains a number of different information blocks. On the tab ‘Layout’ the different information blocks of the day report are shown in a tree. The title of the information block in the tree always corresponds with the title that is printed on the day report. When the check box of the information block is enabled, then this information block is a part of the simplified day report.

The check box per part of the report allows you to enable or to disable easily all information blocks for this part. It works as follows:

When the check box is enabled and the check mark is black, this means that all information blocks are enabled. By clicking at this check box, all information blocks will be disabled.

When the check box is disabled, this means that all information blocks are disabled. By clicking at the check box, all information blocks will be enabled.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-53

When the check box is enabled and the check mark is grey, this means that some information blocks are enabled and others are disabled. By clicking at the check box, all information blocks will be disabled. By clicking a second time at the check box, all the information blocks will be enabled.

Right after the installation of the Fuel POS, we recommend you to work with the complete day report at least during a certain period of time. This allows you to obtain a complete view of the information offered. After a certain period, it will be clear which information is never used. You can then switch to the simplified day report. This procedure will avoid that some information, which seams superfluous at first sight but is actually very useful, will be left out and that you afterwards have forgotten that it is available.

3-54 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.2.4 Subtotal fuel sales (2,2,4)

Via this menu item a subtotal can be retrieved of all fuel sales data since the last closing of the day.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

SUBTOTAL FUEL SALES

11-09-2006 13:33

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

Day number: 0105

Fuel Quantity Amount

02 Unleaded 98 1963.92 2462.78

03 Diesel 6508.11 6566.66

04 L.P.G. 0.00 0.00

05 Unleaded 95 1362.06 1669.87

+ __________________ + ___________________

9834.09 10699.31

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-55

3.2.2.5 Check report (cash sheet) (2,2,5)

3.2.2.5.1 General principle

In case the cashier makes certain mistakes during the working day regarding the choice of the different payment methods, then it could be that the day report, which is obtained after the day closure, is not an exact reflection of the reality. The Fuel POS offers the possibility to control the totals at the day report after the day closure. The result of this control is called a ‘Cash Sheet’.

Controlling a day report via eMIS is only possible if this function is active. The station manager decides whether this function will be used or not.

The following general rules are applicable:

The function is not active

When you choose in this menu for the control of a day report, the following message is shown:

The function is activated

Only the day reports that are closed after this activation can be controlled.

3-56 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

The function is active

When you choose in the menu for the control of a day report, the oldest day report that is not yet controlled previously, still has to be controlled first.

If all day reports are already controlled, then the following message is shown while choosing this function in the menu:

A day report can only be checked once.

When the last 45 day reports are not yet checked and again a day report is closed, the oldest present day report will be deleted without ever being checked.

The function is deactivated

All day reports that are not yet checked at that moment, can never be controlled when the function is later activated again.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-57

3.2.2.5.2 Check report obliged

An oil company can oblige its stations to check each day report. In this situation the station manager cannot deactivate the function.

If the station has been obliged to check each day report, the check will have to be performed within a determined period of time. As soon as a day report is closed, this check will have to be performed within 24 hours.

As soon as the Fuel POS sees that a day report has not yet been checked within

24 hours, the station sales will be stopped. However, sales via the outdoor payment terminals (card terminal and BNA) will still be possible.

The screen used for programming pump modes displays that self-service and manual service have been blocked temporarily (by means of the letter T).

After the day report has been checked, sales can start again. The pump modes programmed for self-service and/or manual service will be reactivated.

3-58 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.2.5.3 The actual check

In order to check the day report, the user has to go through a number of screens and verify each time whether the theoretical values that are shown, correspond to the real situation.

Each screen displays 4 command buttons:

This button is used to go back to the previous screen. In the first screen, this button is disabled.

This button is used to proceed to the next screen. This button cannot be chosen in the last screen.

This button is only available in the last screen and is used to finish the day report check. Since this button is only active in the last screen, the user has to go through all the other screens first.

This button is used to cancel the day report check. The check can be restarted afterwards. The Fuel POS will ask the user to confirm whether he really wants to cancel the check in order to avoid loosing all the entered data by accident:

At the top of each screen, it is shown which day report the user is checking:

At the next pages, a description is given of all the different screens that can be used at the day report check.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-59

Window “Cash – Euro”

In the next screen, the user has to verify whether the total amount of cash in Euro that he has counted, matches the theoretical values of the day report:

When the screen is opened, the total amount in Euro that should be in the cash drawer at the end of the day, is displayed at the bottom. Mind: the amount that was already in the cash drawer at the beginning of the day is not taken into account.

When the screen is opened for the first time, the real amount in Euro is equal to the theoretical amount. Obviously, there will be no difference between the real and the theoretical amount.

The user now has to enter what he really has counted and he can do this in two different ways. The user can enter the total amount directly, but if preferable he can enter the number of coins and the number of bills for each possible value. The total amount will then be calculated by the Fuel POS.

Each time a value is modified, the total difference in Euro, on the right at the bottom of the screen, is immediately adapted.

3-60 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Window “Cash”

The following screen is only available when foreign currencies are accepted in the service station:

For each foreign currency programmed during the period of the day report, the amount that should be in the cash drawer at the end of the day is displayed. Mind: the amount that was already in the cash drawer at the beginning of the day is not taken into account.

In the column ‘Real’ the user has to enter what he really has counted.

On the right the difference between the theoretical and the real value is shown, both in foreign currency as in Euro. Each time the user changes a value, the difference will immediately be adapted.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-61

Window “Extra payment modes”

The Fuel POS system distinguishes two types of extra payment modes:

• Firstly, there are the extra payment modes that are not important to an oil company.

This means that it is not important for the oil company to know what the customers bought with one of these extra payment modes, e.g. payment by check. Only the total amount has to be checked when checking the day report.

• Secondly, there are the extra payment modes that are very important to an oil company. This means that it is highly important for the oil company to know what the customers bought with one of these extra payment modes, e.g. a company card processed manually at the service station. The purchased goods have to be checked when checking the day report.

This distinction is only made if the station has to add a code, provided by the oil company, when programming an extra payment mode. It is this code that defines to which group each extra payment mode belongs.

If no oil company code has to be programmed for each extra payment mode, only the total amount has to be checked.

3-62 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Extra payment modes – screen type 1 – only check of the total amount

The screen below is only available if during the period of the day report extra payment modes were present in the Fuel POS for which only the total amount has to be checked:

For each extra payment mode, the amount that should be in the cash drawer at the end of the day is shown.

In the column ‘Real’ the user now has to enter what he really has counted.

On the right the difference between the theoretical and the real value is shown.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-63

Extra payment modes – screen type 2 – check of the purchased products

There is a separate screen for each extra payment mode for which the purchased products need to be checked:

One line is displayed for each type of fuel that was taken during the day report, and this per unit price. The number of litres paid with the extra payment mode in question is automatically entered. In the column ‘Real litres’ the user has to enter now how many litres have really been sold with the extra payment mode concerned.

On the right the difference between the theoretical and the real value is shown, both in litres and in Euro. Each time the user changes a value, the difference will immediately be adapted.

At the bottom of the screen there is one line that resumes all amounts resulting from non-fuel sales: shop sales, general receipts, settlement of a delayed payment,…

In the column ‘Real’ the user now has to enter how much he really has counted.

On the right the difference between the theoretical and the real value is shown.

3-64 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Window “Litre coupons”

There is a separate screen for each type of litre coupon programmed during the period of the day report:

One line is displayed for each type of fuel that was taken during the period of the day report, and this per unit price. The number of litres paid with the litre coupon in question is entered automatically. In the column ‘Real litres’ the user has to enter how many litre coupons he has really received. So the litres that were paid have to be entered and not the litres that have been sold.

On the right the difference between the theoretical and the real value is shown, both in litres and in Euro. Each time the user changes a value, the difference will immediately be adapted.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-65

Window “Pump tests”

The following screen is always displayed and contains the pump tests registered during the period of the day report:

One line is displayed for each type of fuel that was taken during the period of the day report, and this per unit price. The number of litres registered as pump test, is automatically entered.

In the column ‘Real litres’ the user has to enter how many litres were really performed.

Theoretically, it is quite possible that by mistake a pump test was settled as cash or vice versa.

On the right the difference between the theoretical and the real value is shown, both in litres and in Euro. Each time the user changes a value, the difference will be immediately adapted.

3-66 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Window “Other payment modes”

The screen below is always displayed and contains some other payment modes:

For each payment mode the amount registered during the period of the day report is displayed.

In the column ‘Real’ the user has to enter what he really has counted.

On the right the difference between the theoretical and the real value is shown.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-67

Window “Global result”

The screen below is always displayed and contains the global result of the check:

The above screen displays one line for each previous screen. For each previous screen, the theoretical amount, the real amount and the difference are shown.

At the bottom of the screen, the total difference is displayed.

This button is used to finish the check of the day report. In case the total difference does not equal to 0.00, the user will have to reconfirm whether he wants to finish the day report or not.

3-68 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When the day report check has been finished (the cash sheet is closed definitively), the

Fuel POS will automatically print a receipt as a confirmation:

Station Tokheim

Unit Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

14-09-2006 22:09:39

N O T I F I C A T I O N

Close cash sheet 0112 OK

Each closure is also registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# System 14-09-2006 22:09:39 #

Close cash sheet 0112 OK

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-69

3.2.2.6 View cash sheet (2,2,6)

The last 45 day reports are always saved. If a cash sheet has been made for these day reports, they are also saved (so 45 at the most).

A pop-window is displayed in which the desired report can be chosen:

In the pop-up window we will find the following information:

Report / list to be printed

This drop down list contains the day reports for which a cash sheet is available. In this drop down list, the day reports are indicated with the sequence number of the day report and the date and time of report closure. So it does not concern the date and time of cash sheet creation.

3-70 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.2.7 Enter additional information (2,2,7)

Sometimes oil companies need information from their stations, which is completely independent of the information that a day report usually contains. Via this menu item the Fuel POS offers the possibility to enter additional information in the course of the day. The entered data will be integrated into the following day report closure. If the day reports are available to the oil company, then the additional information will be so as well.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-71

The station manager can program up to 30 different types of additional information. In this screen, a value can be entered for the types that were programmed in advance. If necessary, this action can be executed several times a day.

At each insert of additional information, a receipt will be printed automatically. For example:

20-11-2007 18:12:00

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DAY REPORT

Day number: 701

Sequence number: 30

Type Value

Date and time 20-11-2007 18:00

Station number 8010

Price Unl. 98 Comp. 1.217

Price Unl. 95 Comp. 1.198

Price Diesel Comp. 0.965

Price AdBlue Comp. 1.000

Brand Tokoil

Each insert of additional information will also be registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# POS 1 20-11-2007 18:12:00 #

Additional information day report 701 – Sequence number 30

Date and time 20-11-2007 18:00

Station number 8010

Price Unl. 98 Comp. 1.217

Price Unl. 95 Comp. 1.198

Price Diesel Comp. 0.965

Price AdBlue Comp. 1.000

Brand Tokoil

3-72 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.3 Month (2,3)

3.2.3.1 Close (2,3,1)

The month report enables the manager to check the sales results of the complete station over a longer period. It is possible to close several month reports within a period of 1 month. However, this report is normally closed once a month. At the month report closure, a new month is started automatically.

The month closure always coincides with a day closure. As a consequence, the month report always corresponds with the sum of all day reports since the previous month closure.

The Fuel POS can be programmed so that the month report is closed automatically. Via this menu item, a manual closure is executed. The following pop-up window will be opened:

The pop-up window that is used for closing the month report manually, is the same as for the day report closure. Here the special situations as described on page 3-46 are also applicable.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-73

When a month report is closed, the Fuel POS will automatically print a receipt as a confirmation:

01-10-2006 00:00:29

REPORTS

Day 0118 closed

Month 0009 closed

Each month closure is also registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# System 01-10-2006 00:00:29 #

Close month 0009 OK

3-74 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.3.2 View report (2,3,2)

The last 45 month reports are always saved and can be retrieved via this menu item. A pop-up window is shown in which the desired report can be chosen and in which certain choices concerning layout can be made:

In the pop up window we will find the following information:

Report / list to be printed

Choose the desired report out of the drop down list. In this drop down list, the month reports are indicated with the sequence number of the report and the date and time of the report closure.

Layout of the report

The month report can be retrieved in 2 different ways, completely or simplified. A month report can always be printed completely, even if a simplified version has already been printed when closing the month.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-75

3.2.3.3 Configuration (2,3,3)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Choosing the standard layout for the month report.

• Programming the layout of the simplified report.

The screen for configuring the month report will look like this:

3-76 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.3.3.1 Tab ‘Configuration’

On the tab ‘Configuration’ we will find the following information:

Layout of the report

The volume of information available on the complete month report is very extensive.

However, not all information is relevant for each service station. Therefore, you have the possibility to program the layout of the simplified month report. In this kind of month report, a number of sections of the month report can be left out. If the month report is printed automatically when closing the month, the option is offered to print the month report completely or simplified at that moment.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-77

3.2.3.3.2 Tab ‘Layout’

As already mentioned before, the volume of information available on the complete month report is very extensive and not all information is relevant for each station. Via this tab, the layout of the simplified month report can be programmed.

The month report is divided into 4 parts. Each part contains a number of different information blocks. On the tab ‘Layout’ the different information blocks of the month report are shown in a tree. The title of the information block in the tree always corresponds with the title that is printed on the month report. When the check box of the information block is enabled, then this information block is a part of the simplified month report.

The check box per part of the report allows you to enable or to disable easily all information blocks for this part. It works as follows:

When the check box is enabled and the check mark is black, this means that all information blocks are enabled. By clicking at this check box, all information blocks will be disabled.

When the check box is disabled, this means that all information blocks are disabled. By clicking at the check box, all information blocks will be enabled.

3-78 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When the check box is enabled and the check mark is grey, this means that some information blocks are enabled and others are disabled. By clicking at the check box, all information blocks will be disabled. By clicking a second time at the check box, all the information blocks will be enabled.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-79

3.2.4 Accounting day (2,4)

3.2.4.1 Close (2,4,1)

A day report can be closed at any time, even when a shift is still open. If this causes any problems for the administration of the service station, then you can use the accounting day. In theory, an accounting day is not a report but a mechanism to close the day report when the shifts on all terminals have been closed. The closure of an accounting day implies a regular day closure, provided that all shifts have been closed.

At an accounting day closure, a day report is made and at the same time an overview of all day reports and shift reports that were closed since the previous accounting day closure.

The Fuel POS can be programmed that the accounting day is closed automatically. Via this menu item a manual closure can be executed. The following pop-up window will be opened:

The pop-up window that is used to close an accounting day manually, is the same as the one used for the day report closure. Here the special situations, as described on page 3-46 are also applicable.

3-80 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

If one attempts to close an accounting day when a shift is still active on the Fuel POS terminal, the following message will be displayed on the screen:

If the accounting day closure is successful, a receipt confirming this closure will be printed:

15-09-2006 15:07:18

REPORTS

Day 0119 closed

Accounting day 0073 closed

Each accounting day closure is also registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# System 15-09-2006 15:07:49 #

Close accounting day 0073 OK

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-81

3.2.4.2 View report (2,4,2)

The last 45 overviews printed when closing an accounting day will always be saved and can be retrieved via this menu item. A pop-up window is shown in which the desired overview is chosen:

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Report / list to be printed

Choose the desired accounting day out of a drop down list. In this drop down list, the accounting days are indicated by means of their sequence number and the date and time of the closure.

3-82 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.2.5 Automatic closure (2,5)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Programming an automatic day closure.

• Programming an automatic accounting day closure.

• Programming an automatic month closure.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-83

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Accounting day

When activating the option of the desired day, one can indicate for each day of the week that the Fuel POS has to close an accounting day automatically. In order to apply the same setting all days of the week, the option ‘All’ at the first line can be enabled or disabled.

When the option of an accounting day is indicated, the option of the corresponding day closure is also indicated automatically. An accounting day closure always implies a normal day closure.

The point of time of the automatic accounting day closure is filled in in the last column.

Day

When activating the option of the desired day, one can indicate for each day of the week that the Fuel POS has to close a day automatically. In order to apply the same setting all days of the week, the option ‘All’ at the first line can be enabled or disabled.

An automatic day closure cannot be switched off when an accounting day closure has already been chosen. An accounting day closure always implies a normal day closure. If one does no longer want to apply an automatic closure, the automatic accounting day closure has to be disabled first and then the normal day closure.

The point of time of the automatic day closure is filled in in the last column.

Closure time

This box is used to enter the time when the automatic closure has to be effected.

3-84 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Accounting day closure interval

The shift reports of the different Fuel POS terminals will almost never be closed on the exact moment that the automatic accounting day closure should be effected.

Therefore an interval around that moment will be used. Via this field, this interval can be programmed.

If for example an interval of 15 minutes is entered in combination with a report closure at 06:00, the Fuel POS will automatically start the accounting day closure as soon as all shifts are closed in the period between 05:45 and 06:15.

If the shifts are still not closed when the moment of closure is reached (06:00 in this example), from that moment the Fuel POS will display every minute a warning informing the cashier within which period he HAS to close the shift.

If one or more shifts in this example are still not closed at 06:15, the Fuel POS will automatically close the different shifts as well as the accounting day.

Month

When a month report has to be closed automatically, this check box needs to be enabled.

When a report is closed automatically, this is mentioned on the receipt that is printed as a confirmation:

18-09-2006 14:24:56

REPORTS

Day 0120 closed

Accounting day 0074 closed

(Automatic closure)

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-85

3.3 Forecourt (3)

3.3.1 Fuel and tank management (3,1)

3.3.1.1 Fuels (3,1,1)

In one and the same station, up to 16 different fuel types can be sold via the

Fuel POS. This menu item is used to program these fuel types.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Programming new fuel prices.

• Confirming (or refusing) the fuel prices that were sent from a host.

• Modifying a number of properties, such as the VAT percentage that is applied.

• Programming possible discounts that are given for each fuel type.

• Displaying all other properties of the different types of fuel that can only be modified by a service engineer.

3-86 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-87

On the left of the screen, the fuels that are sold in the service station, are displayed:

When choosing the line ‘Fuels’ in the tree, the fuel prices can be displayed in the tab on the right of the screen. Furthermore, new fuel prices, which are sent from a host, can be confirmed or refused.

By choosing a specific fuel type in the tree, the properties of this fuel can be modified in the 5 tabs on the right of the screen.

3-88 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.1.1 Tab ‘General’ (All fuels)

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Fuel

Each fuel type, sold in the service station, is preceded by a fuel number that will be used as identification in the Fuel POS. Up to 16 different fuel types can be sold.

Base price

The base price is the price per litre that is standard charged to the customer for each filling. In the column ‘Current’ the base price active at that moment at the service station is displayed. If a new base price is already programmed but is not yet activated, this new price is displayed in the column ‘New’. How and when this new price will be activated, is displayed in the column ‘Price activation’.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-89

When a station uses alternative prices, these prices instead of the base prices are used when specific situations occur at the pump. This tab also displays the current and new alternative prices for each fuel type:

Discount on price sign

Some stations do not display a litre price on the price sign that is connected to the

Fuel POS, but the discount that the customer receives in the station. In the column

‘Current’ the discount is shown that is currently displayed on the price sign. If a new discount has already been programmed but not yet activated, then this is displayed in the column ‘New’. How and when this new discount will be activated, is shown in the column ‘Price activation’.

Price activation

This column shows how and when the new base prices, alternative prices and discounts will be activated on the price sign. The activation can be performed in

5 different ways:

Immediate

The new prices will be activated as soon as they are saved.

2

This possibility allows indicating through a certain point of time when the new prices have to be activated. This time is also displayed.

3 Next day closure

The new prices are activated as soon as a day report is closed.

3-90 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4 To be confirmed

The new prices that were sent from a host to the Fuel POS, will be activated as soon as the station confirms these prices. However when the station does not agree with these new prices, one can refuse using them.

Via this screen, the confirmation or the refusal of the new prices can be executed. For this purpose, you choose ‘Accepted’ or ‘Rejected’ in the drop down list.

When there are several fuels for which a new price has to be confirmed, this has to be executed for all fuels at the same time. When the new price of one fuel type is accepted or refused, it is displayed on the left of the screen for which fuels this still has to be executed:

5 At day closure

The oil company can impose a limitation on the modification of fuel prices, so that the new prices can only be activated at a day closure. When entering the new prices, a price activation cannot be chosen. In this overview ‘At day closure’ is automatically filled in.

This limitation is imposed so that during the period of the day report, only 1 litre price per fuel type can be sold. This limitation implies automatically that no alternative prices can be used.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-91

In the Fuel POS, you have the possibility to program for each fuel type up to 3 price modifications in advance. Since in reality only the next price modification is known, this possibility is usually not activated. In case this option is active, 3 lines are displayed for each type of fuel:

3-92 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.1.2 Tab ‘General’ (Specific fuel)

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Fuel number

The fuel number is used as identification for each fuel type sold in the service station. Up to 16 different fuel types can be sold.

Name

The fuel name is defined at the installation and cannot be modified.

Unit of measure

The unit of measure (litres or kg) is defined at the installation and cannot be modified.

Base price

The base price is the price per litre that is standard charged to the customer for each filling. In the section ‘Current fuel prices’ the base price active at that moment at the service station, is displayed. A new base price has to be entered in the section

‘New fuel prices’.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-93

Discount on price sign

Some stations do not display a litre price on the price sign that is connected to the

Fuel POS, but the discount that the customer receives in the station. The section

‘Current fuel prices’ shows the discount that is currently displayed on the price sign.

A new discount for the price sign can only be entered in the section ‘New fuel prices’.

Alternative prices

In addition to the base price, the manager can also program up to seven alternative prices for each fuel type. The manager decides in which situation an alternative price is used instead of the base price. For example an alternative price can only be used during a certain period, or only for transactions via the outdoor payment terminal, etc.

At the start of a filling, the Fuel POS will check whether all conditions for an alternative fuel price have been fulfilled. If so, the alternative fuel price will be used instead of the pump price.

In this screen, the alternative prices that are already programmed, are displayed. For each alternative price, a description has to be entered. The alternative prices are displayed with the description the manager has given.

An alternative price is programmed by introducing the difference in relation to the base price. Both positive values (alternative price higher than the base price) as negative values (alternative price lower than the base price) are allowed.

In the part ‘Current fuel prices’ the alternative prices active at the moment at the station are displayed. Both the litre price used at the pump as well as the difference compared to the base price will be displayed. A new alternative price can only be entered in the field ‘New fuel prices’.

Max. price change allowed %

A price change of more than 20 % will automatically be refused by the Fuel POS.

Therefore, the number of typing errors, which lead to the activation of a wrong price, will be minimised.

3-94 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Price activation

If a new base price, a new alternative price or a new discount for the price sign has to be programmed, the manager has to indicate how and when these modifications have to be activated. The activation can be performed in 5 different ways. Only the first 3 possibilities in the overview can be chosen freely, the other 2 possibilities are only valid in specific situations and cannot be chosen.

Immediate

The new prices are activated as soon as these prices are saved.

2

This possibility allows indicating through a date and time when the modifications have to be activated. The current day and time are filled in by default.

3 Next day closure

The new prices will be activated as soon as a day report is closed.

4 To be confirmed

The new prices, which are sent from a host to the Fuel POS, will be activated as soon as they are confirmed in the service station. When the manager does not agree with the new prices, he can refuse using them. This fourth method of price activation cannot be chosen when the manager has to enter the new prices in the in the Fuel POS.

Via this screen, the confirmation or the refusal of new prices can be executed.

For this purpose, you choose ‘Accepted’ or ‘Rejected’ in the drop down list.

When there are several fuels for which a new price has to be confirmed, this has to be executed for all fuels at the same time. When the new price of one fuel type is accepted or rejected, it is displayed on the left of the screen for which fuels this still has to be executed:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-95

5 At day closure

The oil company can impose a limitation on the modification of fuel prices, so that the new prices can only be activated at a day closure. When entering the new prices, a price activation cannot be chosen and it will automatically be entered in the field ‘At day closure’.

This limitation is imposed so that during the period of the day report, only 1 litre price per fuel type can be sold. This limitation implies automatically that no alternative prices can be used.

In the Fuel POS, there is the possibility to program up to 3 price modifications per fuel type in advance. As in practice, only the next price modification is known, this possibility is not activated by default. When this option is active, the part ‘New fuel prices’ will change as mentioned-below:

3-96 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When new prices are sent from a back office or host to the Fuel POS, a receipt will be printed automatically. In the example mentioned-below, the back office has sent a new base price for all products, which will be activated in 4 different ways:

20-09-2006 11:29:20

PRICE AND/OR ACTIVATION TIME CHANGED

Entered via: BOC

2 Unleaded 98 Immediate

new price: 1.260

new discount price sign: 0.060

new pump price: 1.225

(Happy hour)

new pump price: 1.290

(BNA cost)

3 Diesel Next day closure

new price: 1.015

new discount price sign: 0.060

new pump price: 0.980

(Happy hour)

new pump price: 1.045

(BNA cost)

4 L.P.G. 21/09/2006 00:00

new price: 0.420

new discount price sign: 0.060

new pump price: 0.385

(Happy hour)

new pump price: 0.450

(BNA cost)

5 Unleaded 95 After confirmation

new price: 1.230

new discount price sign: 0.060

new pump price: 1.195

(Happy hour)

new pump price: 1.260

(BNA cost)

Each price modification will be registered in the Fuel POS journal, whether it will be programmed via eMIS or via a back office. In the example mentioned-below, a new base price for 3 products was programmed in eMIS:

# Dispensing 20-09-2006 11:47:16 #

PRICE AND/OR ACTIVATION TIME CHANGED: 20/09/06 11:47 Entered via: eMIS

Fuel New price Activation type New pump price New discount on price sign

(02) Unleaded 98 1.260 (1) Immediate 0.060

Happy hour 1.225

BNA cost 1.290

(03) Diesel 1.009 (3) 21-09-2006 00:00 0.060

Happy hour 0.974

BNA cost 1.039

(04) L.P.G. 0.401 (0) Unchanged 0.060

Happy hour 0.366

BNA cost 0.431

(05) Unleaded 95 1.230 (2) Next day closure 0.060

Happy hour 1.195

BNA cost 1.260

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-97

Each activation of new prices is confirmed by means of a receipt which is printed automatically and is registered in the Fuel POS journal. Example of a receipt:

* * * D I S P E N S I N G * * *

20-09-2006 12:37:57

Fuel prices and/or discounts activated

- POS 1

* Fuel prices *

Fuel Old Active Status

Unleaded 98 1.254 1.260 activated

Diesel 1.009 1.015 activated

L.P.G. 0.401 0.420 activated

Unleaded 95 1.226 1.230 activated

* Happy hour *

Fuel Old Active Status

Unleaded 98 -0.035 –0.035 unchanged

Diesel -0.035 –0.035 unchanged

L.P.G. –0.035 –0.035 unchanged

Unleaded 95 -0.035 –0.035 unchanged

* BNA cost *

Fuel Old Active Status

Unleaded 98 +0.030 +0.030 unchanged

Diesel +0.030 +0.030 unchanged

L.P.G. +0.030 +0.030 unchanged

Unleaded 95 +0.030 +0.030 unchanged

* Discounts on price sign *

Fuel Old Active Status

Unleaded 98 0.030 0.030 unchanged

Diesel 0.030 0.030 unchanged

L.P.G. 0.030 0.030 unchanged

Unleaded 95 0.030 0.030 unchanged

3-98 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.1.3 Tab ‘Codes’ (Specific fuel)

In the tab ‘Codes’ we will find the following information:

VAT code

At the installation of the Fuel POS, each fuel type is linked to a VAT code. Each

VAT code is linked at its turn to a VAT percentage. In this field, the percentage applied to the chosen fuel type, is displayed.

In case of a VAT modification, a new VAT code can be selected out of a drop down list if required. This is however not applicable when the VAT percentage, which is linked to the VAT code, is modified and the fuel has to be sold with this new VAT percentage.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-99

Card code

At the installation, a card code is programmed for each fuel type. When programming a card code, each filling that is paid with a card, can be settled in a correct way by the Fuel POS. By means of the card code, for example product restrictions that are linked to a card can be checked. Furthermore due to the card code, the host that processes the card transaction, knows which fuel type has been sold. The card code is also used in the link with an external payment terminal, an external loyalty terminal,…

At the moment of installation, the card code is programmed automatically and can afterwards only be modified by a technician.

Group/prod id

When allocating a group code or a product identification to the fuels, these fuels are categorised under one of the product categories as defined by the oil company. On the day report as well as the month report, the turnover per group code will be displayed.

The oil company defines which group codes have to be used and how. Three different situations are possible:

* If the oil company does not use its own product id in the Fuel POS, this field cannot be selected.

* If the oil company uses a list of group codes, which are available in the Fuel POS terminal, the group code is selected from a drop down list. The entry of this field is obliged.

* If the oil company uses a product id without a list of group codes in the Fuel POS terminal, the manager will have to enter the id manually.

Report code

By means of report codes, own product categories can be made. Both on the day report and the month report, the turnover per report code will be displayed. At the installation of the Fuel POS, the card code will automatically be filled in as report code. However, you can replace this one by an own programmed report code, which you can select here from a drop down list.

Colours

When the customer starts a transaction via the iQ outdoor payment terminal, he has to select the desired product. In order to avoid mistakes, the product can be displayed on the iQ screen in the same colour as on the dispenser stickers. Via this screen, the service engineer programs the product colours.

3-100 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.1.4 Tab ‘Preset’ (Specific fuel)

Each filling is started for a maximum amount or a maximum volume. At the installation of the Fuel POS terminal, this maximum is set automatically at 970 euro, both for the day mode and the night mode of the pumps. It is however possible to modify these maxima.

Due to the use of the maximum preset values, the maximum value that can be displayed on a counter with a limited number of digits, will never be exceeded. Also in case of specific rules imposed by the government concerning a maximum amount per filling, preset values can be used. For example, in some countries the maximum amount for a filling during the night mode is set at 50 litres, since the government imposes that each filling may not be more than maximum 50 litres when a station is closed.

Very often a filling is started with a lower preset value as programmed in this screen, for example at a prepaid transaction, at a card transaction via an outdoor payment terminal,…

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-101

3.3.1.1.5 Tab ‘Loyalty’ (Specific fuel)

In the tab ‘Loyalty’ we will find the following information:

Loyalty

Loyalty on a specific fuel type means an automatic discount on this fuel type if it is bought by a customer, presenting a loyalty card or by a local customer that receives a loyalty discount. The station manager defines through this field whether this fuel type is eligible for an automatic discount. Loyalty is programmed as an amount per sold unit.

The value entered in this field is a base discount. A multiplier is used for each loyalty card and for each local customer who is entitled to a loyalty discount. The loyalty discount that the customer will eventually receive, is calculated by multiplying the base loyalty by the multiplier. Example: a customer or a card with multiplier 2.00 will receive a discount of € 0.050 if the base discount amounts to

0.025.

The loyalty amount has to be at least € 0.000 and can never exceed an amount higher than 75% of the active unit price. The value € 0.000 means that loyalty on this fuel type is not allowed.

3-102 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Loyalty reference

In this field the manager decides for each fuel whether the loyalty discount is calculated in relation to the base price or the pump price. This is implemented because the base price of a transaction started with an alternative price, will not equal the pump price. The desired basis for the calculation of the loyalty discount can be selected from a drop down list.

Max. discount %

In this field the manager indicates whether the cashier can give a discount on a fuel type in question or not. If a discount is allowed, the maximum discount will have to be entered. This maximum will be programmed as a percentage of the unit price.

The maximum percentage of discount is 99.99 %. The value 0.00 % means that not discount is allowed on this fuel type.

Example: a discount of maximum 10 % on an active price of € 1.059 implies that the cashier can give a maximum discount to the customer of € 0.106.

Points per litre

If the station gives saving points to the customers (for example by way of stamps or a loyalty card), then the manager decides with this field whether points are to be given for this particular fuel type. This is achieved by programming the number of points the customer gets when buying one litre of fuel. The value 0.00 means that no points are given.

Points can be given to customers in two different ways:

- If points are given to each customer, for example by way of stamps, the cashier will see for each sale how many points he is allowed to give. The manager can check via the shift report the maximum amount of points the cashier was allowed to give during his shift.

- If points are only given to customers presenting their loyalty card, then again a multiplier is linked to each loyalty card. The number of saving points the customer finally gets, is obtained by multiplying the number of points per litre by the multiplier. Example: a card with multiplier 2.00 will give 2.00 points if the number of points per litre amounts to 1.00.

Fuel bonus

The manager can indicate that if the customer has bought a minimum number of litres of a certain fuel type, a separate receipt is printed automatically mentioning the customer’s profit. This special action is named ‘fuel bonus’. In this field the manager indicates the minimum of litres that the customer has to buy in order to receive the fuel bonus.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-103

3.3.1.1.6 Tab ‘Blend’ (Specific fuel)

In Fuel POS, there is the possibility to sell fuels that are obtained by mixing two other fuels. This is for example used in the following special situations:

• In the service station a two-stroke pump is installed, which mixes automatically unleaded petrol and two-stroke oil.

• The service station sells Unleaded 96, which is obtained by mixing Unleaded 95 and

Unleaded 98.

• A service station sells Unleaded 98 and Unleaded 95 at the pump, but has only

1 tank for Unleaded petrol (Unleaded 98). When the customer selects Unleaded 95 at the pump, he actually receives Unleaded 98, since the product Unleaded 95 is composed for 100% of Unleaded 98.

In all these situations, the sale of the different products is registered correctly.

Furthermore, there will be no problem concerning the stock management as this is completely based at the base fuels.

Via this tab the technician programs the composition of a certain fuel type. Therefore, he enters the two base products and their importance in the composition.

The use of composed fuels is rather exceptional. Mostly the fuel and the base fuel are

100% identical.

3-104 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.1.7 Printing a fuel list

By choosing this button, a list with the most important fuel data can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/002

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

FUEL DATA

21-09-2006 12:32

(Prices and amounts are in EUR) fuel report code card group/prod. ID VAT: % max.discount loyalty points unit

02 Unleaded 98 Fuel unleaded 225 0101 1 17.50 5% 0.060 10.00 Ltr

03 Diesel Fuel diesel 425 0201 1 17.50 5% 0.060 10.00 Ltr

04 L.P.G. Fuel gas 525 0301 1 17.50 3% 0.030 5.00 Ltr

05 Unleaded 95 Fuel unleaded 325 0102 1 17.50 5% 0.060 10.00 Ltr

base price per unit discount on price sign activation of new fuel current new current new prices and discounts

02 Unleaded 98 1.254 1.265 0.060 0.060 22-09-2006 00:00

03 Diesel 1.009 1.015 0.060 0.060 Next day closure

04 L.P.G. 0.401 0.401 0.030 0.030

05 Unleaded 95 1.226 1.235 0.060 0.060 22-09-2006 00:00

alternative price 1 : Happy hour

price difference pump price activation fuel current new current new alternative price

02 Unleaded 98 -0.035 -0.035 1.219 1.230 22-09-2006 00:00

03 Diesel -0.035 -0.035 0.974 0.980 Next day closure

04 L.P.G. –0.035 -0.035 0.366 0.366

05 Unleaded 95 -0.035 -0.035 1.191 1.200 22-09-2006 00:00

alternative price 1 : Happy hour

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-105

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:002/002

Print base price: YES Official price

Print price difference: YES Your discount

Hours Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Hours Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat

00:00-00:30 12:00-12:30

00:30-01:00 12:30-13:00

01:00-01:30 13:00-13:30

01:30-02:00 13:30-14:00

02:00-02:30 14:00-14:30 X X X X X

02:30-03:00 14:30-15:00 X X X X X

03:00-03:30 15:00-15:30 X X

03:30-04:00 15:30-16:00 X X

04:00-04:30 16:00-16:30

04:30-05:00 16:30-17:00

05:00-05:30 17:00-17:30

05:30-06:00 17:30-18:00

06:00-06:30 18:00-18:30

06:30-07:00 18:30-19:00

07:00-07:30 19:00-19:30

07:30-08:00 19:30-20:00

08:00-08:30 20:00-20:30

08:30-09:00 20:30-21:00

09:00-09:30 21:00-21:30

09:30-10:00 21:30-22:00

10:00-10:30 X X X X X 22:00-22:30

10:30-11:00 X X X X X 22:30-23:00

11:00-11:00 X X 23:00-23:30

11:30-12:00 X X 23:30-00:00

Criterion Pump Day Night Mode

1 All X X All

Tank group real stock theoretical stock stock difference Min. theor. stock

01 Unleaded 98 21246.26 21249.00 -2.74 4000.00

02 Diesel 25924.63 25920.00 4.63 7500.00

03 L.P.G. 2951.33 2951.00 0.33 2500.00

04 Unleaded 95 14918.97 14917.00 1.97 5000.00

3-106 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.2 Criteria alternative prices (3,1,2)

The module ‘Alternative fuel prices’ is not a part of the standard Fuel POS system. Contact

Tokheim for more information concerning this option.

In addition to the base price, the manager can also program up to 7 alternative prices for each fuel type. Each time a pump is released, the Fuel POS will check which fuel price has to be applied for the filling. The application of the alternative prices is completely regulated via this menu item.

An alternative fuel price can for example be applied in the service station as follows:

* The official fuel price is programmed as base price. The pump price, which is applied to all transactions, is programmed as alternative price.

* Each filling between 13.00 and 14.00 gets the promotion “Happy hour”.

* When the customer starts the filling with the bank note acceptor, he will have to pay additional costs.

* In a certain part of the service station, the customers can only start the filling through the outdoor payment terminal. Only at the pumps in this part of the service station, a cheaper litre price is applied.

* …

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Adding a new alternative price.

• Deleting an existing alternative price.

• Modifying the properties of an existing alternative price, which means modifying the criteria that have to be met in order to have the advantage of an alternative price.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-107

The screen will look like this:

3-108 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

On the left of the screen, the alternative prices that are already programmed, are displayed:

In this overview, each alternative price is preceded by a number. This number is not just a sequence number, but it is also an indication of the priority of each alternative price. When there is an overlapping in the criteria of 2 alternative prices (and they would theoretically both be eligible for the same filling), the alternative price with the highest priority (lowest value) will be applied.

One of the criteria when applying alternative prices, is ‘Time’. If you select the line

‘Alternative prices’ in the tree, a global timetable is displayed in the tab on the right in which all alternative prices are included.

When choosing a specific alternative price in the tree, the properties of this alternative price can be modified in the 3 tabs on the right of the screen.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-109

3.3.1.2.1 Tab ‘General’ (All alternative prices)

In the tab ‘General’ a global timetable is displayed in which all alternative prices are included. On top of the screen, it is displayed which colour corresponds with each alternative price.

For each alternative price a timetable is programmed individually, without taking the timetables of other alternative prices into account. Therefore it is perfectly possible to have an overlapping in time between the different alternative prices. Only in the global overview, this becomes clear. The overlapping periods are shaded. The shaded period will have the same colour as the alternative price with the highest priority.

When there is an overlap in time, this does not mean that the alternative price with the lowest priority will never be applied in this overlapping period. Two alternative prices that are programmed in the same period can after all differ in other criteria.

3-110 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.2.2 Tab ‘General’ (Specific alternative price)

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Priority

In all, up to 7 different alternative prices can be programmed. Since an overlap can be programmed in the criteria of 2 alternative prices (if they theoretically are both qualified for the same filling), occasionally one has to choose which alternative price has to be used. This choice depends of the priority. In case of an overlap, the alternative price with the highest priority (smallest value) will be applied.

The priority is chosen out of a drop down list. Only a priority, which was not yet assigned to another alternative price, can be chosen out of this list.

Description

For each alternative price a description has to be entered. This description will be used in the screen in which the prices will actually be entered and in the global timetable.

Colour

For each alternative price a colour is chosen out of a drop down list. This colour will be used to display the alternative price in the timetable. It is not possible to use the same colour for several alternative prices.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-111

Print base price

On the customer receipt, the pump price is always printed. By choosing this option, the manager can decide to print the base price next to the pump price. In the field

‘Commercial text’ the text that has to be printed next to the base price, can be entered.

Print price difference

On the customer receipt, the difference between the base price and the pump price can be printed as a reference. In this way, one can for example draw the customer’s attention to the discount he has had. In the field ‘Commercial text’ the text that has to be printed next to the difference, can be entered.

3-112 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.2.3 Tab ‘Timetable’ (Specific alternative price)

When entering the timetable, the manager indicates when an alternative price is active.

When the colour of a cell in the timetable is ‘White’, the alternative price in the corresponding period is not active. To activate the alternative price, you click with the left mouse button at the desired cell. This cell then automatically gets the colour that you assigned to the alternative price. The opposite is also possible. To deactivate the alternative price again, you have to click at the coloured cell.

Instead of clicking at the cells one by one, you can also select a certain period that exists of contiguous cells. If you for example want to activate the alternative price from Monday till Friday, from 08:00 till 10:00, you have to do the following:

Click with the left mouse button at the cell ‘Monday 08:00 – 09:00’ and hold the mouse button. Drag down to the cell ‘Monday 09:00 – 10:00’ and then drag to the right till the cell ‘Friday 09:00 – 10:00’.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-113

When clicking in the timetable with the right mouse button, a pop-up window will appear with a number of additional possibilities:

• Add an interval of time

If you choose this item, the following pop-up window will be shown:

When selecting a start and end time, a certain period for the chosen day is programmed. By means of this method, periods of half an hour can be programmed.

At the activation of the option ‘All days’, the programmed period can be applied for all days of the week.

• Clear all intervals of time

All time intervals, which are programmed until now, will be erased.

3-114 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.2.4 Tab ‘Criteria’ (Specific alternative price)

In the tab ‘Criteria’ we will find the following information:

Criterion

For each alternative price up to 64 criterions can be programmed. This corresponds with 64 lines on the screen. An alternative fuel price will be applied if at least

1 criterion (1 line) has been met and if the alternative price is active in the period of starting the filling.

Pump

It can be programmed that the alternative price is only applied for a filling at one particular pump. Therefore the desired pump has to be selected from a drop down list.

If an alternative price has to be applied for example at the pumps 1 until 4, you then have to program 4 criteria and for each criterion another pump number has to be entered.

Choose ‘All’ if the alternative price is applicable at all pumps.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-115

Day / Night

These two columns concern the day and night mode of the pumps. With this option, you can program that the alternative price will only be applied during the day mode or only during the night mode.

When both options are enabled, the use of the alternative prices does not depend on the day or night mode.

When both options are disabled, the alternative price will never be applied. So one of the two options has to be enabled.

Mode

At the start of a transaction, the Fuel POS will check whether the criteria of an alternative price have been met. The transaction always starts in a certain mode: self-service, BNA,…

It can be programmed that the alternative price is only applied for a filling, which is started in a certain mode. Therefore the desired pump has to be selected in a drop down list, which has the following possibilities:

- selfs-service

- manual

: The transaction is started in the pump mode ‘selfservice’.

: The transaction is started in the pump mode ‘attended service’.

- BNA

- Banksys

: The transaction is started via the Bank Note Acceptor.

: The transaction is started via the outdoor terminal of

Banksys.

- OPT customer card : The transaction is started by means of a customer card

- OPT credit card via the Tokheim outdoor terminal.

: The transaction is started by means of a credit card or a company card via the Tokheim outdoor terminal.

: The transaction is started by means of a debit card via - OPT debit card the Tokheim outdoor terminal.

- EPR customer card : The transaction is started by means of a customer card

- EPR credit card via an external system.

: The transaction is started by means of a credit card or company card via an external system.

: The transaction is started by means of a debit card via - EPR debit card

- OPT cash card an external system.

: The transaction is started by means of a cash card via the Tokheim outdoor terminal.

Choose ‘All’ if the alternative price is applicable at all modes.

3-116 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.2.5 Adding a new alternative price

The following pop-up window is displayed when the function ‘Add’ is activated to create a new alternative price:

For a new alternative price, the following fields absolutely have to be filled in:

Description

Colour

Each alternative price gets a colour that is used when filling in the timetable. When there are already other alternative prices programmed, an unused colour will have to be chosen for the new alternative price.

Criteria

For a new alternative price, at least 1 criterion has to be programmed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-117

3.3.1.3 Fuel bonus (3,1,3)

The manager of the station can program that if the customer fills up for a minimum number of litres of a specific product, a separate receipt is automatically printed and indicates the advantage for the customer. This special action is called a ‘fuel bonus’.

Via this menu item, the layout of the separate receipt is programmed.

The screen will look like this:

3-118 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Name of the fuel bonus

The commercial name of the action can be filled in. This name will be used as a title on the fuel bonus receipt.

Extra lines on the fuel bonus receipt

In all, up to 10 lines can be programmed to describe the advantage the customer will finally receive.

Fuel bonus bar code

In this field, a bar code number can be filled in. The corresponding bar code will be printed on each fuel bonus ticket. Only EAN 8 and EAN 13 bar codes are accepted.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-119

3.3.1.4 Tank groups and nozzles (3,1,4)

At the installation of the Fuel POS, the service engineer enters the complete configuration of the forecourt in the system. This configuration is completely available in this menu item and contains the following components:

Tank groups

Per fuel type, the service engineer will make one or more tank groups. A tank group always exists of one or more physical tanks. In the Fuel POS, a theoretical stock is always stored per tank group.

If for example at a service station 2 Diesel tanks are connected, the Fuel POS does not store a theoretical stock for each individual tank. When a customer is filling up with Diesel, this Diesel comes from the 2 tanks and at a delivery of

Diesel, the product is spread over the two tanks. In this case, 1 tank group

Diesel is made.

If for example at a service station 2 tanks Unleaded 98 are not connected, then

2 tank groups Unleaded 98 are made.

In all, up to 16 tank groups can be created.

The real stock of a tank group in Fuel POS is the stock that is obtained by counting the real stocks of the tanks of that particular tank group.

Tanks

If an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS system, the service engineer will also enter the individual tanks in the Fuel POS and he will link each tank to the correct tank group.

In all, up to 16 tanks can be defined.

Pumps

All pumps on the forecourt that are linked to the Fuel POS, are defined in the system by the service engineer. Here a pump is meant to be a filling position or a pump number.

Up to 32 pumps can be linked to the Fuel POS system. However the pump number can go up to 64.

3-120 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Nozzles

For each pump, different nozzles are programmed. For each nozzle, the concerned product and tank group is indicated.

For each pump, up to 6 nozzles can be programmed.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Displaying the complete configuration of the forecourt.

• Consulting the theoretical fuel stocks.

• Checking the theoretical stock by entering the result of the manual gauging.

• Modifying/correcting the theoretical stocks not involving the normal deliveries.

• Printing the stock data of the different tank groups.

• Printing the stock movements (deliveries and modifications) of the different tank groups.

• Checking why a nozzle went out of service.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-121

On the left of the screen, the tank groups, tanks, pumps and nozzles are displayed:

By choosing ‘Tank group configuration’ in the tree, in the tab on the right of the screen a global overview can be displayed of all the fuel stocks in the different tank groups.

By choosing a specific tank group ( ) in the tree, the stock of this tank group can be displayed in the tab on the right of the screen. Via this tab a minimum stock can also be programmed, the result of a manual gauging can be entered as a check and finally the theoretical stock can be modified not involving the normal deliveries.

By choosing a specific tank ( ) in the tree, the properties of this tank can be displayed in the tab on the right of the screen and a number of alarms can be programmed.

By choosing a specific nozzle ( ) in the tree, in the 2 tabs on the right of the screen the properties of this nozzle can be displayed and you can check why a certain nozzle has been put out of service. In case a nozzle is put out of service, it is displayed in red ( ).

3-122 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.4.1 Tab ‘Stock data per tank group’

In the tab ‘Stock data per tank group’ we will find the following information:

The stocks are temperature compensated

This mentioning indicates that temperature compensation is active in the Fuel POS system. This is only possible in case an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS system, which passes on the temperature in the tank. As a consequence the fuel stocks in this table are stocks at 15 °C.

Tank group

Each line in the table corresponds with a tank group. In this column, the number of each tank group is shown.

Fuel

In this column the fuel type of each tank group is displayed.

Real stock

This column is only filled in when the Fuel POS has been connected to an automatic tank level gauge. The real content of the tank group is displayed, so it can be the sum of several individual tanks.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-123

Theor. stock

This column contains the theoretical stock. The Fuel POS will always store the theoretical stock of each tank group, whether an automatic tank level gauge has been connected or not. When a minimum stock is programmed and the theoretical stock has become lower than the programmed minimum stock, the background of this field is displayed in red.

Difference

The difference between the real and the theoretical stock is always displayed. Yet it will only be relevant if an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the

Fuel POS.

Min. theor. stock

In this column the minimum theoretical stock that is programmed for each tank group, is displayed. When a filling causes that the stock in the tank group becomes lower than the minimum stock, the cashier will receive a message.

When the theoretical stock has become lower than the programmed minimum theoretical stock, a receipt is printed automatically:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

25-09-2006 16:53:11

W A R N I N G

Min. stock tank group 1 (Unleaded 98)

When the stock has become lower than the programmed minimum stock, this is also registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# Tank group 1 25-09-2006 16:52:36 #

Min. stock tank group 1 (Unleaded 98)

3-124 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.4.2 Tab ‘Manual gauging / Stock adjustment’

In the tab ‘Manual gauging / Stock adjustment’ we will find the following information:

Fuel

At the top, the fuel type of a certain tank group is always displayed.

Theoretical stock

This field contains the theoretical fuel stock. It is updated automatically at each transaction. At a pump test, the stock is not updated since in this case the product taken will be poured back in the tank. The theoretical stock is also updated when entering the theoretical litres of a delivery that took place.

Minimum theoretical stock

Via this field, a minimum theoretical stock can be programmed. When a filling causes that the stock in the tank group becomes lower than the minimum stock, the cashier will receive a message.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-125

Check / adjustment stock

This screen allows you to check the stock of the chosen tank group. After executing a manual gauging, the gauged volume can be entered and the Fuel POS system will display the stock difference. Then you can modify the theoretical stock if necessary by using the gauged volume as new theoretical stock. All the fields that will be discussed hereafter, are related to this control and/or modification of the theoretical stock.

Gauged (real) stock

When the Fuel POS has not been connected to an automatic level gauge, the real stock is obtained by executing a manual gauging. In this field the result of this gauging has to be entered. In order to obtain a correct result, no filling for the chosen tank group may occur between the moment of the gauging and the moment of input.

When the Fuel POS has not been connected to an automatic tank level gauge, a conversion to 15 °C does not have to happen. After all, in this situation no temperature compensation is active in the Fuel POS system.

When in a service station there are 2 tanks that make 1 tank group, you may not forget to count the result of both gaugings and to enter this sum in the field.

When the Fuel POS has been connected to an automatic tank level gauge, the real stock of the chosen tank group is entered automatically in this field. If necessary, this can be replaced.

Stock difference

This field displays the difference between the actual theoretical stock and the result of the gauging (real stock) that is entered.

Check the stock / Adjust the stock

When the gauged (real) stock is entered and the stock difference is displayed, you have to indicate what you want to do with these data. There are 2 options:

- Check the stock

This possibility is selected by default. When the data were entered only for a stock control, without the purpose of modifying the theoretical stock, then you have to choose this option. The theoretical stock remains unchanged when saving the data.

- Adjust the stock

When selecting this option, you can replace the current theoretical stock. When saving the data, the gauged (real) stock that is entered, will be used as new theoretical stock.

3-126 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Date/time

The theoretical stock that is displayed, is the stock as it was at the opening of the screen. When afterwards more transactions took place, these transactions are not processed in the stock. The time that is displayed, is the time of registering the theoretical stock.

Information

In this field, supplementary information can be entered, which is related to the stock verification or stock modification.

Name

In this field a name can be entered, for example the name of the person that executed the gauging.

The stocks are temperature compensated

This mentioning indicates that temperature compensation is active in the Fuel POS system. This is only possible in case an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS system, which passes on the temperature in the tank. As a consequence the fuel stocks in this table are stocks at 15 °C. Only in this situation the temperature is mentioned on the right of the stocks.

The Fuel POS system always converts the real stock to 15 °C. However the theoretical stock at 15 °C is obtained in a complete other way.

When a fuel delivery is entered, the number of litres at 15 °C as a volume has to be entered. The Fuel POS will then at each filling convert internally the litres displayed on the counter to 15 °C and will write off the theoretical stock for this converted volume. The complete sale is registered according to the temperature of the surrounding area. For each customer and sales report, no conversion occurs. The conversion is only used in the stock management.

Each stock verification and each stock modification is registered in the Fuel POS journal. For example:

# Tank group 1 28-09-2006 16:07:15 #

manual gauging 5 Tank group 1 (Unleaded 98)

Theor. stock 21236.71 Gauged volume 21246.00 Stock difference -10.00

add. info: Weekly check, name: AVDW

# Tank group 1 28-09-2006 16:08:14 #

Stock adjustment 17 Tank group 1 (Unleaded 98)

Previous theoretical stock 21236.71 New theoretical stock 21246.26 Difference 0.00

add. info: Stock correction, name: AVDW

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-127

3.3.1.4.3 Tab ‘General’ (Specific tank)

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Tank group

This field indicates of which tank group the selected tank is a part.

Theoretical capacity

When the technician configures the different tanks of the service station, he enters the theoretical capacity or the maximum content of each tank.

Operational capacity

To build in an overfill security, an operational capacity is programmed. Usually, this is 95% to 97% of the theoretical capacity. The empty volume of the tank is calculated as the difference between this operational capacity and the real volume in the tank. When the fuel supplier asks for the empty volume, this is given with a certain safety margin.

3-128 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Margin temp. compensated ullage

At a delivery, one can first ask for the empty volume of the tank to verify how much maximum can be delivered. If the counter of the truck displays the number of delivered litres at 15 °C and the temperature of the delivered product would be much higher, then a problem can occur since the volume of the delivery is larger than the empty volume of the tank. For this reason, the technician can program a supplementary safety margin. A margin of 2% indicates that the empty volume that is displayed, is actually 2% lower than the real empty volume.

Height

The height of the tank is programmed by the service engineer.

Maximum fuel

For each tank the manager can program a maximum fuel level (in millimetres). When this level is reached at a delivery, the cashier will receive a message.

Critical water level

For each tank you can program a ‘critical water level’ (in millimetres). When this level is reached, the cashier will receive a message. Furthermore, all nozzles that are connected to this tank, will automatically be put out of service. This value is programmed at 50 mm by default.

High water level

For each tank you can program a ‘high water level’ (in millimetres). When this level is reached, the cashier will receive a message. This value is programmed at 20 mm by default.

Minimum fuel

For each tank the manager can program a minimum fuel level (in litres). When a filling causes that the stock in the tank becomes lower than this minimum fuel level, the cashier will receive a message.

Stock out

The service engineer programs a certain level (in millimetres) for each tank, that if it is reached, corresponds with a tank that can be considered as completely empty (at this level the product reaches the suction pipe). When this level is reached, the cashier will receive a message. Furthermore, all nozzles that are connected to this tank, will automatically be put out of service.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-129

3.3.1.4.4 Tab ‘General’ (Specific nozzle)

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Fuel

This field indicates the fuel type that is sold via the selected nozzle.

Tank group

Each nozzle is connected to a tank group. This field displays the number of the tank group and the product of this tank group.

Tank group (blend)

In Fuel POS, there is the possibility to sell fuels that are obtained by mixing two other fuels. In this situation it is possible that the sold fuel is composed of two different fuels out of two different tank groups.

This field displays the number of the second tank group for the composed product, and the product that is in this second tank group.

3-130 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Low flow rate level / High flow rate level

When a pump is connected to the Fuel POS via the IFSF protocol, there is the possibility to check automatically the flow rate of the pump. Therefore the service engineer can program the theoretical flow rate of the pump. Since some pumps are equipped with a push button for a high flow rate, a value can be entered both for the low flow rate and for the high flow rate. When a pump for 10 successive fillings, does not get 80% of the programmed flow rate, a warning is created automatically.

Shared pump number / Shared nozzle number

In a double-sided pump with for example 3 nozzles at each side, each nozzle has in theory its own mechanical index. Consequently the pump in this example would have 6 mechanical indexes. In the Fuel POS system these 6 mechanical indexes correspond with 6 totalisers.

Very rarely, a double-sided pump has a mechanical index per product. In the example mentioned-above, this would mean that the pump has 3 mechanical indexes, always shared by a nozzle at one side and a nozzle at the other side. The service engineer can program this special configuration by entering for the chosen nozzle the pump number and the nozzle number of the nozzle at the other side of the pump. After having entered this configuration, the 3 mechanical indexes will correspond again with 3 totalisers.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-131

3.3.1.4.5 Tab ‘Alarm’ (Specific nozzle)

In the tab ‘Alarm’ we will find the following information:

Alarm

In this column, the different reasons are displayed for which a nozzle can be put out of service. When the chosen nozzle is out of service, the option on the left of the alarm is automatically enabled. Furthermore, in the tree on the left of the screen, the nozzle is displayed in red. At the moment the following alarms are applied:

1 Pump preset overshot

When the pump is released with a preset, for example by using the Bank Note

Acceptor, the pump has to stop automatically when this preset is reached.

However, it can happen that due to a problem with for example the preset valves in the pump, the transaction passes this preset. In this situation a nozzle will automatically be put out of service to avoid that this happens once more. Yet a tolerance of 1 litre is applied.

The alarm condition can only be cancelled by a technician after having investigated and repaired the cause of the alarm.

3-132 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

2 Low fuel level recorded by the dispenser

In some countries, tanks must have a system that checks the minimum stock.

This system will be linked to the dispensers so that they will be disabled automatically as soon as the minimum stock level has been reached. The alarm will be neutralized automatically when the pump indicates again that the minimum fuel alarm is neutralized.

3 Maximum water level reached

When the maximum water level is reached in a tank to which the nozzle is coupled, automatically all nozzles that are coupled to this tank will be put out of service. The alarm will stop automatically when the water level goes down again under the alarm level.

4 Stock out level reached

A tank is considered to be empty when the level ‘stock out’ is reached. In this situation, all nozzles coupled to this tank, will automatically be put out of service.

The alarm will stop automatically when the fuel volume after a delivery will rise again until it is above the alarm level.

5 'No flow' alarm

It might happen that a customer selects a dispenser on the outdoor terminal, takes out a nozzle and then puts the nozzle back without having taken fuel.

When this occurs three times in a row with the same nozzle, the question arises whether one has messed about the dispenser and fuel has actually been taken, although the dispenser has not passed on information to the Fuel POS. Therefore, the nozzle is put out of service automatically in this situation.

The alarm state can only be removed by a technician after verification of the dispenser.

Clear

This option can only be used by a service engineer to cancel the alarm condition of a nozzle that was caused after crossing a pump preset or after a 'No flow' alarm.

Reset

At the moment this option is not yet used.

Execute

When the service engineer has enabled the option ‘Clear’, he can actually cancel the alarm by pressing this button.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-133

3.3.1.4.6 Printing stock data of tank groups

When choosing this button, a list can be printed with the stock data of each tank group. In addition, an overview is available of all stock movements that took place (deliveries and/or stock modifications) and stock controls that were executed. A pop-up window is displayed in which you can choose which list you want to print and for which tank group.

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Report / list to be printed

The preferred list is chosen out of a drop down list. The following lists are available:

- Stock data per tank group

- Stock

This list contains both the real and the theoretical stock of each tank group and will be printed at the receipt printer. movements

This list contains for each tank group the 20 last stock movements that took place. Stock movements are deliveries, stock modifications and stock controls.

Tank group selection

The data of all tank groups together can be gathered in the list, but it is also possible to include the data of 1 specific tank group in the list.

3-134 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

An example of the list ‘Stock data per tank group’ when ‘All tank groups’ have been chosen:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

05-10-2006 12:25:36

STOCK DATA PER TANK GROUP

Temperature compensated

Tank group 1 (Unleaded 98)

Real stock (Ltr) 21246.26

Theoretical stock (Ltr) 21247.00

Stock difference (Ltr) -0.74

Min. theor. stock (Ltr) 5000.00

Tank group 2 (Diesel)

Real stock (Ltr) 31848.97

Theoretical stock (Ltr) 31849.00

Stock difference (Ltr) -0.03

Min. theor. stock (Ltr) 8500.00

Tank group 3 (L.P.G.)

Real stock (Ltr) 2951.33

Theoretical stock (Ltr) 2951.00

Stock difference (Ltr) 0.33

Min. theor. stock (Ltr) 3000.00

Tank group 4 (Unleaded 95)

Real stock (Ltr) 14918.97

Theoretical stock (Ltr) 14917.00

Stock difference (Ltr) 1.97

Min. theor. stock (Ltr) 4000.00

Tank group 5 (Unleaded 98)

Real stock (Ltr) 23199.89

Theoretical stock (Ltr) 23200.00

Stock difference (Ltr) -0.11

Min. theor. stock (Ltr) 5000.00

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-135

An example of the list ‘Stock movements’ when 1 specific tank group has been chosen:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/004

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

STOCK MOVEMENTS

05-10-2006 13:36

Selection: Tank group 4

Date/time Tank group Details

05-10-2006 13:03 04 Unleaded 95 Delivery: 000016

Gauged: 05-10-2006 13:03

Volume: 7790.47 L Product temp.: 15.3 °C

Compensated volume: 7787.52 L Compensation temp.: 15.0 °C

Delivery speed: 231.04 Litres/minute

Maximum fuel height reached in tank 4: 1450.00 mm

Entered: 05-10-2006 13:36

Volume: 7785.00 L

User: GENERAL MANAGER

Name: AVDW

Information: Delivery note 2006/584.365.15.36

05-10-2006 12:59 04 Unleaded 95 Stock change: 000036

Theoretical stock: 14569.00 L

New stock: 14900.00 L

Difference: -331.00 L

User: GENERAL MANAGER

Name: AVDW

Information: Correction theoretical stock

05-10-2006 12:58 04 Unleaded 95 Manual gauging: 000015

Theoretical stock: 14569.00 L

Gauged volume: 14900.00 L

Difference: -331.00 L

User: GENERAL MANAGER

Name: AVDW

Information: Weekly gauging

3-136 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.5 Tanks (3,1,5)

This menu item is only available when an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Consulting the real fuel stocks and the status of the different tanks.

• Programming the alarm levels for each tank.

• Checking for possible leaks in a tank.

• Printing the real fuel stocks.

• Printing the tank tables.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-137

On the left of the screen the tanks are displayed:

By choosing ‘Tank status’ in the tree, a global overview of the status of all connected tanks ( ) is displayed on the right of the screen. Depending on the number of tanks, these are divided over one or more tabs.

By choosing a specific tank ( ) in the tree, the properties of this tank can be displayed in the 3 tabs on the right of the screen. Furthermore the alarm levels can be programmed and a tank control can be started. When a certain alarm level is reached, this tank is displayed in red ( ). In the tabs on the right, you can check which alarm level was exceeded.

3-138 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.5.1 Tab all tanks

Depending on the number of connected tanks, these are divided over one or more tabs.

For each tank the most important data are displayed. You will find a detailed description of these data on the pages hereafter.

The volumes that are displayed here, are always at ambient temperature so not compensated to 15.0 °C.

Every 10 seconds the displayed data are renewed automatically.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-139

3.3.1.5.2 Tab ‘Tank status’ (Specific tank)

In the tab ‘Tank status’ we will find the following information:

Theoretical capacity

This field displays the theoretical capacity or maximum content of the chosen tank, which was entered by the service engineer at the configuration of the tank.

Operational capacity

To build in an overfill security, an operational capacity is programmed. Usually, this is 95% to 97% of the theoretical capacity. The empty volume of the tank is calculated as the difference between this operational capacity and the real volume in the tank. When the fuel supplier asks for the empty volume, this is given with a certain safety margin.

Fuel volume

This field contains the real fuel stock at ambient temperature. When a minimum stock is programmed (this is located in the box ‘Min.’) and the real stock has reached this alarm level, then an alarm symbol ( ) is added to the field.

Temp. compensated

This field contains the real stock compensated at 15 °C.

3-140 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Ullage

The ullage of the tank is the difference between the operational capacity and the fuel volume (at ambient temperature).

Compensated ullage

At a delivery, one can first ask for the empty volume of the tank to verify how much maximum can be delivered. If the counter of the truck displays the number of delivered litres at 15 °C and the temperature of the delivered product would be much higher, then a problem can occur since the volume of the delivery is larger than the empty volume of the tank. For this reason, the service engineer can program an additional safety margin. The programmed safety margin of for example

2% results in a compensated ullage that is 2% lower than the empty volume, which is displayed in the previous field.

Fuel level

This field displays the real fuel level in the tank. This fuel level is converted by the

Fuel POS to a fuel volume in litres based on the active tank table. When a maximum level is entered (this is located in the box ‘Max.’) and the real stock rises at a delivery above this alarm level, then the alarm symbol ( ) is added to the field. Also when the fuel level goes down the alarm level ‘Stock out’, the alarm condition is activated.

Water level

This field displays the water level in the tank. The value of the last gauging is displayed. When a maximum level is programmed (a high and/or critical level) and the water rises above one of these alarm levels, then an alarm symbol ( ) will be added to the field.

Temperature

This field displays the temperature inside the tank.

Stock out

The service engineer programs a level (in millimetres) that, when it is reached, corresponds with a tank that can be considered as being empty (this is the level when the product reaches the suction pipe). At a certain moment, it is no longer possible to do a filling, even if there is still some product left in the tank. All nozzles that are connected to this tank, are automatically put out of service when this level is reached.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-141

Gauge status

This field displays, by means of codes, the status of the automatic tank level gauge connected to the Fuel POS system. This code is directly copied from the level gauge system and is only used by service engineers.

Tank status

This field displays the tank status. This status is also shown graphically.

OK

The product in the connected tank is stable. Neither a delivery, nor a transaction is active.

Transaction busy

A filling is taking place via a nozzle that is connected to the involved tank.

Ongoing delivery

The Fuel POS has detected the start of a delivery. This status will not change until the product in the tank is stable again.

Connection broken

The connection between the tank and the Fuel POS is broken.

3-142 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

So in total there are 5 alarm levels that, when they are exceeded, cause that a tank is put in an alarm status:

• The minimum fuel volume is reached.

• The maximum fuel level is reached at a delivery.

• The tank is empty, the level ‘Stock out’ is reached.

• The high water level is reached.

• The critical water level is reached.

In all these situations, not only an alarm status is displayed on the screen, but each time also a receipt will be printed and a registration in the journal will take place. Also when an alarm status is cancelled again, a receipt is printed and a journal registration is made.

Example of a receipt when the real stock becomes lower than the programmed minimum stock:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

MIN. FUEL LEVEL

REACHED

Tank 6 (Diesel)

Fuel volume (Ltr) 6291.07

Time 06-10-2006 14:35:59

Example of a receipt when the real stock at a delivery rises again above the programmed minimum stock:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

MINIMUM FUEL LEVEL

ALARM CLEARED

Tank 6 (Diesel)

Fuel volume (Ltr) 28810.53

Time 06-10-2006 17:18:10

Example of a journal registration when the water level in a tank has risen above the programmed critical water level:

# Tank 6 06-10-2006 10:30:05 #

Critical water level reached in tank 6 (Diesel)

Water level: 103.54 mm, Alarm level: 30.00 mm, Height/capacity tank: 1800.00 mm / 29100.00 litres

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-143

3.3.1.5.3 Tab ‘Configuration’ (Specific tank)

In the tab ‘Configuration’ we will find the following information:

Tank group

This field indicates of which tank group the selected tank is a part.

Theoretical capacity

When the service engineer configures the different tanks of the service station, he enters the theoretical capacity or the maximum content of each tank.

Operational capacity

To build in an overfill security, an operational capacity is programmed. Usually, this is 95% to 97% of the theoretical capacity. The empty volume of the tank is calculated as the difference between this operational capacity and the real volume in the tank. When the fuel supplier asks for the empty volume, this is given with a certain safety margin.

3-144 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Margin temp. compensated ullage

At a delivery, one can first ask for the empty volume of the tank to verify how much maximum can be delivered. If the counter of the truck displays the number of delivered litres at 15 °C and the temperature of the delivered product would be much higher, then a problem can occur since the volume of the delivery is larger than the empty volume of the tank. For this reason, the technician can program a supplementary safety margin. A margin of 2% indicates that the empty volume that is displayed, is actually 2% lower than the real empty volume.

Height

The height of the tank is programmed by the service engineer.

Maximum fuel

For each tank the manager can program a maximum fuel level (in millimetres). When this level is reached at a delivery, the cashier will receive a message.

Critical water level

For each tank you can program a ‘critical water level’ (in millimetres). When this level is reached, the cashier will receive a message. Furthermore, all nozzles that are connected to this tank, will automatically be put out of service. This value is programmed at 50 mm by default.

High water level

For each tank you can program a ‘high water level’ (in millimetres). When this level is reached, the cashier will receive a message. This value is programmed at 20 mm by default.

Minimum fuel

For each tank the manager can program a minimum fuel volume (in litres). When a filling causes that the stock in the tank becomes lower than this minimum fuel level, the cashier will receive a message.

Stock out

The service engineer programs a certain level (in millimetres) for each tank that if it is reached, corresponds with a tank that can be considered as being completely empty (at this level the product reaches the suction pipe). When this level is reached, the cashier will receive a message. Furthermore, all nozzles that are connected to this tank, will automatically be put out of service.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-145

3.3.1.5.4 Tab ‘Tank check’ (Specific tank)

When a tank level gauge has been connected, a leak in a tank will automatically be detected by the Fuel POS.

The leak detection is performed per tank and starts each time the tank status becomes idle. This means:

* There are no fillings active for any nozzle connected to the particular tank.

* There is no delivery in progress for the particular tank.

* The product in the tank is stable (there is a time-out between the end of a delivery or a filling and the start of leak detection).

The leak detection for a tank stops whenever:

* A filling starts for a nozzle connected to the tank.

* A delivery starts for the tank.

* The temperature difference between the current moment and the start of the leak detection becomes too big (more than 0,5 °C).

On top of this continuous leak detection, the manager can manually start the leak detection or tank check via this tab.

In the tab ‘Tank check’ we will find the following information:

Start date

In this field, the manager can enter the time when the tank check must start.

3-146 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

End date

In this field, the manager can enter the time when the tank check must be ended.

However the tank check is ended earlier when a filling or a delivery starts for a tank that is being checked. When the manually started tank check ends, the continuous leak detection will automatically start again.

All

Press this button if you want to start a tank check for all tanks with an entered start and end time.

When the Fuel POS detects a tank leak or when the manual tank check is ended, a receipt will automatically be printed and this will be registered in the Fuel POS journal.

Example of a receipt after a tank check:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

RESULTS

TANK CHECK

Tank 6 (Diesel)

From To

10-10-2006 12:33 10-10-2006 13:33

1542.00 mm 1542.00 mm

25425.39 Litres 25425.39 Litres

15.10 °C 15.10 °C

Example of a journal registration in case of a leak detection:

# Tank 4 10-10-2006 12:38:40 #

Leak detected in tank 4 (Unleaded 95)

Leak detected in tank 4 (Unleaded 95) on 10-10-2006 12:37

From 10-10-06 11:42, mm: 1061.06, Litres: 17719.71, temp. : 15.3

To 10-10-06 12:37, mm: 1056.68, Litres: 17629.58, temp. : 15.3

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-147

3.3.1.5.5 Printing the tank data

By choosing this button, a list with all stock data of each tank can be printed.

On top of this also the tank tables can be printed.

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Report / list to be printed

The preferred list is chosen out of a drop down list. The following lists are available:

- Tank

This list contains the real stock, the temperature and the water level for each tank.

- Tank status (Receipt printer)

- Tank status - simplified (Receipt printer)

This list contains all available data for each tank and it is printed on the receipt printer.

This list contains the most important data for each tank and it is printed on the receipt printer.

- Tank tables

Of each tank, the active tank table can be printed. This table displays the conversion of millimetres to litres.

Tank selection

The data of all the tanks together can be gathered in the lists, but it is also possible to include the data of 1 specific tank in a list.

3-148 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of the list ‘Tank status’ when ‘All tanks’ has been chosen:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

TANK STATUS

10-10-2006 15:54

Selection: All

Tank 1

Unleaded 98 21246.26 L Product temperature: 15.0 °C

Compensated volume: 21246.26 L Compensation temperature: 15.0 °C

Water: 0.00 mm Probe status: 0

Tank status: Transaction busy

Tank 2

Diesel 25930.93 L Product temperature: 15.3 °C

Compensated volume: 25924.63 L Compensation temperature: 15.0 °C

Water: 0.00 mm Probe status: 0

Tank status: OK

Tank 3

L.P.G. 11205.90 L Product temperature: 15.1 °C

Compensated volume: 11205.90 L Compensation temperature: 15.0 °C

Water: 0.00 mm Probe status: 0

Tank status: Ongoing delivery

Tank 4

Unleaded 95 14329.91 L Product temperature: 15.3 °C

Compensated volume: 14324.49 L Compensation temperature: 15.0 °C

Water: 100.00 mm Probe status: 0

Tank status: OK

Tank 5

Unleaded 95 23199.89 L Product temperature: 15.0 °C

Compensated volume: 23199.39 L Compensation temperature: 15.0 °C

Water: 0.00 mm Probe status: 0

Tank status: OK

Tank 6

Diesel 5925.30 L Product temperature: 15.2 °C

Compensated volume: 5924.34 L Compensation temperature: 15.0 °C

Water: 0.00 mm Probe status: 0

Tank status: OK

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-149

Example of the list ‘Tank status (Receipt printer)’ when 1 specific tank has been chosen:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

10-10-2006 16:21:33

TANK INFORMATION

Tank number 2 (Diesel)

Theoretical capacity (Ltr)

30000

Operational capacity (Ltr)

29100

Fuel volume (Ltr) 15.3°C 25930.93

Temp. compensated (Ltr) 15.0°C 25924.63

Ullage (Ltr) 3169.07

Comp. ullage (Ltr) 2% 3105.69

Min. fuel level (Ltr) 3000

Fuel level (mm) 1452.00

Max fuel level (mm) 1600

Water level (mm) 0.00

Critical water level (mm) 50

High water level (mm) 20

Temperature (°C) 15.3

Stock out (mm) 100

Gauge status 0

Tank status OK

Example of the list ‘Tank status - simplified (Receipt printer)’:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

24-03-2009 19:00:46

TANK INFORMATION

Tank Cap. Volume Ullage

1 Unleaded 98 28000 14768.96 13229.18

2 Diesel 29100 25429.34 3623.01

3 L.P.G. 28000 14575.62 13424.38

4 Unleaded 95 23000 18647.36 4307.89

5 Unleaded 95 28000 23577.75 4443.03

6 Diesel 48500 26613.53 21873.53

Tank Water level Temperature

1 Unleaded 98 0.00 15.1

2 Diesel 3.00 16.8

3 L.P.G. 0.00 15.7

4 Unleaded 95 0.00 16.9

5 Unleaded 95 0.00 14.3

6 Diesel 0.00 15.6

3-150 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of a tank table:

STATION NUMBER:8010 TANK TABLE:02 PAGE:002/002

mm Litres | mm Litres | mm Litres | mm Litres | mm Litres | mm Litres

0 0.00 | 510 6990.79 | 1020 17538.91 | 1530 27178.49 | |

10 21.05 | 520 7182.60 | 1030 17749.06 | 1540 27328.57 | |

20 59.45 | 530 7375.50 | 1040 17958.87 | 1550 27476.57 | |

30 109.03 | 540 7569.47 | 1050 18168.30 | 1560 27622.10 | |

40 167.58 | 550 7764.47 | 1060 18377.33 | 1570 27765.08 | |

50 233.81 | 560 7960.47 | 1070 18585.93 | 1580 27905.44 | |

60 306.83 | 570 8257.42 | 1080 18974.10 | 1590 28043.08 | |

70 385.99 | 580 8355.31 | 1090 19001.77 | 1600 28177.90 | |

80 470.78 | 590 8554.09 | 1100 19208.93 | 1610 28309.80 | |

90 560.79 | 600 8753.74 | 1110 19415.56 | 1620 28438.68 | |

100 655.67 | 610 8954.21 | 1120 19621.63 | 1630 28564.41 | |

110 755.13 | 620 9155.51 | 1130 19827.09 | 1640 28686.87 | |

120 858.92 | 630 9357.56 | 1140 20031.93 | 1650 28805.93 | |

130 966.80 | 640 9560.36 | 1150 20236.13 | 1660 28921.42 | |

140 1078.58 | 650 9763.87 | 1160 20439.64 | 1670 29033.20 | |

150 1194.07 | 660 9968.06 | 1170 20642.43 | 1680 29141.08 | |

160 1313.13 | 670 10172.91 | 1180 20844.49 | 1690 29244.87 | |

170 1435.59 | 680 10378.37 | 1190 21045.78 | 1700 29344.33 | |

180 1561.32 | 690 10584.44 | 1200 21246.26 | 1710 29439.21 | |

190 1690.20 | 700 10791.06 | 1210 21445.91 | 1720 29529.22 | |

200 1822.10 | 710 10998.23 | 1220 21614.69 | 1730 22614.01 | |

210 1956.92 | 720 11205.90 | 1230 21812.58 | 1740 29693.47 | |

220 2094.56 | 730 11414.06 | 1240 22039.53 | 1750 29766.49 | |

230 2234.92 | 740 11622.67 | 1250 22235.53 | 1760 29832.42 | |

240 2377.90 | 750 11831.70 | 1260 22430.53 | 1770 29890.97 | |

250 2523.42 | 760 12041.13 | 1270 22624.50 | 1780 29940.55 | |

260 2671.43 | 770 12250.94 | 1280 22817.40 | 1790 29978.95 | |

270 2821.81 | 780 12461.09 | 1290 23009.21 | 1800 30000.00 | |

280 2974.50 | 790 12671.55 | 1300 23199.89 | 2800 30050.00 | |

290 3129.43 | 800 12882.31 | 1310 23389.39 | | |

300 3286.53 | 810 13093.33 | 1320 23577.69 | | |

310 3445.74 | 820 13304.59 | 1330 23764.74 | | |

320 3607.00 | 830 13516.05 | 1340 23950.52 | | |

330 3770.25 | 840 13727.70 | 1350 24134.97 | | |

340 3935.43 | 850 13939.51 | 1360 24318.06 | | |

350 4102.48 | 860 14151.45 | 1370 24499.74 | | |

360 4271.35 | 870 14363.50 | 1380 24679.99 | | |

370 4442.00 | 880 14575.62 | 1390 24858.74 | | |

380 4614.35 | 890 14787.80 | 1400 25035.97 | | |

390 4788.38 | 900 15000.00 | 1410 25211.62 | | |

400 4964.03 | 910 15212.20 | 1420 25385.65 | | |

410 5141.26 | 920 15424.38 | 1430 25568.00 | | |

420 5320.01 | 930 15636.50 | 1440 25728.65 | | |

430 5500.26 | 940 15848.55 | 1450 25897.52 | | |

440 5681.94 | 950 16060.49 | 1460 26064.57 | | |

450 5865.03 | 960 16272.30 | 1470 26229.75 | | |

460 6049.48 | 970 16483.95 | 1480 26393.00 | | |

470 6235.26 | 980 16695.41 | 1490 26554.26 | | |

480 6422.31 | 990 16906.67 | 1500 26713.47 | | |

490 6610.61 | 1000 17117.68 | 1510 26870.57 | | |

500 6800.11 | 1010 17328.45 | 1520 27025.50 | | |

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-151

3.3.1.6 Deliveries (3,1,6)

For a correct follow-up of the fuel stocks, each delivery has to be registered in the

Fuel POS. The method of working depends whether an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS or not.

• If an automatic tank level gauge has been connected, the Fuel POS will autonomous detect whether a delivery has taken place. For each delivery that is detected, the manager has to enter the number of litres that were theoretically delivered, for example by means of the data on the delivery note of the driver. Furthermore, additional information can also be filled in such as the number of the delivery note.

The opposite of a delivery is also possible. If the Fuel POS detects that the real stock has decreased more than the theoretical stock, then automatically a stock decrease will be created (a delivery with a negative value). Also for this stock decrease you can enter additional information.

• If no automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS, then each delivery has to be entered manually.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Printing and consulting the last 20 deliveries.

• Modifying the data of an automatic detected delivery or stock decrease.

• Adding a new delivery.

3-152 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

The screen will look like this:

The mentioning ‘Temperature compensated’ in the title bar, indicates that temperature compensation is active in the Fuel POS. This is only possible if an automatic tank level gauge, which passes on the temperature inside the tank, has been connected to the

Fuel POS system. As a consequence, the fuel volumes in this table are deliveries at

15 °C.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-153

3.3.1.6.1 Tab ‘General’

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Sequence number

Each delivery (or stock decrease) is automatically given a sequence number. In this overview the last 20 deliveries and/or stock decreases are displayed.

Date/time

In this column, the date and time are displayed when the delivery has been added, either automatically when it was detected by the Fuel POS or manually.

Tank group

Each delivery is linked to a tank group. In this column the tank group number is displayed.

Fuel

In this column, the fuel type of the tank group is displayed.

3-154 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Manual

This column contains the theoretical number of litres that were entered before the delivery. This number of litres is entered when adding manually a new delivery or when modifying the data of an automatic detected delivery. On the basis of the litres, the theoretical fuel stock is changed.

Automatic

This column is only filled in when an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS. It contains the number of litres the Fuel POS considered as a delivery (positive value) or as a stock decrease (negative value).

Information

This column contains extra information, for example the number of the delivery note. The manager can enter extra information about each delivery (manual or automatic).

For each delivery or stock decrease that is detected automatically, a new line will automatically be added in this tab. The fields ‘Manual’ and ‘Information’ are not yet entered and furthermore the field ‘Manual’ is still active. For example the following lines are added when two new deliveries are detected:

To enter the theoretical litres of this delivery, you do not need to add a new delivery!

When clicking with the left mouse button on the field ‘Manual’, you open a pop-up window in which the theoretical data can be entered. To avoid mistakes, the button to add a new delivery is disabled as long as there are automatically detected deliveries for which you did not yet enter the theoretical data.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-155

After clicking on the field ‘Manual’ the following pop-up window is displayed:

In the pop-up window you will find the following information:

Sequence number

This field contains the sequence number that is automatically given when a delivery is detected.

Tank group

This field displays the tank group of which the delivery has been detected.

Stock difference

In the Fuel POS both a theoretical and a real stock are available. When a delivery has been detected, the real stock is automatically up-to-date, but as long as you have not yet added the theoretical litres in this pop-up window, the theoretical stock is not yet modified. This field displays the difference between the real stock and the theoretical stock. The theoretical stock as well as the stock difference are only modified, when the theoretical delivery is confirmed.

Automatic

This field displays the number of litres that - according to the Fuel POS - have been delivered at ambient temperature (or that have drained off in case of a stock decrease).

3-156 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Temp. compensated

This field displays the number of litres that have been delivered according to the

Fuel POS, converted to 15 °C.

Manual

This field is to enter the number of litres, which have theoretically been delivered, for example the number of litres displayed on the delivery note. If temperature compensation is active, then the number of litres at 15.0 °C have to be entered.

Based on this number of litres, the theoretical fuel stock is changed. Concerning the stock decrease, you can enter a negative value in this field.

Date/time

In this field the date and time at which the delivery or stock decrease has been detected, are displayed.

Name

In this field the name can be filled in of the person who enters the data or if necessary the name of the driver who has executed the delivery.

Information

This field is to enter extra information for the chosen delivery such as for example the number of the delivery note.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-157

When the Fuel POS detects a delivery or a stock decrease, a receipt will be printed automatically and it will be registered in the Fuel POS journal.

Example of a receipt when a delivery is detected automatically:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

DELIVERY

Tank group 2 (Diesel)

Litres 14298.58

Compensated litres (15.00 °C) 14295.11

Max. fuel height for tank 2 1695.40

Max. fuel height for tank 6 989.99

Start time 11-10-2006 16:36:53

Stop time 11-10-2006 17:39:14

Sequence number 47

Delivery speed (Litres/minute) 231.92

Tank temp. before delivery (°C) 15.30

Tank temp. after delivery (°C) 15.30

Temperature delivered product (°C) 15.30

Example of a journal registration when a stock decrease is detected:

# Tank group 1 11-10-2006 17:50:29 #

Stock decrease detected in tank group 1 (Unleaded 98) on 11-10-2006 17:50

Stock decrease of –1953.63 l in tank grp. 1, temperature 15.00 C

Sequence number: 48, Fuel: 2 (Unleaded 98)

Fuel level tank 1 468.36 mm

Also when the theoretical data are added before a delivery or stock decrease is detected automatically, a registration in the journal will occur:

# Tank group 2 11-10-2006 18:04:27 #

manual delivery 14300.00 ltr Tank group 2 (Diesel)

add. info: Delivery note 2006/55465, name: AVDW, Sequence number 47

3-158 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.6.2 Adding a new delivery

The following pop-up window is opened when the function ‘Add’ is activated to add a new delivery:

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Sequence number

Each delivery is automatically given a sequence number.

Tank group

Choose the tank group for which you want to add a delivery.

Stock difference

In the Fuel POS both a theoretical and a real stock are available if an automatic tank level gauge has been connected. This field displays the difference between the real stock and the theoretical stock. The theoretical stock as well as the stock difference are only modified, when the theoretical delivery is confirmed.

Manual

This field is to enter the number of litres, which have theoretically been delivered, for example the number of litres displayed on the delivery note. If temperature compensation is active, then the number of litres at 15.0 °C have to be entered.

Based on this number of litres, the theoretical fuel stock is changed. Concerning the stock decrease, you can enter a negative value in this field.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-159

Date/time

In this field the current date and time are displayed.

Name

In this field the name can be filled in of the person who enters the data or if necessary the name of the driver who has executed the delivery.

Information

This field is to enter extra information for the chosen delivery such as for example the number of the delivery note.

Each delivery that is added manually, will be registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# Tank group 1 11-10-2006 18:35:40 #

manual delivery 17500.00 ltr Tank grou 01 (Unleaded 98)

add. info: Delivery note 2006/78543, name: AVDW, Sequence number 53

3-160 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.1.6.3 Printing deliveries

By choosing this button, a list with the last 20 deliveries and/or stock decreases (detected automatically or added manually) can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/005

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

DELIVERIES

11-10-2006 18:41

No.: 53 TANK GROUP: 1 Unleaded 98

ENTERED: 11-10-2006 18:24

VOLUME: 17500.00 L

INFO: Delivery note 2006/78543

USER: GENERAL MANAGER

NAME: AVDW

No.: 52 TANK GROUP: 4 Unleaded 95

GAUGED: 11-10-2006 17:50

VOLUME: -1750.60 L

FUEL HEIGHT IN TANK 4 468.36 mm

ENTERED: 11-10-2006 17:50

VOLUME: -1751.00 L

INFO: Error

USER: GENERAL MANAGER

NAME: AVDW

No.: 51 TANK GROUP: 2 Diesel

GAUGED: 11-10-2006 16:36

VOLUME: 14298.58 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE: 15.3 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 14295.10 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATRUE: 15.0 °C

START TEMPERATURE: 15.3 °C STOP TEMPERATURE: 15.3 °C

DELIVERY SPEED: 293.31 Litres/minute

MAXIMUM FUEL HEIGHT REACHED IN TANK 2: 1695.40 mm

MAXIMUM FUEL HEIGHT REACHED IN TANK 6: 896.34 mm

ENTERED: 11-10-2006 16:36

VOLUME: 14300.00 L

INFO: Delivery note 2006/55465

USER: GENERAL MANAGER

NAME: AVDW

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-161

3.3.2 Pumps (3,2)

All pumps of the forecourt that are linked to the Fuel POS, are defined in the Fuel POS by the service engineer. However, there are a number of parameters that the manager can program. Therefore this menu item is used.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Programming the pump modes.

• Switching between day and night mode.

• Locking or unlocking all pumps.

• Programming the number of pump buffers.

• The complete management of totalisers and indexes.

The screen will look like this:

3-162 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

On the left of the screen the pumps and the nozzles defined in the station are displayed:

By choosing ‘Pumps’ in the tree, the pump modes can be programmed in the 3 tabs on the right of the screen. It is also possible to switch between the day and night mode, to lock or unlock all pumps and to program the pump buffers.

By choosing a specific pump in the tree, the totalisers of this pump can be displayed in the tab on the right of the screen.

By choosing a specific nozzle in the tree, the totaliser of this nozzle can be checked and/or modified in the tab on the right of the screen.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-163

3.3.2.1 Tab ‘Pump mode’ (All pumps)

A pump mode indicates in which way a pump can/may be used. Can the pump be chosen via an outdoor payment terminal? Is self-service allowed and does one then have to release the pump manually for each filling? In this tab the pump modes are programmed. Each line in the table corresponds with a pump, each column indicates a certain pump mode.

3-164 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

The following pump modes are available:

Self-service

Self-service means that each filling is payable on the Fuel POS terminal and must be settled on it. Two different values can be programmed. release

For each filling, the cashier has to release the pump again. release

When a filling is ended, the pump is automatically released for the next filling, unless the maximum number of buffers is reached. If the maximum number of buffers is reached, the pump is released again when one of the buffered fillings is settled.

When the cashier locks a pump in automatic release, the next time it has to be released manually. Afterwards the release is automatic again.

Attended service

In principle, this pump mode is used when you serve the customers on the forecourt. The difference with self-service is that you are not obliged to settle each filling on the Fuel POS terminal. When the maximum number of buffers is reached, a new filling can yet be started. The oldest unsettled filling is then automatically considered as being settled, which causes that a new buffer is released. Two different values can be programmed. release

For each filling the pump has to be released again. This is however only possible by means of a remote control and not via the Fuel POS terminal.

• Automatic

When a filling is ended, the pump is automatically released for the next filling.

When the cashier locks a pump in automatic release, the next time it has to be released manually. Afterwards the release is automatic again.

Card payment via the outdoor terminal

This pump mode is used to allow a customer to choose the pump via the outdoor terminal after inserting his card. When the filling is ended, no further process of the cashier is required. Two different values can be programmed. release

The pump chosen on the outdoor terminal (after the customer has entered his card and all correct data) still has to be released by the cashier. This pump mode is particularly meant for LPG pumps, so that the cashier always knows when an LPG pump is used.

• Automatic

The pump chosen on the outdoor terminal (after the customer has entered his card and all correct data) will automatically be released for one filling.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-165

BNA or Bank Note Acceptor

This pump mode is used to allow the customer to choose a pump via the

BNA or bank note acceptor. When the filling is ended, no further process of the cashier is required. Two different values can be programmed.

• Manual release

After the customer has inserted the bank notes and has entered all data correctly, the pump still has to be released by the cashier. This pump mode is particularly meant for LPG pumps, so that the cashier always knows when an LPG pump is used.

• Automatic

After the customer has inserted the bank notes and has entered all data correctly, the pump is automatically released.

Release from an external system

This pump mode is used to allow a pump to be released from an external system, for example a system for vehicle identification or in the future payment by mobile phone. When the filling is ended, no further process of the cashier is required. Two different values can be programmed. release

After the pump is reserved by an external system, the pump still has to be released by the cashier. This pump mode is particularly meant for LPG pumps, so that the cashier always knows when an LPG pump is used. release

After the pump is reserved by an external system, this pump is automatically released.

Test mode

This pump mode is used to conduct pump tests. For this pump mode only an automatic release can be chosen. After the service engineer has put back the nozzle, the pump will automatically be released for another test. A filling that took place with this pump mode does not require any action by the cashier, but is automatically registered as a pump test. The fuel stock in the Fuel POS does not change because the fuel is put back in the tank after the test.

The cashier can block a pump reserved for the conduction of pump tests in the regular way. This is for example necessary if a customer wishes to use a reserved pump at the moment the service engineer is not nearby the pump. If the service engineer wishes to conduct a test then, the pump will have to be released manually.

Every time the pump modes are modified, a receipt will be printed and a journal registration will occur. Example of a journal registration:

# Dispensing 12-10-2006 17:19:29 #

Pump modes changed

3-166 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Remarks:

• Different pump modes can be combined for one pump. A pump in self-service mode can for example be used with the outdoor payment terminal and the bank note acceptor. The Fuel POS terminal will prevent an invalid combination from being used. For example, a test mode can never be combined with another pump mode on the same pump. Another example is that self-service can never be combined with manual service on the same pump.

• Choose ‘Blank’ in the drop down list if you want to disable a pump mode again.

• If the station is obliged to make a cash sheet for each day report, this has to be done within 24 hours. When after 24 hours, the day report is still not yet checked, the pumps will be blocked temporarily. In the pump mode table the letter ‘T’ will be filled in temporarily.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-167

3.3.2.2 Tab ‘Day/night’ (All pumps)

In the sales screen, the cashier can put the pumps in day or night mode. Furthermore he can block all the pumps by pressing the emergency stop.

In this tab, the current pump mode of the pumps is displayed. If required, another mode can be activated.

Remarks:

• If one or more pumps are used in self-service or manual service with an automatic release, you must not forget to activate the night mode when closing the service station.

• After an emergency stop, the pumps can be activated again by selecting the day or night mode.

• The Fuel POS will automatically be switched off after a power down longer than

5 minutes. When the power is repaired, the Fuel POS will start up again and automatically the night mode will be activated.

• In case of manual service and if certain transactions still could be settled on the

Fuel POS terminal at the end of the day, these transactions will automatically be processed when the night mode is activated. That is why the night mode first has to be activated before closing a day.

3-168 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.2.3 Tab ‘Buffers’ (All pumps)

Each transaction ended in self-service or manual service, is stored in a pump buffer and can then be selected and settled. Via this menu item, the manager can program the number of buffers for each pump, both for day mode and for night mode.

When all buffers of a pump are taken in case of self-service, no new transaction can be started in self-service until at least one transaction is settled so that a buffer is released again.

When all buffers of a pump are taken in case of manual service, a new transaction can yet be started in manual service and the oldest buffered transaction will automatically be settled so that a buffer is released again.

The maximum number of buffers for each pump is 4.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-169

3.3.2.4 Tab ‘Totalisers’ (Specific pump)

In almost all pumps, there is a mechanical index per nozzle. At the installation of the

Fuel POS, the value of this mechanical index can be entered in the system. The counter in the Fuel POS that corresponds with a mechanical index in the pump, is called ‘Totaliser Fuel POS’. At each filling, the mechanical index changes and the totaliser in the Fuel POS is updated automatically. This means that the mechanical index in the pump should always equal the totaliser in the Fuel POS.

In the tab ‘Totalisers’ we will find the following information:

Nozzle

The different nozzles of each pump are numbered from 1 up to 6.

Fuel

In this column the fuel type sold via each nozzle, is displayed. Theoretically it is possible to distribute the same fuel type via 2 separate nozzles of the same pump.

Totaliser Fuel POS

For each nozzle, this column displays the actual value of the totaliser.

3-170 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Very rarely, a double-sided dispenser has a mechanical index for each product. In a dispenser with 3 nozzles at each side, there will consequently be 3 mechanical indexes, where each mechanical index is used by a nozzle at one side and a nozzle at the other side of the dispenser. In this case, the Fuel POS totalisers are also used for

2 nozzles together. In the example mentioned-below, the totalisers of pump 3 are displayed. When one would display the totalisers of pump 4, the displayed values would be identical.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-171

3.3.2.5 Tab ‘Totalisers’ (Specific nozzle)

Regularly checks are necessary to verify whether the totalisers in the Fuel POS and the mechanical indexes in the pumps are still the same. In this tab, this check can be executed.

If the result of the check is that there are certain deviations, the cause has to be traced. After finding the cause for the difference, which is for example due to a pump that was replaced, the totaliser in the Fuel POS has to be set equal again to the mechanical index. This action also occurs in this tab.

In the tab ‘Check / change totaliser’ we will find the following information:

Pump / Nozzle / Fuel

These fields indicate which nozzle was selected in the tree on the left of the screen and which fuel type is distributed via this nozzle.

Totaliser Fuel POS

For the selected nozzle, this field displays the actual value of the totaliser.

3-172 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Check / change totaliser Fuel POS

This screen allows you to check the totaliser in the Fuel POS, which means comparing with the mechanical index of the pump. It is recommended to execute this at least once a month. These checks require that first the mechanical indexes of the pumps are noted down.

If required the value of the totaliser in the Fuel POS can again be set equal to the mechanical index, however only if the cause of the difference has been determined and eliminated. When for example a mechanical index is broken and you would equalise the totaliser even before the mechanical index is repaired, there will again be a difference after the next filling.

Totaliser pump

In this field you have to insert the totaliser of the pump or the value of the mechanical index. This input must be closed by pressing Enter.

It is possible that the Fuel POS totaliser, which is displayed on top of the screen, changes. This would mean that between the moment of choosing the nozzle in the tree and the moment of entering the totaliser of the pump, a new filling is ended via the chosen nozzle. Take into account that this situation always has to be avoided.

Between the moment of noting down and entering the mechanical index, the nozzle in question should not be used for fillings.

It is very much recommended to save immediately the data of each individual check or modification. This method avoids problems in case a filling is started for a nozzle of which the data are entered but not yet saved. So if you have entered the data for one nozzle, you always have to save this first before entering the data of the next nozzle.

Difference

In this field, the difference between the totaliser of the pump or the mechanical index (as noted down and entered) and the Fuel POS totaliser is displayed.

If you enter the initial mechanical index or you do a modification because the technician has for example replaced the mechanical index, it is logical that a difference is displayed. If you only execute a check and no filling took place since the moment of noting down the mechanical index, normally this difference should be smaller than 1 litre. In case of an important difference, the cause always has to be investigated.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-173

Check the totaliser / Change the totaliser

When the totaliser of the pump or the mechanical index is entered and the difference regarding the Fuel POS totaliser is displayed, you still have to indicate what you want to do with these data. There are 2 possibilities:

- Check the totaliser

This possibility is selected by default. If the data were only filled in to check the totalisers, without the purpose of modifying the Fuel POS totaliser, you choose this option. The Fuel POS totaliser remains unchanged when saving the data.

- Change the totaliser

If you choose this possibility, you can modify the current Fuel POS totaliser.

When saving the data, the totaliser of the pump or the mechanical index, which is filled in, will be used as a new Fuel POS totaliser.

Information

In this field, additional information can be entered concerning the check or the modification of totalisers. In case of a check, it can for example be indicated whether a periodical check was conducted, or an extra check due to maintenance, etc. In case of a modification, the reason for the conducted modification can be entered.

Name

In this field a name can be entered, for example of the person that has conducted the check or the modification.

Each check and each modification of a totaliser is registered in the Fuel POS journal.

For example:

# Pump 10 17-10-2006 12:56:55 #

Change totaliser Seq.number: 25 Pump no.: 10 Nozzle no.: 1 Unleaded 98 Day number: 163

Totaliser pump: 2500.00 Totaliser Fuel POS: 95842546.00 Difference: -95840045.00

# Pump 3 17-10-2006 12:57:31 #

Check totaliser Seq.number: 26 Pump no.: 3 Nozzle no.: 1 Unleaded 98 Day number: 163

Totaliser pump: 37284330.00 Totaliser Fuel POS: 37284330.08 Difference -0.08

3-174 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

As already mentioned before, very rarely a double-sided dispenser has a mechanical index per fuel type. In a dispenser with 3 nozzles at each side, there will consequently be 3 mechanical indexes, where each mechanical index is used by a nozzle at one side and a nozzle at the other side of the dispenser. In this case, the Fuel POS totalisers are also used for 2 nozzles together. In the example mentioned-below, the totaliser of pump 3 is checked or modified. Therefore a check or modification for the totaliser of pump 4 no longer has to be conducted.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-175

3.3.2.6 Printing pump data

When choosing this button, different lists can be made regarding the connected pumps. The following pop-up window will be displayed:

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Report / list to be printed

The desired list is chosen out of a drop down list. The following lists are available:

- Pump

This list contains the programmed pump modes for each pump, both in day and in night mode.

- Totaliser management

Regularly checks are necessary to verify whether the totaliser in the pump or the mechanical index and the Fuel POS totaliser are still the same. If required, the

Fuel POS totaliser can be changed to the pump totaliser. This list contains the last 20 checks and/or modifications that were conducted for the chosen pump.

- Totalisers and indexes per product

This list contains the totalisers of each pump. A totaliser corresponds with a mechanical index and at the installation of the Fuel POS the value of the mechanical index can be entered as a starting value for the totaliser. Furthermore, there is also another type of counter in the Fuel POS system, which is named index. An index starts with a value of 0.00 at the installation and cannot be modified. There are indexes per nozzle and per fuel type. This list contains the indexes per fuel type, in which only the sales and no pump tests are included.

- Totalisers

Per pump a receipt can be printed with the totalisers of the different nozzles.

Pump selection

Some lists can be made for all pumps together or for one specific pump.

3-176 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of the list ‘Totalisers (Receipt)’ when pump 3 have been chosen:

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

17-10-2006 15:37:13

TOTALISERS FOR PUMP 3

Unleaded 98 37284330.08

l

Diesel 50695816.98

l

Unleaded 95 13024664.92

l

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-177

Example of the list ‘Pump modes’:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

PUMP MODES

17-10-2006 15:55

Day

Pump no

Selfservice

Neutral.

Manual

Card term.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

M M M M M M M M M M M

A

A A A A

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

BNA

EPR

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Night

Pump no

Selfservice

Neutral.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Manual

Card term.

BNA

EPR

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A=Automatic release, M=Manual release, T=Temporary blocked, blank=not activated

3-178 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of the list ‘Totaliser management’ for all pumps:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/004

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

CONTROL OF THE TOTALISERS

17-10-2006 16:13

Selection: All

No.: 26 PUMP NUMBER: 3 Nozzle: 1 Unleaded 98 17-10-2006 12:57

CHECK TOTALISER PUMP: 37284330.00 L

TOTALISER FUEL POS: 37284330.08 L

DIFFERENCE: -0.08 L

DAY 0163

INFO: Weekly check

USER: AVDW

NAME: GENERAL MANAGER

No.: 25 PUMP NUMBER: 10 Nozzle: 1 Unleaded 98 17-10-2006 12:56

CHANGE TOTALISER PUMP: 2500.00 L

TOTALISER FUEL POS: 95842546.00 L

DIFFERENCE: -95840046.00 L

DAY 0163

INFO: Installation new pump

USER: ZJ

NAME: SERVICE

No.: 24 PUMP NUMBER: 3 Nozzle: 2 Diesel 17-10-2006 12:55

CHECK TOTALISER PUMP: 50695817.00 L

TOTALISER FUEL POS: 50695816.98 L

DIFFERENCE: 0.02 L

DAY 0163

INFO: Weekly check

USER: AVDW

NAME: GENERAL MANAGER

No.: 23 PUMP NUMBER: 3 Nozzle: 3 Unleaded 95 17-10-2006 12:54

CHECK TOTALISER PUMP: 13024665.00 L

TOTALISER FUEL POS: 13024664.92 L

DIFFERENCE: 0.08 L

DAY 0163

INFO: Weekly check

USER: AVDW

NAME: GENERAL MANAGER

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-179

Example of the list ‘Totalisers and indexes per product’:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland 8

INDEXES / TOTALISERS

17-10-2006 16:38

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

INDEXES PER PRODUCT

Fuel Quantity Amount

02 Unleaded 98 44826878.08 59241633.12

03 Diesel 69331264.49 66937845.24

04 L.P.G. 1598411.00 563693.07

05 Unleaded 95 18054311.92 20877260.66

+ +

133810865.49 147620431.09

TOTALISERS PER PUMP

Pump 1 Quantity Pump 2 Quantity

L.P.G. 856347.00 L.P.G. 742214.00

Pump 3 Quantity Pump 4 Quantity

Unleaded 98 37284330.08 Unleaded 98 7542698.00

Diesel 50695816.98 Diesel 18635447.51

Unleaded 95 13024664.92 Unleaded 95 5029647.00

3-180 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.3 OPT (3,3)

3.3.3.1 Configuration and status (3,3,1)

In one and the same service station, up to 32 outdoor terminals can be connected to the Fuel POS. Via this menu item, the configuration and the status of these outdoor terminals can be displayed. Furthermore, the manager himself can change a number of settings.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Displaying a list of all connected outdoor terminals and verifying which pumps can be powered by each outdoor terminal.

• Asking for the status of each outdoor terminal.

• Programming the header and footer of the receipt, which is printed at the outdoor terminal.

• Programming the times for each operational terminal to go out of service.

• Consulting the settings of the printer in the outdoor terminal.

• Defining whether the company logo has to be printed on the receipt of the outdoor terminal.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-181

The screen will look like this:

3-182 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

On the left of the screen, the configured outdoor terminals are displayed, as well as the pumps that can be chosen via each outdoor terminal:

When choosing the line ‘OPT configuration’ in the tree, in the 2 tabs on the right of the screen the status of all terminals can be displayed and the layout of the receipt can be programmed.

When choosing a specific outdoor terminal in the tree, in the 2 tabs on the right of the screen the properties of the terminal can be displayed and modified.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-183

3.3.3.1.1 Tab ‘Status’ (All outdoor terminals)

Via this tab, the status of all connected outdoor terminals can be retrieved. For each terminal it is indicated whether it is still in a status - depending on the terminal type - whether card payments and payments via the bank note reader are possible.

This tab is mainly being used by the service engineer to check at which level a possible problem is located.

3-184 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.3.1.2 Tab ‘Receipt’ (All outdoor terminals)

In the tab ‘Receipt’ we will find the following information:

Header

Maximum 10 lines can be entered for the header of the receipt. One line can contain maximum 24 characters.

Footer

Maximum 10 lines can be entered for the footer of the receipt. On line can contain maximum 24 characters.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-185

3.3.3.1.3 Tab ‘General’ (Specific outdoor terminal)

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Terminal

In this field it is displayed which outdoor terminal has been chosen in the tree on the left of the screen. It is a combination of the terminal type and the terminal number

(from 1 to 32).

Type

There are several designs of the outdoor terminal. To indicate each terminal type, the following terms are used:

- OPT

- DIT

- BNA

: Outdoor Payment Terminal (separate terminal to accept cards)

: Dispenser Integrated Terminal (terminal integrated in the pump to accept cards)

: Bank Note Acceptor (separate terminal to accept bank notes)

- OPT/BNA : Outdoor Payment Terminal / Bank Note Acceptor (separate terminal to accept cards as well as bank notes)

These four types are available in the following two designs:

- iQ

- CVGA

: The terminal contains a separate PIN pad and touch screen.

Crypto VGA terminal, the touch screen is also the PIN pad.

3-186 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Mode

This field displays the current mode of the outdoor terminal. The possible values are:

- Maintenance : The terminal is put in maintenance mode to change the paper roll, to clean the screen or to empty the bank note reader.

- Service : A service engineer has put the terminal in service mode to execute certain works at the terminal.

- Alarm : The terminal is automatically put in alarm mode and cannot be used temporarily. This mode is activated when for example the terminal is opened to change the paper roll or to empty the bank note reader without having it put first in maintenance mode.

- Normal : When there are no specific activities on the terminal and no alarm mode is activated, this mode indicates that a normal use of the terminal is possible.

CSC

CSC is the abbreviation of "Contactless Smart Card". This is the name for all cards that can be read without having a direct contact between the card and the card reader. For this purpose, an RFID tag is integrated in the card; this is a microchip that relays signals by means of radio frequency. Such cards can only be accepted in the station if the Crypto VGA terminal is equipped with a special CSC reader that can receive the microchip signal.

This option has to be enabled for each Crypto VGA that is equipped with a CSC reader.

On / Operational / Out of order

The manager can program for each terminal at which point of time of the day it automatically has to become operational or out of use. The programmed times will be applied all days of the week.

When opening the screen, the option ‘On’ displays the current situation. When the option is enabled, the terminal will remain operational until the point of time ‘Out of order’ is reached. When the option is disabled, the terminal will remain out of use until the point of time ‘Operational’ is reached.

You can also make the outdoor terminal immediately operational or out of use.

When the option ‘On’ is enabled, you can put the terminal out of use by disabling the option. The terminal will remain out of use until the time ‘Operational’ is reached again.

When the option ‘On’ is disabled, you can make the terminal operational by enabling the option. The terminal will remain operational until the time ‘Out of order’ is reached again.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-187

If you for both ‘Out of order’ and ‘Operational’ enter the time 0:00, the outdoor terminal is continuously operational when the option ‘On’ is enabled. When the option is disabled, the outdoor terminal is continuously out of use.

If more than one outdoor terminal is connected, you can apply the setting at all outdoor terminals by pressing this button.

3-188 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.3.1.4 Tab ‘Print’ (Specific outdoor terminal)

In the tab ‘Print’ we will find the following information:

Paper cut

At the installation of the outdoor terminal, it is defined whether the receipt is cut completely or partially at the end of the day. This setting depends on the type of printer unit in the terminal. If the receipt is collected in a small box, it can be cut completely. However when the receipt can fall on the ground, it will only be cut partially.

Min. Lines

To avoid a receipt being too short so that a customer cannot grip it, a minimum number of lines is programmed at the installation to obtain a minimum length of the receipt. If necessary, blank lines are added to the receipt to obtain this minimum length.

INFO Receipt

This parameter is defined at the installation and it defines whether a receipt with general system information is available at the outdoor terminal.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-189

Logo

With this option, the manager can decide whether the logo of the company has to be printed on each receipt.

3-190 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.3.2 Replace paper (3,3,2)

This menu item is used for much more than only the replacement of the paper used in the OPT. It is generally used to modify the mode of an outdoor terminal.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Putting an outdoor terminal in maintenance mode to change the paper roll, to clean the screen or to empty the bank note reader.

• Making an outdoor terminal operational again after a fraud alarm was activated.

As an extra security, you have to enter your access code again in the pop-up window, which opens automatically, when opening the screen:

Only after entering a correct access code, the screen to change the mode of the outdoor terminals will be opened.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-191

The screen will look like this:

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

OPT

In this column, you will find all outdoor terminals configured in Fuel POS. They are always displayed as a combination of the terminal type and the terminal number

(from 1 to 32).

Mode

In this column, the current mode for each terminal is displayed. The possible values are:

- Maintenance : The terminal is put in maintenance mode to change the paper roll, the clean the screen or to empty the bank note reader.

- Service : A service engineer has put the terminal in service mode to execute certain works at the terminal.

3-192 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

- Alarm : The terminal is automatically put in alarm mode and cannot be used temporarily. This mode is activated when for example the terminal is opened to change the paper roll or to empty the bank note reader without having it put first in maintenance mode.

- Normal : When there are no specific activities on the terminal and no alarm mode is activated, this mode indicates that a normal use of the terminal is possible.

Maintenance

This option is used to change the outdoor terminal mode. It works as follows:

- When the terminal is in the ‘Normal’ mode, the option is disabled when you open the screen. When you enable the option, the terminal will be put in ‘Maintenance’ mode when saving the data.

- When the terminal is in the ‘Maintenance’ mode, the option is enabled when you open the screen. When you disable the option, the terminal will be put in ‘Normal’ mode when saving the data. However if you have forgotten to close the outdoor terminal, the ‘Alarm’ mode will be activated instead of the ‘Normal’ mode.

- When the terminal is in the ‘Alarm’ mode, the option is disabled when you open the screen When you enable the option, the terminal will be put in ‘Maintenance’ mode when saving the data. Once the ‘Maintenance’ mode is activated, you can repeat the procedure to put the terminal in the ‘Normal’ mode again.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-193

To replace the paper in the outdoor terminal, to empty the bank note reader or to clean the screen of the outdoor terminal, you will have to proceed as follows:

• Choose in eMIS 3 (Forecourt), 3 (OPT) and 2 (Replace paper) in that order.

• You will automatically be requested to enter your access code. Enter your access code and confirm with the ‘OK’ button.

• Enable the option ‘Maintenance’ for all terminals for which you want to execute an intervention.

• Save the changes you have made. The terminals are now in the mode

‘Maintenance’. In the Fuel POS journal, this is registered as follows:

# POS 1 19-10-2006 11:34:23 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 Login by user GENERAL MANAGER via the Fuel POS programming screen

• You can now open the terminal to change the paper roll. Then the alarm sensors will temporarily be disabled:

# OPT 1 19-10-2006 11:44:11 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 Status sensor 1 changed from active to inactive (3)

• After the replacement of the paper roll, you close again the terminal. The alarm sensors are again enabled and the mode ‘Normal’ is activated automatically:

# OPT 1 19-10-2006 11:47:47 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 Status sensor 1 changed from inactive to active (4)

# OPT 1 19-10-2006 11:47:47 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 Logout by user, terminal closed

3-194 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

How to deal with a fraud alarm?

If an outdoor terminal is active, it can automatically get the mode ‘Alarm’ in the following two situations:

1. The connection between the outdoor terminal and the Fuel POS is broken.

2. The outdoor terminal is opened without prior authorisation.

The Fuel POS journal will contain the following message when the connection between the outdoor terminal and the Fuel POS is broken:

# OPT 1 19-10-2006 12:22:43 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 : Out of order – fraud alarm by disconnection on IQ OPT/BNA-01 2

If the connection between the outdoor terminal and the Fuel POS is recovered again, or if the terminal is closed again after having been opened without authorisation, the outdoor terminal will remain in status ‘Alarm’, so it will remain out of use. The

Fuel POS journal will contain the following message when the connection between the outdoor terminal and the Fuel POS is recovered:

# OPT 1 19-10-2006 12:32:54 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 : Out of order – fraud alarm cleared

You then have to change the ‘Alarm’ status into the ‘Maintenance’ status. The terminal will then become operational again:

# OPT 1 19-10-2006 12:41:52 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 : Out of order – fraud alarm cancelled via MIS 1

# OPT 1 19-10-2006 12:41:52 #

IQ OPT/BNA-01 : Operational (cards & BNA)

Now you have to open the outdoor terminal and check whether its is completely ok, especially if you don’t know what caused the fraud alarm. After all, it is possible that you caused the fraud alarm due to an incorrect action when replacing the paper or because you forgot to put the terminal in the ‘Maintenance’ status when emptying the bank note reader. If you notice an irregularity at the terminal, we advice you to contact the Tokheim helpdesk. Then you have to close the terminal again.

After checking the outdoor terminal, its status has to be changed again from

‘Maintenance’ to ‘Normal’. When there are serious indications that a fraud attempt occurred, it is best to put the terminal out of service until the technician has drawn the necessary conclusions.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-195

3.3.3.3 BNA (3,3,3)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Checking the total amount that was entered in the bank note reader since the last day closure.

• Programming the exchange rates of the foreign currencies accepted via the bank note reader.

The screen will look like this:

3-196 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.3.3.3.1 Tab ‘BNA money’

In this tab, the amount is displayed that the bank note reader read per currency since the last day closure. So it does not concern the actual content of the bank note reader, because emptying the reader does not necessarily occur at the same moment as the day closure.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-197

3.3.3.3.2 Tab ‘Exchange rates BNA’

This tab is used to define which foreign currencies can be accepted by the bank note reader and to manage the exchange rates of these foreign currencies. However, programming these foreign currencies is not enough to actually accept them. The BNA reader also has to recognise the different bank notes. We will find the following information:

No.

Each line on the screen can be used to program a foreign currency.

Local currency

In this column the local currency is displayed. The exchange rate is programmed in relation to this local currency.

Exchange rate

In this field the exchange rate of the foreign currency is entered. A new foreign currency can only by added by entering this field first.

Foreign currency

The foreign currency is always chosen out of a drop down list.

3-198 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4 Shop articles (4)

3.4.1 Articles (4,1)

A total of 30000 shop articles can be programmed in Fuel POS. This menu item is used to program these shop articles.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Adding a new shop article.

• Removing an existing shop article.

• Modifying the properties of existing shop articles.

• Printing an article list.

To execute these different functions, it is not necessary to know which articles are already programmed, or to display them on the screen. A pop-up window is displayed first, that allows you to check which articles have already been programmed:

The pop-up window works as follows:

• When “Article number (PLU)” is chosen without entering a number, then all already programmed articles are collected and displayed in numerical order.

• When “Article number (PLU)” is chosen and a number is entered manually, then all already programmed articles are collected of which the article number begins with the entered number. The articles are then displayed in numerical order.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-199

• When “Article number (PLU)” is chosen and a bar code is read, the article that is already programmed with this bar code, will then be collected. When a bar code is read that is not yet programmed, the Fuel POS automatically offers to add a new article. The following pop-up window will be displayed:

• When “Name” is chosen without entering any text, then all programmed articles are collected and displayed in alphabetical order.

• When “Name” is chosen and some text is entered, then all programmed articles are collected of which the article name begins with the entered text. The articles are then displayed in alphabetical order.

• When the ‘Cancel’ button is chosen in the pop-up window, no articles will be collected. The article programming screen will be displayed to allow new articles to be added.

The screen to program the shop articles will look like this:

3-200 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

On the left of the screen, the existing programmed shop articles are displayed:

By clicking the column heading, the articles can be sorted according to name or number.

When an existing programmed bar code is read, the corresponding article is automatically selected in the list. When a bar code is scanned that is not yet programmed, the Fuel POS automatically offers to add a new article.

By selecting an existing programmed article in the list, the properties of that article can be modified in the 5 tabs on the right of the screen.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-201

3.4.1.1 Tab ‘General’

In the first ‘General’ tab the following information is displayed:

Article number (PLU)

Each article is represented by a unique article number (also called PLU number). The article number is assigned at the moment that the article is added and cannot be modified afterwards. The article number can only be modified by erasing the article and adding it again with the modified article number.

Name

The name of the shop article can be entered with a maximum of 20 characters.

Unit of measure

For each article it has to be indicated whether it is sold per unit (piece), per litre or per kilo. It is also possible to determine how many decimal places the cashier can use when he enters the sold quantity in the operator screen: 0, 1 or 2 decimals

(always 2 decimals for articles sold per kilogram).

For example: a packet of cigarettes will usually be sold per piece without decimals, two-stroke will be sold per litre with the use of 2 decimals.

3-202 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Unit price

The unit price is the sales price, VAT included, that is used by default in the operator screen when the cashier selects an article. For packaging containing more than 1 item of an article, the price of the entire packaging must be entered.

If an ‘Amount bar code’ has been programmed for an article (this is a bar code in which the article price is processed), the unit price of the article, when selling the article, will automatically be the amount that is in the ‘Amount bar code’ (if it is chosen via this bar code). In this case the unit price in this field will not be programmed.

Price changeable

When this option is enabled, the cashier can sell the article at a price other than the preprogrammed unit price. However this does not modify the preprogrammed unit price. When this option is disabled, the cashier can only sell the article at the preprogrammed unit price.

Deposit value

The value of the deposit of the article can be entered in this field. For deposit articles the sales price is equal to the sum of the deposit and the unit price together.

The customer will have to pay an amount equal to the sum of the unit price and the deposit value when he buys the article.

Linked article

In this field, the article number of a linked shop article can be entered (manually or by means of the bar code scanner). Each time the article is chosen in the operator screen, the linked article will also be added to the transaction window. It is not possible to create a chain of links which, for example links the article with article number 2 to article number 3, 3 to 4, 4 to 5,...

Quantities linked

This field is only applied in case a linked article has been programmed. When this option is enabled, the quantity sold of both articles must be equal.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-203

3.4.1.2 ‘Codes’ Tab

In the second tab ‘Codes’ we will find the following information:

VAT code

All shop articles must be linked to a VAT code. These codes refer to the VAT percentages. The desired VAT code can be chosen out of a drop down list, but it can also be entered directly.

VAT code deposit

This field is only available when the 2 following conditions are met:

* In the programming screen, that is used to define the VAT percentages of the different VAT codes, it is indicated that VAT will be applied at the deposit of articles.

* A value for the deposit of the article is filled in.

When these 2 conditions are fulfilled, then you must enter a VAT code for the deposit.

3-204 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Card code

All articles must be linked to a card code. The card code determines the product category of a shop article. The Fuel POS can then correctly deal with the purchase of the article by card. For example the product restrictions linked to a card are restricted by the card codes. Furthermore, the host that processes the card transactions uses the card code to identify which type of article was bought. The card code is also used in the link with an external payment terminal, an external loyalty terminal,…

It is therefore very important to select the correct card code for each article. The desired card code is chosen out of a drop down list, but it can also be entered directly. To facilitate the selection, it is also possible to enter only a part of the description.

Group/prod id

When allocating a group code or a product identification to a shop article, this article is categorized under one of the product categories defined by the oil company. Both on the day report and on the month report, the turnover per group code will be displayed.

The oil company determines whether group codes are used or not and in which way. Three different situations are possible:

* If the oil company does not use its own product id in the Fuel POS, this field cannot be selected.

* If the oil company uses a list of group codes, available in the Fuel POS terminal, entering the group code will be the same as entering the card code; this field must be entered.

* If the oil company uses a product id, but without a list of group codes in the

Fuel POS terminal, the manager will have to enter the id manually.

Report code

You are limited in the choice of an appropriate card code since Tokheim made the list with card codes. Furthermore, the oil company defines which group codes are active. By means of the report codes, you can group the articles according to your own needs in your own product categories. On page 3-227 of this manual, it is described how you can program the different product categories or report codes.

Through this field, you can then classify the article in a certain product category.

Both on the day report and on the month report, the turnover per report code will be displayed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-205

E-voucher type

This field is only available when e-Vouchers are sold in the service station. Examples of E-vouchers are recharge vouchers (prepaid telephone cards) or entrance tickets for fun parks. The type of E-voucher is chosen from a drop down list.

Prepaid telephone cards can only be chosen on condition that card code 9000 or

9019 is entered. Entrance tickets for fun parks can only be chosen on condition that card code 6000, 6006, 6012, 6017, 6019, 9320, 9321 or 9322 is entered.

Car wash program

This field can only be selected if the Fuel POS terminal has been connected to a car wash system and if the card code for car wash has been entered for this particular article. A separate article has to be made for each car wash program and the program number has to be entered as defined in the car wash system.

Attention: If the car wash program is not only sold at the cash desk, but also at the outdoor payment terminal, then the article number must be composed with at least

3 digits!

Operator messages

You can program that the till displays a message each time that the operator adds a certain shop article to a transaction. In this way, you can always draw his attention to certain shop articles at which he has to ask the customer’s age, or you can indicate for example that the article is part of a promotion but that the customer has to buy an additional article before he can enjoy the promotion.

On page 3-233 of this manual, it is described how you can compose a list of the messages that can be shown to the cashier. A message can then be linked to an article in two different ways:

- Article message

A message can be linked directly to the article. You select the desired message from a drop down list.

- Report code message

A message can also be linked indirectly to an article. When a message is programmed, it can be linked to one or more report codes. The message will then automatically be linked to all articles for which this report code is programmed.

This will be displayed here.

This means that it is possible that for the same article, two different messages will be displayed when it will be sold.

3-206 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.1.3 Tab ‘Loyalty’

In the third tab ‘Loyalty’ we will find the following information:

Max. discount %

The manager uses this field to indicate whether a cashier can allow a discount or not for a particular article. If a discount is allowed on this article, the maximum percentage of discount has to be entered. This maximum is programmed as a percentage of the unit price. The maximum percentage of discount is 99.99 %. The value 0.00 % means that no discount is allowed for the article.

Example: a maximum discount of 5 % on an article of € 89 corresponds with a maximum discount of € 0.04 that the cashier can allow.

Loyalty %

Loyalty on a shop article means an automatic discount on this shop article if it is bought by a customer, presenting a loyalty card or by a local customer that receives a loyalty discount. The manager of the station defines through this field whether the article is eligible for an automatic discount. Loyalty is programmed as a percentage of the unit price. The maximum loyalty percentage is 99.99 %. The value 0.00 % means that no loyalty is allowed for this article.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-207

The value entered in this field is a base discount. A multiplier is used for each loyalty card and for each local customer who is entitled to a loyalty discount. The loyalty discount the customer will eventually receive, is calculated by multiplying the base loyalty by the multiplier. Example: A customer or a card with multiplier 1.50 will receive a discount of 0.75 % if the base discount amounts to 0.50 %.

Points per unit

If a service station gives saving points to the customers (for example stamps or a loyalty card), then the manager defines in this field whether points are to be given for this particular article. This is achieved by programming the number of points the customer gets when he buys one unit of the article. The value 0.00 means that no points are awarded for the regarding article.

There are two different possibilities to give points to the customers:

- When points are given to each customer, for example stamps, the cashier will have displayed the number of saving points he should give the customer. The manager can check via the shift report how many points the cashier should have given away during his shift.

- When points are only given to customers presenting a loyalty card, then each loyalty card is again linked to a multiplier. The number of saving points the customer eventually receives, is calculated by multiplying the number of points per unit by the multiplier. Example: A card with multiplier 2.00 will receive

2.00 points if the number of points per unit amounts to 1.

3-208 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.1.4 Tab ‘Stock’

In the fourth tab ‘Stock’ we will find the following information:

Current stock

In this field, the current stock of the shop article is displayed. This stock is modified automatically at each transaction. The stock can be modified manually by entering a new value in the field ‘New stock’ or by inserting a ‘Stock change’. If no stock is kept, the value of this field will be negative.

New stock

The current stock of the shop article can be overwritten by entering the new stock in this field. It is not possible to combine a new stock with a stock change.

Stock change

The value that is entered as a stock change, is added to the current stock. Both a positive and a negative value are accepted. A stock change is used to enter a delivery. It is not possible to combine a stock change with a new stock.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-209

Minimum stock

A minimum stock can be applied for each shop article. A message will be displayed for the cashier if a transaction reduces the stock to below the programmed minimum.

No minimum

When this option is enabled, a check on the minimum stock will not be applied.

Each stock change is registered in the Fuel POS journal. In this journal, it is always indicated how this modification was entered. A type ‘S’ in the logging mentionedbelow means that the current stock was replaced by entering the field ‘New stock’. A type ‘U’ means that a value was entered in the field ‘Stock change’.

# System 12-06-2006 13:07:58 #

Stock update! Art.no.: 40099019 Type: S Old stock: 26.00 New stock: 86.00

Also when the minimum stock of an article is reached, this is registered in the

Fuel POS journal.

# System 12-06-2006 15:29:17 #

Minimum stock article 40099019 (Freedent mint)

3-210 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.1.5 Tab ‘Bar codes’

In the fifth tab ‘Bar codes’ we will find the following information:

Number

Each article can be linked to up to 200 bar codes. The bar codes are numbered to verify how many bar codes are already linked.

Bar code

In this column all linked bar codes of the selected shop article are displayed. The bar code that might have been used directly as an article number is not displayed in this list.

A new bar code can be added by reading it in directly in the ‘Bar codes’ tab. A bar code can also be added via the following pop-up window:

In this pop-up window the bar code that has to be added, can be scanned, but it can also be entered manually. Either way, the input is confirmed via ‘Add’.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-211

It is impossible to use the same bar code for several articles. The following error message is displayed when an existing bar code is entered:

If an amount bar code is scanned (a bar code of an article including its sales price), the following message is displayed:

After the confirmation of this message, a stripped bar code is displayed. This is the same bar code but without sales price. From then on this stripped bar code is used as identification of the shop article.

3-212 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.1.6 Adding a new article

The following pop-up window is opened when the function ‘Add’ is activated in order to create a new article:

The following data must be filled in to add a new article:

Article number (PLU)

Each article is marked with a unique article number (which is also named PLU number). This is the first field that has to be entered when a new article is made.

Assigning an article number to an article can be done in different ways.

- If the article has no bar code, the manager can choose a random number. The article number is keyed in and confirmed with the Enter-key.

- For an article with a bar code, the bar code number can be used as the article number. The bar code can be scanned, but it can also entered manually. In case of a manual insert, this has to be confirmed via the Enter-key.

- When the article has a bar code, but the manager decides not to use this as an article number, then he can choose a random number as article number and link it afterwards to the bar code via the tab ‘Bar codes’.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-213

If an amount bar code is scanned (a bar code of an article including its sales price), the following message is displayed:

After the confirmation of this message, a stripped bar code is displayed. This is the same bar code but without sales price. From then on this stripped bar code is used as identification of the shop article.

Name

VAT code

Card code

Group/prod id

A group code must only be filled in when the oil company uses a fixed list of codes, available in Fuel POS.

3-214 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.1.7 Printing an article list

By choosing the ’print’ button, a list of all programmed shop articles can be printed. A pop-up window is displayed, in which the shop articles can be selected that have to be included in the list. A limited choice of lay-out can be made.

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Selection articles

This field allows selection of which shop articles are to be included in the article list.

The following options are possible:

- All articles : All programmed articles are included in the article list.

- Future prices/promotions : Only the articles for which a future price was programmed via the Back Office Computer and the articles that are part of a promotion, are included in the article list.

- Future prices : Only the articles for which a future price was programmed via the Back Office Computer, are included in the article list.

- PLU range : All articles that are programmed with a PLU or article number that is between two fixed article numbers, are included in the article list. In the following two fields, the starting and end number is entered.

- Promotions : Only the articles that are part of a promotion, are included in the article list.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-215

- Report code : All articles that are programmed with one fixed report code, are included in the article list. The desired report code is entered in the field.

From – To / Report code

When in the previous field the option was chosen to include all articles in the article list that are programmed with an article number between a fixed series of PLU numbers, then the fields ‘From’ and ‘To’ become active. In these two fields, the starting and end PLU number is entered.

When in the previous field the option was chosen to include all articles in the article list that are programmed with one fixed report code, then the field ‘Report code’ becomes active. In this field the desired report code is entered.

Order

In this field it is defined in which order the articles have to be included in the article list. The following options are possible:

- Name : The articles are arranged in alphabetical order according to name.

- PLU number : The articles are arranged according to the PLU or article number.

- Report code : The articles are arranged in alphabetical order according to report code.

Print future prices

A future price for a shop article can be programmed via the Back Office Computer.

When activating this option, the information concerning the future price will be added to the article list.

Print promotions

A promotion for a shop article can only be programmed via the Back Office

Computer. When activating this option, the information concerning the promotion will be added to the article list.

3-216 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of an article list:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/007

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

ARTICLE LIST

on number 13-06-2006 19:19

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

Print: Future prices/promotions

PLU description report code card group/prod. ID price VAT: % stock

27 Two stroke Two stroke 625 Two stroke 1.49/L 3 21.00 75.25

Max. discount 5%

Loyalty 5%

51 Sandwich cheese Sandwiches 3206 Shop 2.25 1 6.00 30.00

Promotion price 2.10 01-06-2006 00:01 -> 15-06-2006 23:59 200604 Lunch promo Group 1

52 Sandwich bacon Sandwiches 3206 Shop 2.25 1 6.00 17.00

Promotion price 2.10 01-06-2006 00:01 -> 15-06-2006 23:59 200604 Lunch promo Group 1

53 Sandwich bacon chees Sandwiches 3206 Shop 2.25 1 6.00 28.00

Promotion price 2.10 01-06-2006 00:01 -> 15-06-2006 23:59 200604 Lunch promo Group 1

61 Coffee Hot drinks 3106 Shop 0.95 1 6.00 0.00

Promotion price 0.80 01-06-2006 00:01 -> 15-06-2006 23:59 200604 Lunch promo Group 2

101 Basic wash Car wash 9219 Car wash 3.25 3 21.00 -650.00

Car wash program 1

102 Standard wash Car wash 9219 Car wash 4.95 3 21.00 -325.00

Car wash program 2

54027008 Marlboro Box Cigarettes 4000 Shop 3.30 0 0.00 87.00

54027022 Marlboro Lights Cigarettes 4000 Shop 3.30 0 0.00 36.00

54027039 Marlboro Box 100 Cigarettes 4000 Shop 3.35 0 0.00 5.00

54027473 Marlboro Medium Cigarettes 4000 Shop 3.30 0 0.00 57.00

77551946 Bacardi orange Bacardi 7019 Shop 1.80 3 21.00 13.00

Deposit 0.20

77551977 Bacardi lemon Bacardi 7019 Shop 1.80 3 21.00 17.00

Deposit 0.20

77552004 Bacardi peach Bacardi 7019 Shop 1.80 3 21.00 22.00

Deposit 0.20

88141327 Stella Artois 50CL Beer 7019 Shop 0.89 3 21.00 50.00

Future price 0.95 From 15-06-2006 00:00

88156321 Stella Artois 6x33CL Beer 7019 Shop 4.35 3 21.00 154.00

Future price 4.95 From 15-06-2006 00:00

88158349 Jupiler N.A.8x25CL. Beer 7019 Shop 5.55 3 21.00 63.00

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-217

3.4.2 Article buttons (4,2)

The cashier has several possibilities in the forecourt screen to select a shop article. He can read a bar code, enter the article or PLU number, or select an article after entering a part of the article number or article name.

In the forecourt screen a shop article can also be selected out of a list with

32 predefined buttons. Each button in this list can be configured in either one of the following two ways:

• A button can directly be linked to a shop article. Selecting the button will immediately result in the selection of the linked article.

• A button can be programmed as an article group. Selecting the button will result in the opening of an additional window that contains a further 32 buttons. These

32 buttons can directly be linked to a shop article.

On installation of the Fuel POS, each button is directly linked to a shop article number, even if that article number is not yet programmed. Button 1 will be linked to article number 1, button 2 will be linked to article number 2,…

By means of this menu item, the link between the predefined buttons and the shop articles can be (re)configured.

If all 32 buttons in the first window are programmed as an article group, then up to

1024 articles can be linked to a button, since each article group contains 32 buttons.

On the following pages it will be explained how the article buttons can be programmed.

3-218 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

After selecting this menu item, a screen with 32 article buttons is displayed on the left and the properties of the selected button are displayed on the right.

The first window that is displayed is the main window in which each button is either linked directly to a shop article or is programmed as an article group.

When a button is programmed as an article group, a ‘folder’ icon is displayed in the button. The name of the article group is also displayed.

When a button is linked directly to a shop article, the name of the article is displayed in the button. The button colour is the one allocated from the drop down list.

In order to modify the configuration of one of the 32 buttons, the desired button must first be selected on the left of the screen. The properties of the button can then be modified on the right of the screen. The first selection that has to be made is whether the button is going to be used to select a shop article directly or if it is going to be used as an article group.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-219

A The button in the main screen will be linked directly to a shop article

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Article assigned to the button

This option has to be activated to directly link a shop article to the button in the main screen.

Number

The article or PLU number that is to be linked to the article button, has to be entered in this field. This number can be entered manually or can be entered by reading the bar code of the article. The article number has to exist in the article database.

Name

The name of the shop article is displayed automatically when entering the article number.

Colour

The colour of the button in the forecourt screen can be modified. A rational use of colours will make it much easier for the cashier to find the article he searches.

3-220 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

B The button in the main screen will be used as an article group

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Article group assigned to the button

This option has to be activated to configure the button in the main screen as an article group.

Name

In this field, the name of the article group can be entered. The name will be displayed in the forecourt screen in the button itself together with the ‘folder’ icon.

Multiple article selection

If this option has been activated, several articles in the forecourt screen can be selected before adding them to the transaction window.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-221

Double-click on the desired group button in the left of the screen to configure the 32 article buttons of this group.

A new screen is then displayed with the 32 article buttons of the chosen article group on the left and the properties of the selected article button on the right.

At the bottom on the left, the article group that is selected, is displayed. With the button ‘Previous’ you can return to the main screen.

3-222 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

In order to modify the configuration of a button, the desired button first has to be selected on the left of the screen. The properties of the button can then be modified on the right of the screen:

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Number

The article or PLU number that is to be linked to the article button, has to be entered in this field. This number can be entered manually or can be entered by reading the bar code of the article. The article number has to exist in the article database.

Name

The name of the shop article is automatically displayed when entering the article number.

Colour

The colour of the button in the forecourt screen can be modified. A rational use of colours will make it much easier for the cashier to find the article he searches.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-223

3.4.3 Promotions (4,3)

A Back Office Computer can apply different promotions to shop articles. This menu item allows a list of all programmed promotions can be displayed and printed if required.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

PROMOTIONS

14-06-2006 18:37

Active mode: more than one promotion can be active per article

Promotion Name From To At the purchase of Promotion calculation

200601 Ice promo 10-06-2006 20:00 25-06-2006 21:00 3 Promotion price/article

200602 3th for free 01-06-2006 07:00 28-06-2006 22:00 3 Promotion price/article

200603 Summer action 01-07-2006 00:00 31-08-2006 23:59 Promotion price/article

200604 Lunch promo 01-01-2006 00:00 31-12-2006 23:59 Promotion price/article

Group 1 1

Group 2 1

200605 Matchbox 4 for 9.99 11-02-2006 00:00 18-02-2006 23:59 4 Total EUR 9.99

200606 PlayStation promo 11-02-2006 00:00 18-02-2006 23:59 10.00% on normal price

Group 1 1 (weight 80.00%)

Group 2 1 (weight 20.00%)

3-224 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.4 Special bar codes (4,4)

Not all barcodes can be used in Fuel POS to program an article. Via this menu item, an overview can be displayed of all barcodes that have a special function in Fuel POS.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-225

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Active

Each line on the screen corresponds with a special type of bar code. In this first column, it is indicated for each type whether it is active or not. By definition, all special barcodes are active. Only for an ‘Amount bar code’ this programming can be modified by a technician. The consequence of this modification is that the ‘Amount bar code’ will be considered as a normal bar code and the Fuel POS will no longer use the amount that was processed in the bar code as sales price.

Prefix

A bar code that begins with the prefix that is displayed in this column, will be recognized as a special bar code.

Name

In this column, the type of special bar code is indicated. An ‘Amount bar code’ is used for shop articles with a variable weight in which the sales price is integrated in the bar code itself. All other special bar codes are used for other purposes than the recognition of shop articles.

3-226 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.5 Report codes (4,5)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Adding a new report code.

• Removing an existing report code.

• Displaying the link between the report codes and the articles.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-227

On the left of the screen, the already programmed report codes are displayed:

By selecting in the tree an already programmed report code, the articles can be displayed that are linked to this report code on the right of the screen.

3-228 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.5.1 Tab ‘General’

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Report code

Once a report code has been programmed, it can no longer be modified. It is only possible to add a new report code and then to link it to the articles to which the previous report code was linked.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-229

3.4.5.2 Tab ‘Articles’

On the tab ‘Articles’ a list is displayed of all shop articles to which the selected report code is linked.

3-230 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.5.3 Tab ‘Fuels’

On the tab ‘Fuels’ a list is displayed of all fuels to which the selected report code is linked.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-231

3.4.5.4 Adding a new report code

The following pop-up window will be opened when the function ‘Add’ will be activated to add a new report code:

In the pop-up window you will find the following information:

Report code

A report code is composed of maximum 20 characters. Digits and/or letters may be used.

3-232 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.6 Operator messages (4,6)

You can program that the till displays a message for the cashier, each time he adds a certain shop article to a transaction. Via this menu item, you can compose a list of messages that can be displayed to the cashier.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Adding a new operator message.

• Removing an existing operator message.

• Modifying the properties of an existing operator message.

• Linking an operator message to one or more report codes.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-233

On the left of the screen, the already programmed operator messages and the link with the different report codes will be displayed:

By selecting an already programmed operator message in the tree, the properties of this message can be modified in the tab on the right of the screen.

By selecting a specific operator message, the function to link report codes to this can also be activated, or existing links can be broken again. To one and the same operator message several report codes can be linked. The opposite is however not possible, linking several operator messages to one and the same report code.

3-234 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.6.1 Tab ‘General’

In the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Name

Each operator message is marked with a unique name. This name is allocated at the moment that the cashier message is added and it cannot be modified afterwards.

The name is used to link the message to a report code or an individual shop article.

Icon

An icon or a symbole can be selected from a drop down list, which will be displayed together with the message itself in the forecourt screen. The following icons are at your disposal:

Description

This is the text that will be displayed in the forecourt screen when an article is selected to which the operator message is linked.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-235

Confirmation needed

Not all messages that are displayed to the cashier are as important. By means of this option, you can decide whether or not the cashier is obliged to confirm that he has read the message. When the option is enabled, the cashier will not be able to select an additional article without having confirmed the first message first. When the option is disabled, the displayed message will disappear automatically when an additional article is selected.

3-236 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.4.6.2 Adding a new operator message

The following pop-up window will be opened when the function ‘Add’ is activated to add a new operator message:

The following data must be filled in for a new operator message:

Name

Each operator message will be marked by a unique name. This name will be used to link the message to a report code or an individual shop article. A name exists of maximum 20 characters.

Description

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-237

3.5 Payment modes (5)

3.5.1 Cash (5,1)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Defining which foreign currencies can be accepted at the station.

• Managing the exchange rates of the foreign currencies.

• Programming how cash transactions have to be rounded off.

• Printing a list with programmed exchange rates.

The screen will look like this:

3-238 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.1.1 Tab ‘Exchange rates’

The first tab ‘Exchange rates’ is used to define which foreign currencies can be accepted in the station and to manage the exchange rates of these foreign currencies.

We will find the following information:

No.

Each line on the screen, except for the first one, can be used to program a foreign currency. The first line shows the local currency.

Local currency

This field displays the local currency in relation to the exchange rate that has to be programmed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-239

Exchange rate

In this field the exchange rate for the foreign currency is entered. A new foreign currency can only be added by entering this first field.

If the station manager decides not to charge the official exchange rate to the customer, then there are 2 different possibilities to program this:

- The exchange rate, which will be charged to the customer, can be entered directly in this field. In this case no separate cost should be entered.

- This field can also be used to enter the official exchange rate or a base exchange rate. By entering a separate cost, it will be defined which exchange rate will finally be charged to the customer.

In case a foreign currency is no longer accepted in the station, this can be removed again by putting the exchange rate at 0.00.

Foreign currency

The foreign currency is always selected from a drop down list.

Cost %

When the official exchange rate or a base exchange rate is programmed in the column ‘Exchange rate’, then the manager can enter the cost percentage that will be charged to the customer in this column.

Charged exchange rate

In this column, the exchange rate is displayed that is finally charged to the customer.

3-240 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.1.2 Tab ‘Rounding off cash transactions’

It is possible to round off automatically each transaction, which is paid in cash, to the smallest available currency. However as long as coins of € 0.01 are accepted, such rounding off is not necessary.

The option ‘rounding off cash transactions’ will be activated when selecting a value from the drop down list.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-241

3.5.1.3 Printing a list with exchange rates

When selecting this button, a list of the programmed exchange rates can be printed. Not only the exchange rates used at the Fuel POS, but also the exchange rates applied when using the Bank Note Acceptor (BNA) are printed on this list.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

EXCHANGE RATES

19-06-2006 09:41

Exchange rates POS Exchange rates BNA

1 EUR = EUR 1.0000000 1 EUR = EUR 1.0000000

1 EUR = USD 1.0313000

1 EUR = DKK 7.4324000

1 EUR = GBP 0.6498000

1 EUR = CHF 1.5952000

1 EUR = SEK 8.6655000

1 EUR = NOK 8.0895000

1 EUR = AUD 1.5847000

1 EUR = SCP 0.6498000

3-242 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.2 Credit cards (5,2)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Checking the version number of the sysdef (System Definition File).

• Checking the remaining off-line booked card transactions.

• Checking the version numbers of the active stop lists.

• Checking the additional local card settings.

• Printing a list with the most important card data.

This menu item is mainly used by the Tokheim technician.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-243

On the left of the screen, the different cards are displayed:

The cards that are currently accepted in the service station are listed below the line

'Active cards'. The cards for which one or more settings had been locally modified in the past and that are in the meantime no longer accepted, are listed below the line

'Inactive cards'. When selecting one of both lines in the tree, the general properties concerning the acceptance of cards, can be displayed in the tab on the right of the screen.

By selecting a specific card type in the tree, the properties of the selected card type can be displayed in the 2 tabs on the right of the screen.

3-244 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.2.1 Tab ‘General’ (all card types)

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Sysdef version

It is defined in a sysdef (System Definition File) which credit cards can be accepted at a station and how they have to be accepted (on-line or off-line, with which product restrictions,…). Petrol Server activates a sysdef in Fuel POS. Every time a new sysdef is activated, the version number will be increased.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-245

3.5.2.2 Tab ‘General’ (individual card type)

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Card type

Each credit card type is identified by means of a number, which is displayed in this field.

Amount

When card transactions are booked off-line, then these transactions will be collected periodically by the Petrol Server. The amount displayed in this field represents the total amount of the transactions with this credit card type that are still in Fuel POS and that are not yet collected by the Petrol Server. Only the card transactions that are a part of a closed day, can be collected. So after the station was contacted to collect the data of the card transactions, this amount will be modified for all transactions performed before the last day closure.

Number of files

For each closed day report, a file is made with the card transactions of that day (on condition that the concerning card was accepted that day). In this field the number of transaction files that still have to be collected by the Petrol Server, is displayed. It actually indicates the number of different day reports for which the card transactions are still buffered in Fuel POS.

3-246 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Number of transactions

This field displays the number of card transactions booked up to the last day closure that were not yet collected by the Petrol Server.

First day report

The number of the oldest day report displaying transactions that still have to be collected.

Last day report

The number of the most recent day report displaying transactions that still have to be collected.

Stoplist version

The version number of the active stop list is displayed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-247

3.5.2.3 Tab ‘Local card settings’ (individual card type)

The way the Fuel POS accepts a card, is defined by the sysdef (System Definition File).

Via this tab, the Tokheim technician can locally modify a number of settings for the selected card.

Product restrictions

It is not possible to modify the product restrictions as defined in the sysdef, it is however possible to define additional restrictions. Each dispenser/product combination can be disabled for the selected card. This allows you to block one or more products for the selected card, or to disallow the card at one or more dispensers.

The additional restrictions can be defined before the settlement of a filling at the cash register and/or before the start of a transaction via the outdoor terminal.

Preset type

When a dispenser will be released via an outdoor terminal, a pre-authorisation amount will be used in the communication with the host. Via the sysdef, 2 different pre-authorisation amounts can be defined for a specific card, for example an amount for private cars and an amount for trucks. The Tokheim technician can define for each dispenser/product combination which of the 2 pre-authorisation amounts has to be used.

3-248 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.2.4 Printing a list with credit card data

When selecting this button, the credit card data can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

CREDIT CARDS

19-06-2006 12:20

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

Sysdef version: 0357

VISA

Card type: 02 First day report: 0028

Amount: 783.26 Last day report: 0028

Number of files: 1 Stoplist version: 0079

Number of transactions: 15

DKV-CARD

Card type: 03 First day report: 0028

Amount: 2315.87 Last day report: 0028

Number of files: 1 Stoplist version: 0001

Number of transactions: 8

EUROCARD

Card type: 04

Amount: 135.31 First day report: 0028

Number of files: 1 Last day report: 0028

Number of transactions: 6 Stoplist version: 0044

DINERS

Card type: 06 First day report: 0028

Amount: 0.00 Last day report: 0028

Number of files: 0 Stoplist version: 0008

Number of transactions: 0

UTA

Card type: 16 First day report: 0028

Amount: 1981.00 Last day report: 0028

Number of files: 1 Stoplist version: 0664

Number of transactions: 7

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-249

3.5.3 Local customers (5,3)

The complete module ‘Local customers’ is not a part of the standard Fuel POS system. Contact

Tokheim for more information about this software option.

3.5.3.1 Programming (5,3,1)

In total, up to 10000 local customers can be programmed in Fuel POS. This menu item is used to program these local customers.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Adding a new customer.

• Removing an existing customer.

• Modifying the properties of an existing customer.

• Adding a new customer identification.

• Removing an existing customer identification.

• Modifying the properties of an existing customer identification.

• Printing a customer list.

To execute these different functions, you do not need to collect all the existing customers and to display them on the screen. Therefore, a pop-up window is displayed first in which it can be indicated which existing customers have to be collected and displayed:

The pop-up window functions as follows:

• When “Customer number” is chosen without entering a number, then all existing customers will be collected and displayed in numerical order.

3-250 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

• When “Customer number” is chosen and a number is entered manually, then all existing customers of whom the customer number begins with the entered number, will be collected. The customers will then be displayed in numerical order.

• When “Customer number” is chosen and a bar code is read, then the customer with this bar code as customer number, will be collected.

• When “Name” is chosen without entering a text, then all existing customers will be collected and displayed in alphabetical order.

• When “Name” is chosen and a text is entered, then all existing customers of whom the customer name begins with the entered text, will be collected. The customers will then be displayed in alphabetical order.

• When a customer card is read that is already assigned to a local customer, then the name of this customer is entered automatically in the field ‘Name’. Afterwards the data of this customer can be collected.

• When ‘Cancel’ is chosen in the pop-up window, no customer is collected.

Afterwards new customers can be added.

The screen for programming the local customers will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-251

On the left of the screen, the existing customers and the customer identifications are displayed:

When selecting an existing customer in the tree, the properties of this customer can be modified in the 3 tabs on the right of the screen.

When selecting an existing customer identification in the tree, the properties of this customer identification can be modified in the 2 tabs on the right of the screen.

When reading a bar code that is used as customer number or as customer identification, this will automatically be selected in the tree. This is also applicable when an existing customer card is read.

3-252 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.3.1.1 Tab ‘General’ (Customer)

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Customer number

Each customer has a unique customer number. The customer number is assigned when the customer is added. This number cannot be modified afterwards.

Name

The name of the customer can be entered freely. It can be composed of maximum

30 characters.

Type of customer

The Fuel POS system distinguishes three different types of local customers.

- Credit

The customer does not pay the transactions at the cash desk, but will receive an invoice later, which still has to be paid. A credit customer can also fill up via the outdoor terminal provided that customer cards are used.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-253

- No credit (invoice still to be made)

The customer does pay the transactions immediately at the cash desk. However, the transactions are registered on his name in the Fuel POS system. This way, the Fuel POS supplies all the information that is needed to make an invoice for this customer afterwards.

- No credit (simplified invoices)

The customer does pay the transactions immediately at the cash desk and wants to receive a simplified invoice each time. Afterwards it is possible to print an overview of all simplified invoices handed out to a specific customer. However, it is not intended to charge these transactions a second time.

Address

Two lines of maximum 30 characters can be used to enter the address of the customer.

Postal code

The postal code of the customer’s domicile can be entered freely. The postal code can be composed of maximum 11 characters.

City

The city or town of the customer can be entered freely. It can be composed of maximum 25 characters.

VAT number

The VAT number is composed of two fields.

- The first part is the VAT country code that is selected from a drop down list. If the customer does not have a VAT number, then ‘None’ has to be selected in this list. If the VAT number would concern a country that is not in the list, then

‘Other’ has to be selected.

- In the second part the actual VAT number is entered without spaces or points.

For some country codes (BE, NL, LU, DK, FR and PL), the Fuel POS will check the validity of the VAT number, entered in the second field.

3-254 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.3.1.2 Tab ‘Loyalty’ (Customer)

On the tab ‘Loyalty’ we will find the following information:

Discount on

This field is used by the manager to specify whether or not the local customer automatically gets a loyalty discount for each purchase. Furthermore a restriction can be imposed so that the loyalty discount is only applicable at fuels or only at shop articles. In the drop down list there will be 4 possibilities:

- None

- Fuels

- Shop

- Fuels and shop

The customer will not receive automatically a loyalty discount at all fuels and shop articles. He will only get a loyalty discount on a fuel or shop article, if the manager has programmed a loyalty discount for this fuel or article.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-255

Multiplier

For a shop article, the manager can program a loyalty discount as a percentage of the unit price. For a fuel type, a loyalty discount can be programmed as a fixed amount per litre. This loyalty discount has to be considered as a base discount. Due to the multiplier a customer can have a higher or lower loyalty discount than another customer. For the calculation of the eventual discount at a purchase, the base price per article and per fuel type will be multiplied with the value of the multiplier.

When the local customer receives a loyalty discount, the multiplier must be filled in.

A value between 0.01 and 99.99 is accepted.

For example when a shop article is programmed with a loyalty discount of 10% and the multiplier is 1.50, then the customer will receive a discount of 15%. However, the customer will only receive a discount of 5% when the multiplier is 0.50.

3-256 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.3.1.3 Tab ‘Status’ (Customer)

On the tab ‘Status’ we will find the following information:

Balance

This field displays the actual balance of the customer. This is only applicable for credit customers. A positive value implies that the customer still has to pay an amount to the station. A negative amount implies that the station owes money to the customer. The balance is modified automatically for each purchase and each interim payment.

The balance is used to check the maximum credit given to the customer. As soon as the balance has reached the maximum credit, supplementary purchases on credit are no longer possible.

Since the Fuel POS does not make invoices and consequently there is no information available concerning the payment of these invoices, the balance will always increase and finally the maximum credit will be reached. To avoid this, the balance can be reset to zero again. This can be done in 3 different ways. The desired way is chosen from a drop down list ‘Reset balance’.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-257

Maximum credit

This field displays the maximum credit given to a credit customer. Purchases on credit will no longer be possible if this limit has been exceeded. Furthermore, a transaction started via the outdoor terminal will automatically stop as soon as the balance of the programmed maximum is reached.

The value zero has a special meaning here. This value has to be entered to block a credit customer completely.

The exact meaning of this field depends on the choice made in the drop down list

‘Reset balance’. When ‘Monthly’ is chosen, it concerns a maximum credit per month. When ‘Immediately’ is chosen, it concerns a maximum amount allowed per transaction. When ‘Back Office only’ is chosen, then the meaning depends on the back office application, in other words how does the back office application deal with this.

Reset balance

In this drop down list, the manager can indicate how the balance of a credit customer can be reset to zero again. There are three different possibilities:

- Monthly

The balance is automatically reset to zero at the end of the month. As a consequence, the amount entered as ‘Maximum credit’ is the maximum credit per month.

- Immediately

Each purchase on credit is added up to the current balance and immediately afterwards the balance is reset to zero. When the amount of this purchase is higher than the programmed maximum credit, then the purchase will be refused.

As a consequence, the amount entered as ‘Maximum credit’ is the maximum allowed amount per purchase.

When entering an amount – large enough – as ‘Maximum credit’, the manager gives the customer an unlimited credit.

- Back Office only

The Fuel POS will never reset the balance to zero. However the linked back office can send a new balance.

3-258 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.3.1.4 Tab ‘General’ (Customer identification)

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Identification

It is possible to enter into the Fuel POS system different identifications per customer. When the customer is a company, then a separate identification per employee or per car can be provided.

A customer identification can take different forms: a number, a text, a bar code or a customer card. The identification is allocated at the moment that it is added to the customer.

Additional info

The identification is used to recognize the customer, however it is not printed on the sales receipt. If this identification is used, the information that has to be printed on the sales receipt, can be entered in this field. When a customer card is allocated to an employee of a company, then the identification will be the card number. As additional info, the name of the employee or his license plate can for example be entered.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-259

PIN code

A customer card can be accepted in two different ways: based on a signature or a

PIN code. Obviously, the second method is the preferred method due to security reasons. Furthermore, it is the only method to accept a customer card via an outdoor terminal.

The PIN code is always composed of 4 digits and is entered in this field. Therefore, it is possible to ask the customer which PIN code he prefers to use and then to program this PIN code. The PIN code will never be displayed. So it is impossible to retrieve the active PIN code afterwards.

The manager can also change a PIN code afterwards. This will only be possible if the card has been read first. It is impossible to modify the PIN code without having the customer card.

Blocked

When this option is enabled, the customer identification can no longer be used.

When enabling this option, an identification can be blocked manually. A customer card will automatically be blocked if an incorrect PIN code has been entered three times.

The manager can again unblock an identification by disabling this option.

Acceptance card

The options ‘Indoor’ and ‘Outdoor’ are only available for customer cards. The manager indicates whether each customer card is to be accepted indoors (on the

Fuel POS terminal) and/or outdoors (on the outdoor payment terminal). Only a card with a PIN code can be accepted outdoors.

Replacement car

If this option is activated, the customer has to indicate each time whether he filled the tank of his own car or a replacement car. When the customer indicates that he filled the tank of his own car, he will have to enter the odometer of the car. When the customer indicates that it concerns a replacement car, then no odometer will be asked. If this option is activated, then the option ‘Odometer’ will automatically become active.

Odometer

If this option is activated, the customer has to enter each time the odometer of the car.

3-260 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Driver ID

It is also possible that a customer identification is linked to one car that is alternately used by several persons of the company. If at each transaction a supplementary identification of the driver is asked, one knows afterwards which person actually filled the tank. If this option is activated, an identification of 4 digits will be asked at each transaction. The entered identification is however not checked. The company itself has to allocate an identification to all of his employees.

Number plate

It is also possible that a customer identification is linked to one employee of a company that drives several cars. If at each transaction the number plate is asked, one knows afterwards which car the customer drove at the moment of the filling. It is sufficient to activate this option.

Additional information

If this option is activated, the customer will be asked at each transaction to enter additional information, which is composed of maximum 9 digits. This is only used when the customers prefer to receive other information than the odometer, number plate and driver ID.

Day total

This field displays the amount for which one has already bought today with the selected customer identification. Additional purchases are no longer possible on the same day in case the value, entered as day limit, would be exceeded.

Day limit

In order to avoid misuse, for example when a customer loses his card or when the card has been stolen, you can protect each identification separately by entering a day limit. This is the maximum amount that can be bought per day.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-261

3.5.3.1.5 Tab ‘Product restrictions’ (Customer identification)

On the tab ‘Product restrictions’ we will find the following information:

Allowed fuels

For each individual customer identification, the manager can decide which fuels can be bought or not. Therefore a list with all active card codes is provided. The fuels linked to the related card codes are put between brackets. The product restriction will only be checked in case of purchases on credit.

Car wash

For each individual customer identification, the manager can decide whether the use of the car wash is allowed or not. The product restriction will only be checked in case of purchases on credit.

Shop articles

For each individual customer identification, the manager can indicate which shop articles can be bought. The product restriction will only be checked in case of purchases on credit.

3-262 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.3.1.6 Adding a new customer

The following pop-up window is opened when the function ‘Add’ is activated to create a new customer:

The following data must be filled in for a new customer:

Customer number

Each customer has a unique customer number. This is the first field that has to be entered when a new customer is created. The customer number, composed of maximum 14 digits, has to be entered and confirmed with the Enter key. A bar code can also be used as customer number. The bar code can simply be scanned.

The customer number may not be used as customer identification for another customer.

Name

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-263

3.5.3.1.7 Adding a new customer identification

The following pop-up window is opened when the function ‘Add’ is activated to create a new customer identification:

The following data must be filled in for a new customer identification:

Identification

It is possible to enter into the Fuel POS system different identifications per customer. When the customer is a company, then for example a separate identification per employee or per car can be provided. This customer identification can take different forms:

- A customer card

In order to program a customer card, the magstripe has to be read. It is impossible to enter the number of the card manually.

- number

A unique number composed of maximum 14 digits can be used as identification.

A bar code can also be used as customer number. The bar code can simply be scanned.

However the number may not be used as customer number, or as identification of another customer. There is also the possibility to combine for example a customer number with a personal number. When for example 0335 is used as customer number, then the numbers 03350001, 03350002,… can be used as identification of this customer without having the risk of overlap.

3-264 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

-

A text composed of maximum 14 characters, can also be used as customer identification. Due to this field, the number plate can for example be used as identification.

Additional info

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-265

3.5.3.1.8 Printing a customer list

When selecting this button, a list of the local customers can be printed. A popup window is displayed in which it is defined which customers must be added to the list and in which certain choices concerning the lay-out can be made.

In the pop-up window we will find the following information:

Customers

To have all local customers on the customer list the option button ‘All’ has to be activated. When activating the option button “From-To”, all local customers programmed with a customer number, which is between the 2 numbers that the manager can enter, are included in the list.

Order

In this field the sorting order in which the local customers have to be printed on the customer list, is defined. The following possibilities can be selected:

- alphabetical (name) : The local customers are sorted alphabetically.

- numerical

Customer identifications

: The local customers are sorted according to the customer number.

It is possible to program several customer identifications per customer. When activating this option, the different customer identifications are also included in the customer list.

3-266 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of a customer list:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

LOCAL CUSTOMERS

ordered by number 27-06-2006 12:20

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

Customers: 11001-11005

Print : Identifications

Number Name/address/city/VAT number Loyalty discount Balance Maximum Rst Credit

11001 Turnhout Transport None 8621.81 25000.00 M YES

Industrielaan 210

B-2300 Turnhout

VAT no: 000000196

Id.:707881028350009917 Info:RVG178 0.00 250.00

Id.:707881028350009918 Info:PMC341 76.88 250.00

Id.:707881028350009919 Info:DFZ954 45.10 250.00

11002 Bank Of Belgium None 993.01 17500.00 M YES

Nieuwstraat 1

B-1000 Brussel

VAT no: 568214518

Id.:707881028350009920 Info:Card number 1 118.30 750.00

Id.:707881028350009921 Info:Card number 2 0.00 750.00

11003 Tokheim Belgium N.V. Fuels and shop (x 1.50) 15631.07 999999.99 M YES

Everdongenlaan 31

B-2300 Turnhout

VAT no: 413707968

11004 Interbrew None 2501.90 10000.00 M YES

Jupilerbaan 2

B-3000 Leuven

VAT no: 826665177

Id.:707881028350009922 Info:EDP458 0.00 150.00

Id.:707881028350009923 Info:IJQ336 0.00 150.00

Id.:707881028350009924 Info:MCM878 0.00 150.00

11005 Electrabel None 0.00 Blocked M YES

Nieuwstraat 98

B-1000 Brussel

VAT no: 328214544

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-267

3.5.3.2 Transaction lists (5,3,2)

Via the Fuel POS system no invoices for local customers can be made, however all information to make an invoice is available. This menu item is used to make and to print detailed lists with the individual transactions of these local customers.

A pop-up window is displayed in which certain choices have to be made concerning the type of list, for which customers the list must be made, for which period and in which lay-out:

In the pop-up window we will find the following information:

Type of customer

There are several possibilities to make transaction lists, depending on the type of customer. Therefore the type of customer must be selected in the first field. Two different types are distinguished:

- Credit / No credit (invoice still to be made)

These are the customers that buy on credit as well as the customers that pay immediately at the cash point, however they still have to receive an invoice for their purchases.

- No credit (simplified invoices)

These are the customers that pay their purchases immediately at the cash point and that receive a simplified invoice at the same time. Therefore an invoice no longer has to be made.

3-268 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Layout

After selecting the type of customer, the preferred lay-out for printing the transaction lists must be chosen from a drop down list. The following options are possible:

- Transactions per customer

This option is available for all customer types. All individual transactions of the customer are included in the list in chronological order, regardless of the used customer identification.

- Transactions per customer and per identification

This option is available for all customer types. All individual transactions of the customer are included in the list per customer identification. Furthermore, the totals per product are displayed as well.

- Global overview with a list of the invoices

This lay-out can only be selected for customers who have already received a simplified invoice at each purchase. The transaction list contains for each customer the total amount of all simplied invoices received during the selected period and an overview of all individual simplified invoices.

- Global overview without a list of the invoices

This lay-out can only be selected for customers who have already received a simplied invoice at each purchase. The transaction list contains for each customer the total amount of all simplified invoices received during the selected period.

Order

After having selected the customer type and the desired lay-out, the order for making and printing the data is selected from a drop down list. The following options are possible:

- numerical

This option is available for all customer types. When transaction lists are made, then these are sorted according to customer number. When a global overview is made for all customers that have received simplified invoices, then the data in the overview will be sorted according to customer number.

- alphabetical (name)

This option is available for all customer types. When transaction lists are made, then these are sorted alphabetically. When a global overview is made for all customers that have received simplified invoices, then the data in the overview will be sorted alphabetically. number

This option is only available for customers who have already received a simplified invoice at each purchase. When transaction lists are made, then these are sorted according to the customer’s VAT number. When a global overview is made, then the data in the overview will be sorted according to the customer’s VAT number.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-269

Period

The manager has to indicate for which period he wishes to make the transaction lists. The transactions of local customers are synchronised with the day reports. The beginning of the period is always the start of a day report and the end of the period is the closing time of (another) day report. Only the transactions of the last 45 day reports can be printed.

Customers

By means of customer numbers, the manager can decide to make the transaction lists of only a part of the programmed local customers. This possibility does not exist for a global list of simplified invoices.

3-270 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of a transaction list for a credit customer if ‘Transactions per customer and per identification’ has been selected as lay-out:

Station Tokheim Turnhout Transport

Unit 1 Baker Road Industrielaan 210

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate B-2300 Turnhout

DD5 3RT Dundee VAT no: 000000196

Scotland

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Customer number Customer name Period Page

11001 Turnhout Transport From 29-06-2006 11:30 To 29-06-2006 11:40 1

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Identification/card: 707881028300009917 Info: RVG178

Date Time Product Quantity Price VAT % Amount Odometer

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

29-06-2006 11:38 Unleaded 98 43.05L 1.254 21.00 EUR 53.98 Credit

Product VAT % Quantity VAT excluded VAT amount VAT included

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unleaded 98 21.00 43.05L EUR 44.61 EUR 9.37 EUR 53.98

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Total EUR 44.61 EUR 9.37 EUR 53.98

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Identification/card: 707881028300009918 Info: PMC341

Date Time Product Quantity Price VAT % Amount Odometer

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

29-06-2006 11:37 Diesel 49.98L 1.009 21.00 EUR 50.43 50569 Credit

Customer loyalty EUR -3.00

Bacardi lemon 3.00 1.80 21.00 EUR 5.40

Deposit 3.00 0.20 EUR 0.60

Freedent mint 1.00 0.60 6.00 EUR 0.60

29-06-2006 11:38 Diesel 80.22L 1.009 21.00 EUR 80.94 51654 Credit

Customer loyalty EUR -4.81

Product VAT % Quantity Vat excluded VAT amount VAT included

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Diesel 21.00 130.20L EUR 102.12 EUR 21.44 EUR 123.56

Shop 0.00 EUR 0.60 EUR 0.00 EUR 0.60

Shop 6.00 EUR 0.57 EUR 0.03 EUR 0.60

Shop 21.00 EUR 4.46 EUR 0.94 EUR 5.40

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Total EUR 107.75 EUR 22.41 EUR 130.16

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sale on customer number (no identification/card used)

Date Time Product Quantity Price VAT % Amount Odometer

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

29-06-2006 11:39 Unleaded 95 63.63L 1.226 21.00 EUR 78.01 Credit

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-271

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Customer number Customer name Period Page

11001 Turnhout Transport From 29-06-2006 11:30 To 29-06-2006 11:40 2

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Product VAT % Quantity VAT excluded VAT amount VAT included

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unleaded 95 21.00 63.63L EUR 64.47 EUR 13.54 EUR 78.01

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Total EUR 64.47 EUR 13.54 EUR 78.01

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Interim payments

Date Time Amount

___________________________________

29-06-2006 11:40 EUR 50.00

___________________________________

Total EUR 50.00

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Total customer

Product VAT % Quantity VAT excluded VAT amount VAT included

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unleaded 98 21.00 43.05L EUR 44.61 EUR 9.37 EUR 53.98

Diesel 21.00 130.20L EUR 102.12 EUR 21.44 EUR 123.56

Unleaded 95 21.00 63.63L EUR 64.47 EUR 13.54 EUR 78.01

Shop 0.00 EUR 0.60 EUR 0.00 EUR 0.60

Shop 6.00 EUR 0.57 EUR 0.03 EUR 0.60

Shop 21.00 EUR 4.46 EUR 0.94 EUR 5.40

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Total amount purchases EUR 216.83 EUR 45.32 EUR 262.15

Total amount payments EUR 50.00

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Balance 212.15

3-272 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Example of a transaction list for a customer who has no credit, but for whom still an invoice has to be made. The lay-out ‘Transactions per customer’ has been selected in the example below:

Station Tokheim Interbrew

Unit 1 Baker Road Jupilerbaan 2

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee B-3000 Leuven

Scotland VAT no: 826665177

Customer number Customer name Period Page

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

11004 Interbrew From 29-06-2006 11:40 To 29-06-2006 15:57 1

Date Time Transaction information Product Quantity Price VAT % Amount

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

29-06-2006 15:54 Purchase, already paid Diesel 38.43L 1.009 21.00 EUR 38.78

Receipt 0052110004 Customer loyalty EUR -2.31

EDP458 Bacardi lemon 3.00 1.80 21.00 EUR 5.40

Receipt total: EUR 43.07 Deposit 3.00 0.20 EUR 0.60

Freedent mint 1.00 0.60 6.00 EUR 0.60

29-06-2006 15:56 Purchase, already paid Diesel 33.39L 1.009 21.00 EUR 33.69

Receipt 0052110005 Customer loyalty EUR -2.00

EDP458

Receipt total: EUR 31.69

29-06-2006 15:56 Purchase, already paid Unleaded 98 21.84L 1.254 21.00 EUR 27.39

Receipt 0052110006

IJQ336

Receipt total: EUR 27.39

29-06-2006 15:57 Purchase, already paid Unleaeded 95 20.58L 1.226 21.00 EUR 25.23

Receipt 0052110007

Receipt total: EUR 25.23

________________________________________________

Total amount purchases EUR 127.38

Total amount payments EUR 127.38

Balance EUR 0.00

________________________________________________

VAT percentage VAT excluded VAT amount VAT included

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________

6.00 % EUR 0.57 EUR 0.03 EUR 0.60

21.00 % EUR 104.28 EUR 21.90 EUR 126.18

___________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Total EUR 104.85 EUR 21.93 EUR 126.78

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-273

Example of a global overview of simplified invoices that have been handed out:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

OVERVIEW SIMPLIFIED INVOICES

ordered by number

29-06-2006 18:00

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

Period: From 01-06-2006 00:00 To 28-06-2006 00:00

Print : Invoices

Number Name/address/city/VAT number Total amount invoices

11001 Turnhout Transport 709.67

Industrielaan 210

B-2300 Turnhout

VAT no: 000000196

Invoice: 801000000097 Total: 66.25

Invoice: 801000000167 Total: 58.41

Invoice: 801000000368 Total: 36.56

Invoice: 801000000568 Total: 70.26

Invoice: 801000000666 Total: 63.38

Invoice: 801000000987 Total: 60.00

Invoice: 801000001254 Total: 85.68

Invoice: 801000001325 Total: 55.61

Invoice: 801000001450 Total: 84.11

Invoice: 801000001490 Total: 33.79

Invoice: 801000001550 Total: 74.26

Invoice: 801000001669 Total: 21.36

11002 Bank Of Belgium 700.18

Nieuwstraat 1

B-1000 Brussel

VAT no: 568214518

Invoice: 801000000099 Total: 93.26

Invoice: 801000000254 Total: 110.10

Invoice: 801000000697 Total: 109.37

Invoice: 801000001280 Total: 89.34

Invoice: 801000001456 Total: 96.54

Invoice: 801000001560 Total: 98.33

Invoice: 801000001700 Total: 103.24

3-274 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.4 Extra payment modes (5,4)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Defining the extra payment modes that are be accepted at the station as a payment mode.

• Printing a list with the extra payment modes that are programmed.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-275

3.5.4.1 Tab ‘General’

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

No.

Up to 30 extra payment modes can be programmed.

Name

The name of the extra payment mode can be entered freely. It is composed of maximum 20 characters.

3-276 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.4.2 Printing a list with extra payment modes

When selecting this button, a list with the extra payment modes that are programmed, can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

EXTRA PAYMENT MODES

03-07-2006 14:43

No. Name

1 Cheque

2 Paper cheque

3 Food cheque

4 Fuel cheque

5 Manual voucher

6 Gift coupon

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-277

3.5.5 Litre coupons (5,5)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Defining the litre coupons that are accepted at the station as payment mode.

• Printing a list with the programmed litre coupons.

The screen will look like this:

3-278 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.5.1 Tab ‘General’

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

No.

Up to 10 litre coupons can be programmed.

Name

The name of the litre coupon can be entered freely. It is composed of maximum

20 characters.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-279

3.5.5.2 Printing a list with litre coupons

When selecting this button, a list of the programmed litre coupons can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

LITRE COUPONS

03-07-2006 18:26

No. Name

1 Embassy coupon

2 MOC coupon

3-280 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.5.6 Delayed payments (5,6)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Displaying all outstanding delayed payments.

• Erasing a delayed payment.

• Printing a list with all outstanding delayed payments.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-281

3.5.6.1 Tab ‘General’

On the tab ‘General’ we will find an overview of all outstanding delayed payments. For each delayed payment, we will find the following information:

Number

Each delayed payment receives a unique serial number. The cashier uses this number to look up the delayed payment in the forecourt screen. This number is also processed in a bar code on the receipt of the delayed payment, in this way the cashier can scan this number instead of entering the number manually.

Transaction number

Each transaction has a unique serial number that is printed on the sales receipt.

Date/time

The date and time of registering the delayed payment.

Open amount

This is the balance of the delayed payment that the customer still has to settle.

3-282 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Already paid

When the customer did not have enough money with him, then this is the part of the transaction that he has already settled.

A delayed payment is used when a customer has no or not enough money with him.

When he settles his debt afterwards at the cash point, the cashier chooses the correct delayed payment in the forecourt screen and then enters the method of payment. At that moment, the delayed payment is removed automatically. When at a certain moment there are delayed payments of which one assumes that they will never be settled or that are for example already settled by means of a bank remittance, then these can also be erased via this menu item. This is always registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# POS 1 04-07-2006 10:56:27 #

Delayed payment number 10010 deleted, Transaction number 0055110008, Balance 18.48, Already paid 50.00

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-283

3.5.6.2 Printing a list with delayed payments

When selecting this button, a list of the outstanding delayed payments can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATIONSNUMMER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

DELAYED PAYMENTS

04-07-2006 13:24

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

No. delayed payment Receipt Date Time amount

10004 0055110001 01-07-06 10:00 53.98

10005 0055110002 01-07-06 10:00 25.81

10006 0055110003 01-07-06 10:01 26.60

10007 0055110004 02-07-06 10:01 52.55

10008 0055110005 03-07-06 10:02 14.37

10009 0055110006 04-07-06 10:02 57.63

+ ____________________

Total amount delayed payments 230.94

Total number of delayed payments 6

3-284 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.6 POS (6)

3.6.1 POS configuration (6,1)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Modifying the properties of the customer display.

• Modifying the properties of the customer receipt.

• Modifying the properties of the simplified invoice.

• Programming the maximum amount of the cashdrawer.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-285

On the left of the screen, the different cash points are displayed:

The Fuel POS system is composed of maximum 8 cash points. When selecting the line

‘Fuel POS system’ in the tree, the general properties that are not defined per cash point, can be modified. This means that the properties for all connected cash points will always be the same.

When selecting a specific cash point in the list, the properties of this cash point can be modified in the 4 tabs on the right of the screen. Since these programmings will very often be the same for all connected cash points, there is the possibility to apply the properties - programmed for 1 cash point - automatically at all other cash points.

3-286 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.6.1.1 Tab ‘General’ (all cash points)

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Numbering of simplified invoices

On each simplified invoice, an invoice number is printed. This invoice number is composed of 12 digits. The first 4 digits refer to the station number, the next

8 digits are the actual invoice numbers. This means for example that number

801100059855 has serial number 00059855 and station number 8011.

The numbering of the simplified invoices can be programmed in 2 different ways:

- The simplified invoices are always numbered consecutively.

- Every year, on the 1 st of January, the numbering always begins with 1.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-287

Maximum time that the cash drawer may remain open

In principle, the cashier has to close his cash drawer after each transaction. You can draw his attention to this by letting the Fuel POS generate a sound when the cash drawer remains open for a certain period. The maximum time will be entered in this field (in seconds). The value 0 means that no check will be done and consequently no sound will be given.

Generating a sound does not prevent the cashier from starting new transactions without having closed the cash drawer first. If new transactions have to be refused as long as the cash drawer is open, you can program this via the user rights that are linked to the different profiles. For this purpose, you have to disable the user right

‘Transactions while cash drawer open’ (which you can find under ‘POS’). This modification will become active as soon as a user, linked to the modified user profile, opens a new shift.

The safe drop amount may not exceed the actual cash drawer contents

After activating this option, the Fuel POS will give an error message when the cashier enters a safe drop amount which exceeds the actual cash drawer contents at that moment.

Automatically display the subtotal during a transaction

The customer can always follow on the customer display which fillings and shop articles the cashier adds to the transaction. The cashier can also at any time show the total amount on the customer display by means of the key “Subtotal” or by pressing the corresponding button on the forecourt screen.

However you can also make sure that the subtotal of a transaction will be displayed automatically on the customer display, so that the cashier does not need to indicate this explicitly. For this purpose, you only need to enable this option and enter the number of seconds at which the last chosen article will be replaced by the total amount of the transaction.

3-288 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.6.1.2 Tab ‘Customer display’ (individual POS)

The customer display is composed of 2 lines of 20 characters each. The customer can follow the progress of the transaction on the customer display. When no transaction is active, a welcome text is displayed. Depending on the shift (open or closed) a different text will be displayed. In this tab, the welcome text for both situations will be programmed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-289

3.6.1.3 Tab ‘Receipt’ (individual POS)

On the tab ‘Receipt’ we will find the following information:

Header

For the header of the receipt up to 10 lines can be programmed. One line is composed of maximum 40 characters. The header of the receipt of the first

Fuel POS cash point will also be printed on all reports and lists.

Footer

For the footer of the receipt up to 10 lines can be programmed. One line is composed of maximum 40 characters.

Print automatically a receipt

After activating this option, for each transaction a receipt will automatically be printed regardless of the payment mode. Some payment modes are always accompanied by the printing of a receipt. For these payment modes, this programming does not influence the printing of a receipt.

Print logo

When the oil company decides to print the company logo on each receipt, then this option has to be activated.

3-290 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Print extra information in case of a delayed payment

For each delayed payment, a receipt is printed automatically that has to be signed by the customer. To this receipt, a number of lines can be added if necessary. The customer can then fill in his name, address and telephone number. For this purpose, this option has to be activated.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-291

3.6.1.4 Tab ‘Simplified invoice’ (individual POS)

On the tab ‘Simplified invoice’ we will find the following information:

Header

For the header of the simplified invoice, up to 10 lines can be programmed. One line is composed of maximum 40 characters.

Footer

For the footer of the simplified invoice, up to 10 lines can be programmed. One line is composed of maximum 40 characters.

Print automatically a copy

If you want to save a copy of each simplified invoice, you can activate this option and you will receive automatically a copy of each simplified invoice.

Use of simplified invoice active

If the station manager does not use simplified invoices, then this functionality can be disabled. By deactivating this option, the cashier can no longer print simplified invoices.

3-292 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Additional customer information

At the simplified invoice, additional customer information can be printed. The following options are possible:

- The name of the customer.

- The address of the customer.

- The town or city of the customer.

- The VAT number of the customer.

- The mileage of the car.

- The number plate of the car.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-293

3.6.1.5 Tab ‘Cash drawer limit’ (individual POS)

To avoid having too much money in the cash drawer, the cashier has to skim regularly a certain amount. You can draw the cashier’s attention to this by programming a limit in this tab. The cashier will receive a warning in the forecourt screen as soon as the amount in the drawer becomes higher than the cash drawer limit.

The Fuel POS takes cash money in local currency into account as well as the value of foreign currencies (converted to the local currency).

Each time the maximum content of the cash drawer is exceeded, this is registered in the Fuel POS journal.

# POS 1 10-07-2006 14:26:54 #

Maximum cash drawer limit exceeded !

The warning for the cashier will continue appearing in the forecourt screen until the amount is again below the programmed cash drawer limit.

3-294 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Normally, the cash drawer has to be skimmed in order to come again below the maximum cash drawer limit. When the cash drawer is skimmed and the value goes below the cash drawer limit again, the following message is registered in the Fuel POS journal:

# POS 1 10-07-2006 14:41:00 #

Below maximum cash drawer limit !

The message also disappears when the active shift is closed, since in this case the total amount becomes equal to zero again.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-295

3.6.2 Print receipts (6,2)

In the forecourt screen, the cashier can always print a receipt of the last paid transaction. Via this menu item, he can still print a receipt of one of the last

200 transactions.

The screen will look like this:

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information for each transaction:

Date/time

This is the date and time of the transaction. When you open the screen, the transactions are always displayed according to date and time; the most recent transaction is mentioned on top.

3-296 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Device

For each transaction it is indicated where it has been settled. The following codes will be used:

- POS : The transaction was paid at the cash point.

- OPT : The transaction was started via an outdoor terminal.

- MAN : The transaction was started in manual service and is automatically settled by the Fuel POS.

- TST : This concerns a pump test that was executed by putting the pump in test mode.

This means that the receipts from transactions via an outdoor terminal can be printed again at the cash point.

Pump no

A pump number will only be displayed, if the transaction contains a filling. When the transaction contains several fillings, then the pump number of the first filling will be displayed.

Product

When the transaction contains a filling, then the fuel type will be displayed. When a transaction contains several fillings, the fuel type of the first filling will be displayed.

In case the transaction contains only shop articles, then the word “SHOP” will be entered.

Volume

When the transaction contains a filling, then the number of litres will be displayed.

When a transaction contains several fillings, then the number of litres of the first filling will be displayed.

Number shop

This column indicates the number of different shop articles (number of lines) this transaction contains.

Amount fuel

When the transaction contains a filling, then the amount of this filling will be displayed. When a transaction contains several fillings, then the amount of the first filling will be displayed.

Total receipt

The total amount of the transaction will be displayed in this column.

By clicking at the column heading, the transactions can be sorted in different ways.

This allows you to retrieve a certain transaction easily.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-297

Press this button to print the receipt of the indicated transaction. At the receipts, printed in this way, the VAT will no longer be mentioned.

3-298 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.6.3 Touchscreen calibration (6,4)

If a touchscreen is used, it is very important that the cursor moves exactly to the indicated position when touching the screen. When this does not happen, the touchscreen has to be calibrated again. The following screen is displayed when the touchscreen calibration starts:

In the above-mentioned screen, the target has to be touched from a position of normal use. This is executed three times in a row.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-299

You can then easily check whether the cursor actually follows your finger by touching the following screen at several places:

If the cursor reacts in a correct way, the ‘Yes’ button has to be touched. When the calibration is not ok, this is automatically cancelled after 30 seconds. If required, the calibration can be started again.

3-300 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7 System (7)

3.7.1 VAT codes (7,1)

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Modifying VAT codes.

• Programming the VAT number of the station.

• Printing a list with VAT codes.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-301

3.7.1.1 Tab ‘General’

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Code

Each fuel type and each shop article in the Fuel POS is linked to a VAT code. This code is linked to a VAT percentage. If a modification of the VAT percentages occurs, then the VAT percentage that is part of a certain code, can be modified. In this way, you do not have to modify the VAT percentage of each individual article.

However, this does not mean that the sales price of the articles will be modified. If you – in case of a modification of the VAT percentage – want to change the sales price, this has to be executed article by article.

The 10 available VAT codes are numbered from 0 up and to 9. Code 0 is always linked to 0.00% and cannot be modified.

Old %

In this field, the current VAT percentage is entered. This percentage cannot be modified.

New %

In this field, the new VAT percentage has to be filled in.

3-302 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Activation

The modified VAT percentages can be activated in two different ways:

- Immediate

The modified VAT percentages are activated when saving the data.

- Date/time

The date and time of activating the modified VAT percentages can be entered.

Apply VAT on the deposit of shop articles

In case the authorities would decide to impose VAT on the deposit of shop articles, you can activate this by means of this field. Only when this field is enabled, you can program a VAT code for the deposit of a shop article.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-303

3.7.1.2 Tab ‘VAT number’

On the tab ‘VAT number’ we will find the following information:

Article

In this field, you can enter the VAT number of the station that is applicable when selling shop articles. When the Fuel POS prints at each sale a separate receipt for fuel and for shop articles, then this VAT number will be printed on the receipt of the shop articles. If this option is not active and only one receipt will be printed per transaction containing both fuel and shop articles, then the insert of this VAT number is only for your information.

Fuel

In this field, you can enter the VAT number of the station that is applicable when selling fuel. When the Fuel POS prints at each sale a separate receipt for shop articles and for fuel, then this VAT number will be printed on the receipt containing the fuel. If this option is not active and only one receipt will be printed per transaction containing both fuel and shop articles, then the insert of this VAT number is only for your information.

3-304 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7.1.3 Printing a list with VAT codes

When selecting this button, a list of the programmed VAT codes can be printed.

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

VAT CODES

14-07-2006 12:22

VAT Code Current % New % Activation new %

0 0.00 0.00

1 6.00 6.00

2 12.00 12.00

3 21.00 25.00 01-01-2007 00:00

4 0.00 0.00

5 0.00 0.00

6 0.00 0.00

7 0.00 0.00

8 0.00 0.00

9 0.00 0.00

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-305

3.7.2 Types of receipts (7,2)

In the forecourt screen, the cashier can book the different ways of receipts. Via this menu item the different types of receipts are programmed.

The screen will look like this:

3-306 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

No.

Up to 11 different types of receipts can be printed. The first type is fixed and is used when a local customer pays his invoice at the cash point. The 10 remaining types of receipts can be programmed as desired.

Name

The description of each type of receipt can be entered as desired with a maximum of 20 characters.

Additional info

For each free programmable type of receipt, you can give the cashier the possibility to enter extra information each time. This extra information is added to the receipt that will automatically be printed for each receipt.

Invoice numbers that have not been sent by a Back Office can be entered

When a local customer settles his invoice at the cash point, the cashier has to begin by entering the invoice number. He can enter this invoice number freely or he can select one from a list with invoice numbers, which the back office has sent to the

Fuel POS.

If the back office does not want to receive invoice payments of unknown invoices, this option will be disabled. Consequently, only invoice numbers that were sent by the back office, can be used.

This option can only be enabled or disabled by a technician.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-307

3.7.3 Types of expenses (7,3)

In the sales screen, the cashier can book the different types of expenses. Via this menu item, the different types of receipts are programmed.

The screen will look like this:

3-308 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

No.

Up to 12 different types of expenses can be used. The first two types are fixed and cannot be modified. The first type is used to skim the cash drawer when it contains too much money. The second type is used to refund a customer, who has not consumed the entire amount that he had inserted in the Bank Note Acceptor. The remaining 10 types of expenses can be programmed freely.

Name

The description of each type of expense can be entered as desired with a maximum of 20 characters.

Additional info

For each free programmable type of expense, the cashier can have the possibility to enter each time additional information. This additional information is added to the receipt that will be printed automatically for each expense.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-309

3.7.4 Types of additional information (7,4)

Sometimes oil companies need information from their stations that is not related to the information of the day report. Therefore, the Fuel POS offers you the possibility to enter additional information in the course of the day. Via this menu item, you can define in advance what kind of information can be entered.

The screen will look like this:

3-310 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

No.

Up to 30 different types of additional information can be programmed.

Name

The description of each type of additional information can be entered freely with a maximum of 20 characters.

Format

For each type of additional information, you can define which notation has to be used when entering this information.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-311

3.7.5 Language selection (7,5)

The service engineer selects the language of the system while installing the Fuel POS.

Via this menu item the service engineer will establish the language or languages used towards the customer. It concerns as well the language indoor (on the PIN pad, on the customer display and on the receipt) as the language outdoor (on the screen of the outdoor terminal and on the receipt). Additionally the station manager can modify via this menu item the order of the languages in which they are displayed on the screen of the outdoor terminal.

The screen will look like this:

3-312 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7.5.1 Tab ‘Indoor’

On the tab ‘Indoor’ we will find the following information:

Default customer language

This is the language that will be used by default on the customer display and the

PIN pad for the communication with the customer. When paying with a card the customer can change himself the language on the PIN pad.

Default ticket language

This is the language used on the receipts. It can be set up in 3 different ways by the service engineer:

* The language set up as the one of the Fuel POS system is always used as language on the receipt.

* The language set up as the default customer language is always used as language on the receipt.

* The language used in the dialogue with the customer is used automatically as language on the receipt. When paying with a card this can be the language selected by the customer.

Language button 1 – Language button 4

These are the languages the customer can select on the PIN pad.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-313

Restore defaults

The technician can restore the default values for the selected country and the language, which was chosen at the installation.

3-314 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7.5.2 Tab ‘Outdoor’

On the tab ‘Outdoor’ we will find the following information:

Default customer language

This is the language that will be used by default on the screen of the outdoor terminal. The customer can however change himself the language.

Default ticket language

This is the language used on the receipts. It can be set up in 3 different ways by the service engineer:

* The language set up as the one of the Fuel POS system is always used as language on the receipt.

* The language set up as the default customer language is always used as language on the receipt.

* The language used in the dialogue with the customer is used automatically as language on the receipt.

Language button

This is the language button which is displayed on the screen of the outdoor terminal. The customer has to press this button if he wants to change the language of the teminal.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-315

Language order

When the customer presses the language button on the outdoor terminal, then a list with the available languages will displayed. The order of the languages will be as listed here. Select the language you want to move in order to change this order. Use next one of the two buttons on the right side:

Press this button to move the selected language upwards.

Press this button to move the selected language downwards.

Restore defaults

The technician can restore the default values for the selected country and the language, which was chosen at the installation.

3-316 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7.6 Date and time (7,6)

The function to program the date and the time of the Fuel POS can only be used if no credit cards are accepted via the Fuel POS. If credit cards are accepted, then the Petrol

Server will automatically modify the date and the time. In this way, for example the switch from wintertime to summertime will occur automatically. When no credit cards are accepted, then for example the switch from wintertime to summertime must be done manually.

After having chosen this menu item, a pop-up window will be shown with the current date and time:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-317

3.7.7 Communication (7,7)

3.7.7.1 Mail (7,7,1)

On demand of the oil company, Tokheim can send electronic mail to the Fuel POS via the MIS Server.

The most important functions of this menu item are:

• Displaying a list of the electronic mail that was received.

• Printing the electronic mail.

3-318 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-319

3.7.7.1.1 Tab ‘General’

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Status

For each received message, it is indicated whether it was already read or not. A message is read by printing it or by showing the print preview. Only the last

20 received messages can be retrieved. If a 21 st message is received, the oldest present message will automatically be deleted, even it was not yet read.

Date/time

This is the date and time of receiving the electronic message. When opening the screen, the messages are automatically sorted by date and time, and the most recent message is put at the top.

Description

The first line of the actual message is displayed as description.

Identification

This concerns the name of the file that was sent.

3-320 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7.7.1.2 Printing electronic mail

When selecting this button, the message that is indicated in the list, can be printed or displayed as print preview. This action will cause that the status of a message changes from ‘unread’ into ‘read’.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-321

3.7.7.2 Modem (7,7,2)

Via this menu item, the technician programs the interval when the modem has to be active. After having chosen this menu item, a pop-up window is displayed that shows the current settings:

At the opening of the pop-up window, the option ‘AA ON’ displays the current status of the modem. When this option is enabled, the modem is active.

When the start and end time are equal to 0:00 and the option ‘AA ON’ is enabled, then the modem is always active. When the option ‘AA ON’ is disabled in this situation, the modem will never be active.

When the modem is not active, this one can immediately be activated by enabling the option ‘AA ON’. The modem will then remain active until the end time is reached again. In this way, the modem can also be disabled immediately until the start time is reached again.

3-322 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.7.7.3 Back Office Computer (7,7,3)

This menu item is only available if the Fuel POS is configured to send data automatically to a Back Office Computer (slave interface).

3.7.7.3.1 Restart communication (7,7,3,1)

Every time a transaction is settled or a report is closed, the Fuel POS will try to send this information to the connected Back Office. However when the Back Office system is not accessible, the Fuel POS will print a receipt after a number of attempts, mentioning that there are communication problems. Still the Fuel POS will regularly try to send the data again.

When the communication problems are solved, you do not need to wait until the

Fuel POS does another attempt to send the data. Via this menu item, you can manually start sending the data.

3.7.7.3.2 Print status (7,7,3,2)

Via this menu item, the status of the communication between the Fuel POS and the

Back Office Computer can be printed at a receipt.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-323

3.7.8 Station (7,8)

At the installation of the Fuel POS, the coordinates of the station are entered by the technician. Via this menu item, the data can be retrieved in order to check. In case of modifications, these can be done via this menu item.

The screen will look like this:

3-324 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8 Diagnostics (8)

3.8.1 Journal (8,1)

3.8.1.1 Display journal (8,1,1)

Via this menu item, the 20 last registrations of the electronic journal can be displayed.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-325

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Device / Number

Each registration in the electronic journal is linked to a device. For example, a transaction is linked to a POS or an OPT, a delivery is linked to a tank group,…

Furthermore, of each type several devices can be installed. Therefore up to

8 cashpoints can be linked, up to 16 tank groups,… The first two columns indicate which device in the system is responsible for the registration in the journal.

When you display the journal at POS 1, then the overview contains the registrations that are linked to POS 1 and the registrations that are linked to another device than the POS. When you display the journal at another POS, this overview will contain only the registrations that are linked to this POS.

Date and time

This column contains the date and time of the registration in the electronic journal.

Description

A registration in the electronic journal is composed of several lines. In this column, the first line is displayed. In case of a sale, this is always the first article in the transaction.

When you double click on a line in the overview, you can display the complete registration. For example:

3-326 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.1.2 Journaal queries (8,1,2)

All POS transactions, notifications and error messages will be registered in an electronic journal that will be saved for two years. Via this menu item, you can consult the journal. In order to do this very efficiently and to avoid seeking endlessly, a powerful query mechanism is available.

Executing a query means that you will seek purposefully certain sections in the journal.

For example, you will be able to look up only transactions, only fuel deliveries,… You will be able to compose these queries yourself and therefore you will be able to define yourself which information you will search.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-327

On the left of the screen, the already programmed journal queries will be displayed:

There is a difference between fixed queries and variable queries. The fixed queries cannot be modified or removed, you can only execute them. The variable queries on the other hand can be modified or removed. You can also add variable queries. The maximum number of variable queries is 20. Only a technician can modify or remove a fixed query. If required, he can also add a fixed query.

When executing a query, the Fuel POS will look up all journal registrations that meet the criteria of the query. For each query, up to 5 criteria can be programmed. It is sufficient that a journal registration meets 1 of the 5 criteria. This means that the registration does not have to meet all 5 criteria at the same time (the mutual relation is

‘OR’, not ‘AND’). Imagine that you want to look up all deliveries and manual gauges, then you can configure a query with all deliveries as first criterion and all manual gauges as second criterion.

When selecting a variable query in the tree, the 5 criteria of the query will be displayed in the tab on the right of the screen. Furthermore, some properties of the query can be modified. You can also execute the selected variable query.

When selecting a fixed query in the tree, the properties and the 5 criteria of the query will be displayed in the tab on the right of the screen. You can also execute the selected fixed query.

3-328 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When selecting a criterion of a variable query in the tree, you can modify the properties of this criterion in the tab on the right of the screen

When selecting a criterion of a fixed query in the tree, you can display the properties of this criterion in the tab on the right of the screen.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-329

3.8.1.2.1 Tab ‘General’ (Variable query)

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Journal query

You will give a name to each journal query, which will then be displayed on the left in the tree. It is best to choose a name that matches with the content of the query.

Detail registrations

For each query, you can define whether you want a detailed or a simplified overview of the journal registrations. You can select one of the two following possibilities: logging

If for example a shop article is sold, this is part of a complete transaction. When you have composed a query to look up the sales of one specific shop article and you have selected this option, you will receive an overview of each complete transaction in which this article is included.

- Only print the matching line

When you select this option in the same example, then only the lines from the journal that contain the specified article and not the complete transaction, will be displayed when executing the query.

3-330 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Class

The 5 lines in the chart correspond with the 5 criteria that are programmed for the selected query. In the first column, you will see for each criterion which section of the journal was chosen.

Detailed selection type

The content of this column depends on the chosen section in the previous column.

For some sections, you can even search more detailed in the journal than at the level of the section itself. When you have selected for example the section ‘Fuels –

Delivery’, then it is possible to look up the deliveries of a certain fuel type. In this column, you will see which other details are possible for the selected section.

Detailed selection

If a further detailed selection is possible for the selected section, then you will see in this column whether one also searches to this level. If you have chosen for the section ‘Fuels – Delivery’ and a fuel type is entered, then only the deliveries of this fuel type will be looked up. If no specific fuel type is entered, the deliveries of all fuel types will be looked up when executing the query.

Device

Each registration in the electronic journal is linked to a device. A transaction for example is linked to a POS or an OPT. If you have chosen for the section

‘Transaction reg.’ and POS is entered as device, then only the transactions that occurred via this POS will be looked up when executing the query.

No.

Of each type of device, several can be installed. For example, up to 8 cashpoints can be connected. When you have entered POS as device and 3 as number, then only the registrations of POS 3 will be looked up when executing this query.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-331

3.8.1.2.2 Tab ‘General’ (Criterion of a variable query)

On the tab ‘General’ we will find the following information:

Journal query

In this field, it is displayed for which query you have chosen a criterion in the tree on the left of the screen.

Class

The journal registrations of the Fuel POS are divided in a large number of sections.

There are registrations with regard to the reporting, the deliveries, the transactions, etc… Making a query means that you have to choose the desired sections, which you want to look up with the query from the complete journal.

You always choose the desired section from a tree, which will be displayed when you click at the arrow of this field.

3-332 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

In the tree, we will find two levels. The first level is called the journal type, the second level is the journal subtype. If you for example want to look up all deliveries, you have to choose the journal type ‘Fuels’ and then the journal subtype ‘Delivery’.

Each journal type has a journal subtype ‘All’. When choosing ‘All’, you will look up via the query all registrations of the chosen journal type, regardless of the subtype.

Detailed selection type

The content of this field depends on the chosen section. For some sections, you can even search more detailed in the journal than at the level of the section itself. When you have selected for example the section ‘Fuels – Delivery’, then it is possible to search the deliveries of a certain fuel type. In this field, you will see which other details are possible for the chosen section.

Detailed selection

If a further detailed selection is possible for the selected section and you want to execute a query to this detailed level, then you will have to enter the desired value in this field. If you have chosen for the section ‘Fuels – Delivery’, then you can look up the deliveries of one fuel type if necessary. In this field, you will have to choose the desired fuel. If you do not enter anything, then the deliveries of all fuel types will be looked up when executing the query.

Depending on the detailed selection type, a value will be chosen from a dropdown list (for example a fuel type) or you will have to enter a value manually (for example an article number). When you can enter an article number, then you can also scan the barcode of this article.

Device

Each registration in the electronic journal is linked to a device. A transaction for example is linked to a POS or an OPT. If you have chosen for the section

‘Transaction reg.’, then you can enter for example POS as device to look up only the transactions that occurred via this POS when executing the query.

Mind that you do not compose an invalid combination. A query of the section

‘Transaction reg.’ will not give any result if a tank group is entered as device.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-333

The following devices can be selected:

- POS

- OPT

- Pump

- Tank

: A Fuel POS cashpoint (numbered from 1 to 8).

: A Tokheim outdoor terminal (numbered from 1 to 32).

: A dispenser (numbered from 1 to 64).

: A tank (numbered from 1 to 16).

- Tank group : A tank group (numbered from 1 to 16).

- Dispensing : The pump controller in the Fuel POS system.

- System

- BOC

: The Central Information System or CIS.

: A Back Office Computer or a host from where data are sent to the Fuel POS or that collects data from the Fuel POS.

: The Petrol Server (Tokheim) for processing card data. - Pet.server

- Remote eMIS : An external host where the eMIS application can be used.

Device number

Of each type of device, several can be installed. For example, up to 8 cashpoints can be connected. When you have entered POS as device and 3 as number, then only the registrations of POS 3 will be looked up when executing this query.

3-334 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.1.2.3 Adding a new variable query

The following pop-up window will be opened when the function ‘Add’ is activated to create a new variable query:

The following data must be filled in to add a new query:

Journal query

You will give a name to each journal query. It is best to choose a name that matches with the content of the query.

Class

For each journal query, you can program up to 5 different criteria. When adding a new variable query, you have to enter the first criterion. Furthermore, at least one section from the Fuel POS must be chosen. After the query is added, it is included in the tree on the left of the screen. Automatically 5 criteria will be displayed of which only the first criterion is entered. If required, you can also program the other

4 criteria.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-335

3.8.1.2.4 Executing a query

When choosing this button, the selected query can be executed. The following pop-up window will open automatically:

In the pop-up window we will find the following information:

Journal query

In this field the name of the chosen journal query is displayed.

From / To

In these two fields you have to enter the period for which you want to execute the journal query.

After having entered the desired period, you have to indicate whether you want a print preview first or whether you want to print the result of the query immediately. Only then the actual execution of the query begins. During the processing of the query, the following will be displayed:

As soon as the result of the query is available, a pop-up window will be opened in which you will see in advance how many journal registrations met the query for the selected period and of how many A4 pages the result exists:

3-336 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

When you press the button ‘OK’ in the pop-up window, the print preview will be displayed or the result will immediately be printed. This depends on the choice you made at the start of the journal query. Mind that the A4 printer has enough paper to print the result. If you press the button ‘Cancel’, then you will return to the query window.

Especially when you start a journal query over a longer period, the search of the journal registrations can take some time. As long as the message is displayed that the journal query is still being processed, and a result is not yet available, you cannot do anything else in eMIS. Therefore the following message will be displayed after 15 seconds:

This means that the execution of the journal query will continue in the background.

After having confirmed this message, you can continue working in eMIS. Mind that you do not start a new journal query before the result of the previous query is available.

Anyway, the Fuel POS will then ask you to interrupt the execution of the previous journal query.

As soon as the result of the journal query is ready, you can retrieve this in the menu

‘List print jobs’. On the bottom of the screen on the right, you will receive a message as soon as the result is available:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-337

Example of the result of a journal query:

STATION NUMBER:8010 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

JOURNAL OVERVIEW

07-03-2007 11:17

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

From: 07-03-2007 11:10

To : 07-03-2007 11:18

Query: 02 Transaction registr. Complete logging

No. Journal type Journal subtype Selection Device No.

1 Transaction reg. All All

# POS 1 07-03-2007 11:14:48 #

Twix kingsize 1 EUR 0.65

TOTAL EUR 0.65

Cash EUR 0.65

VAT(1=17.50%) EUR 0.10 Nett= EUR 0.55

07-03-2007 11:14 8010 GMAN 0336110001

11-1-7040159

# POS 1 07-03-2007 11:16:18 #

Diesel 1 EUR 111.76

(PUMP 13;110.76 Ltr * EUR 1.009/Ltr)

TOTAL EUR 111.76

Cash EUR 153.89 (GBP 100.00)

Change EUR –42.13

VAT(1=17.50%) EUR 16.65 Nett= EUR 95.11 exchange rate

1 EUR = GBP 0.6498000

07-03-2007 11:16 8010 GMAN 0336110002

11-2-14102541

# POS 1 07-03-2007 11:16:18 #

Fuel bonus awarded: Transaction number 0336110002, date and time 07/03/2007 11:16, operator GMAN

# POS 1 07-03-2007 11:17:04 #

Unleaded 95 1 EUR 41.44

(PUMP 8;33.80 Ltr * EUR 1.226/Ltr)

TOTAL EUR 41.44 drive off EUR 41.44

VAT(1=17.50%) EUR 6.17 Nett= EUR 35.27

Nozzle back date/time: 07/03/2007 11:16

07-03-2007 11:17 8010 GMAN 0336110003

11-3-21150860

3-338 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.1.3 Fiscal journal logging (8,1,3)

With respect to the legal requirements concerning saving the electronic journal, you can print via this menu item a journal that will meet all the statutory regulations.

When this menu item will be chosen, the following pop-up window will open automatically. Here it will be defined for which period and for which device the fiscal journal has to be printed:

In the pop-up window, we will find the following information:

Open (current) day report

The fiscal journal is saved per day report. Select this option if you want to consult the fiscal journal of a day that is not yet closed.

Closed day report

If you want to consult the fiscal journal of an already closed day, then you have to choose this option. The required report will be chosen out of a dropdown list.

Device

The fiscal journal is not only saved per day, but also per device. Select the desired device from a dropdown list.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-339

Example of the fiscal journal:

C:\fiscal\2006\017311.LOG

27-10-2006 15:24

<H>271020061021 8010 11 000001

<F>Unleaded 98 +1.254 +0000048.96 +10.66 +61.40 +0.00

<A>Barclay +3.30 +0000006.00 +0.00 +19.80 +0.00

<A>Vittel 75cl +0.65 +0000001.00 +0.11 +0.65 +0.00

<A>Sprite 1,5L +1.65 +0000001.00 +0.27 +1.55 +0.00

<T>271020061021 8010 11 000001 +83.40 +83.40 00000000 27126708

<H>271020061021 8010 11 000002

<A>Twix kingsize +0.65 +0000001.00 +0.04 +0.65 +0.00

<T>271020061021 8010 11 000002 +0.65 +0.65 27126708 54236867

<H>271020061022 8010 11 000003

<F>Diesel +1.009 +0000110.64 +19.38 +111.64 +0.00

<T>271020061022 8010 11 000003 +111.64 +111.64 54236867 81369225

<H>271020061022 8010 11 000004

<F>Unleaded 95 +1.226 +0000033.60 +7.15 +41.19 +0.00

<T>271020061022 8010 11 000004 +41.19 +41.19 813692225 08487494

<H>271020061309 8010 11 000005

<T>271020061309 8010 11 000005 +0.00 +10.00 08487494 35598526

<Z>271020061425 8010 11 0173 261020061425

<T>271020061425 +236.38 +0.00 +246.88 35598526

3-340 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.1.4 Export (8,1,4)

Please contact Tokheim if you want more information concerning the conditions to be able to use the software option, described in this chapter.

3.8.1.4.1 Export fiscal journal (8,1,4,1)

The fiscal journal, that is saved as part of the legal requirements concerning the saving of an electronic journal, can be exported to an external USB device for mass storage.

This allows you to put the fiscal journal electronically at the disposal of an authorized authority if necessary. On the other hand, it also gives you the possibility to make a back-up of the journal files. Therefore, it is recommended to make back-ups regularly.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-341

The screen will look like this:

The composition of the screen allows you to export the fiscal journal in a very simple way. By means of the screen composition, the course will be explained step by step.

Exporting data is only possible if a USB device for mass storage is linked to the

Fuel POS. You can already connect this before opening this screen. However when you open the screen and a device is not yet connected, you will notice that not all data on the screen are filled in and an error symbol ( ) will be displayed. In this case, you have to connect the device to the Fuel POS in order to be able to continue.

• On the left of the screen, the years for which fiscal journal files are present in

Fuel POS, will be displayed:

For each year, the total size of all fiscal journal files together will be displayed. This is the disk space that these files take in.

3-342 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Each time when you start this exporting procedure, the Fuel POS will automatically check which of the available journal files are already on the USB device for mass storage, since they might have been exported in the past. Each year, in which a difference is stated between what is in the Fuel POS and what is on the USB device, will automatically be selected in the overview and will receive a blue background.

Only the files of the selected years will be copied. At the bottom, you will see the total size of all files that will be copied. This means that this is also the minimal free space that you will need on the USB device:

• On the right of the screen, it will be displayed for which years fiscal journal files are already present at the USB device and in which folder they are saved. When the screen is opened or when the USB device is connected, the Fuel POS will automatically gather this information. Since this can take some time, it is possible that this information is not filled in immediately.

For each year, the total size of all fiscal journal files together will be displayed. This is the disk space that these files will take at the USB device.

At the bottom, you will see the space that is currently free at the USB device for mass storage:

When the free space at the USB device is insufficient, then this will be displayed in red:

In this case, you have to remove the USB device in the correct way. Then you have to connect another USB device of which the capacity is actually sufficient.

• Press this button to start copying the journal files. While the files are being copied, the following window will be displayed:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-343

• If you want to remove the USB device after having copied all journal files, you first have to press this button. The Fuel POS will then make sure that the USB device can be removed in a secure way, without loosing data. Wait for the following message before you disconnect the device:

If you have chosen to remove the USB device, then you really have to remove this. As long as de device remains connected, it can no longer be used.

Finally, you close the window by pressing this button. If you have not pressed the button to remove the USB device in a secure way, the

Fuel POS will ask you whether you want to remove the device or not:

If you select ‘No’, the USB device can stay connected without problems. If afterwards, you do want to disconnect it, you have to open this window again and press the button to remove the device in a secure way.

3-344 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

What if you would disconnect the USB device without doing this in the correct way?

The following error message will be displayed:

You have to confirm this message by pressing the OK button.

The consequences of not removing it correctly depend on the status of the USB device at the moment it was disconnected. Probably there will not be a problem, however it is also possible that the data were not, incomplete or not correctly copied. In the worst case, the USB device for mass storage is seriously damaged and must be formatted again.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-345

How are the data saved at the USB device for mass storage?

• At the USB device, a folder “fiscal” will automatically be created with a sub folder for each year. This results in the following structure:

So each sub folder contains the fiscal journal of the corresponding year.

• The journal files are always created per day report and per device (so per till and per outdoor terminal). The name of the journal file is composed in the following way:

PPPPDD.LOG

Here, the following rules are applicable:

PPPP : This is the serial number of the day report.

DD : This code indicates the device. The codes 11 up and to 18 are used for the cashpoints 1 up and to 8, the codes 51 up and to 82 are used for the outdoor terminals 1 up and to 32.

LOG : These 3 letters are always used to indicate that it concerns a fiscal journal file.

As a consequence, the file 493613.LOG contains the transactions that took place at cashpoint 3 during day report 4936.

The files are text files that can be opened with a standard word processing program.

• The journal files will be grouped and compressed to save disk space (if there are many transactions) and to limit the number of files (when the system in the service station exists of a large number of cashpoints and outdoor terminals). So, you will not directly see the journal files on the USB device as described in the previous point, however you will find one file per day report. For these files, the names will be composed in the following way:

YYYYMMDDPPPP.ZIP

Here, the following rules are applicable:

YYYY : The year in which the day report was closed.

MM : The month in which the day report was closed.

DD : The day in which the day report was closed.

PPPP : The serial number of the day report.

ZIP : These 3 letters indicate that it concerns a compressed file.

Each .ZIP file contains the .LOG files of the concerning day report.

3-346 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.1.4.2 Export journal files (8,1,4,2)

The electronic journal is stored in Fuel POS for a limited period of maximum 2 years. If an obligation has been imposed by the government to keep the electronic journal for a particular (longer) period, then you need to export the electronic journal to an external

USB device for mass storage. You then decide yourself how long you keep the data.

The screen will look like this:

Exporting the journal files is done in the same way as exporting the fiscal journal. This has been described on page 3-341.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-347

How are the data saved at the USB device for mass storage?

• At the USB device, a folder “journal” will automatically be created with a sub folder for each year. This results in the following structure:

So each sub folder contains the electronic journal of the corresponding year.

• The journal files are always created per calendar day. The name of the journal file is composed in the following way:

YYYYMMDD.DBX or YYYYMMDD.DB3

Here, the following rules are applicable:

YYYY

MM

: Year

: Month

DD : Day

DBX or DB3 : File extension

The layout of the databases is not in the scope of this manual.

• The journal files will be compressed to save disk space. So, you will not directly see the journal files on the USB device as described in the previous point, however you will find compressed files. Each .ZIP file contains the corresponding journal file.

3-348 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.1.4.3 Export day reports (8,1,4,3)

The day reports are stored in Fuel POS for a period of 2 years. Via this menu item you can export them to an external USB device for mass storage.

The screen will look like this:

Exporting the day reports is done in the same way as exporting the fiscal journal. This has been described on page 3-341.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-349

How are the data saved at the USB device for mass storage?

• At the USB device, a folder “period” and sub folder "per" will automatically be created with a sub folder for each year. This results in the following structure:

So each sub folder contains the day reports of the corresponding year.

• The name of the day report is composed in the following way:

SSSSDDDD.PRF

Here, the following rules are applicable:

SSSS : This is the station number.

DDDD : This is the serial number of the day report.

PRF : File

The day reports are PDF files that can be opened with a standard PDF viewer.

• The day reports will be compressed to save disk space. So, you will not directly see the files on the USB device as described in the previous point, however you will find compressed files. Each .ZIP file contains the corresponding day report.

3-350 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.2 Software versions (8,2)

Via this menu item, you can retrieve the software versions of the different devices, as well the general information as the information linked to the MID approval of Fuel POS.

3.8.2.1 Tab ‘General’

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-351

3.8.2.2 Tab ‘MID’

3-352 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.3 List print jobs (8,3)

Via this menu item, you can retrieve all print jobs that the Fuel POS has not yet sent to the printer. When the printer is out of service, the print jobs will be put on hold. As soon as the printer is available again, they will automatically be printed. When at the request of a list, for example the result of a journal query, a time-out occurs (the list is not available within 15 seconds), then this one will automatically be put in the list with print jobs as soon as it is ready. Via this menu item, you can afterwards still consult and print this list.

The screen will look like this:

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-353

The print jobs that are ready after a time-out occurred, will not automatically be printed. Choose this button to display the print preview first. Then you can actually print the document.

The print jobs that are on hold, except for those after a time-out, will automatically be executed as soon as the printer is available again. As long as they are on hold, they can however still be removed via this button.

3-354 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3.8.4 IP device configuration (8,4)

3.8.4.1 Communication test (8,4,1)

The Fuel POS cashpoints, the outdoor terminals, the local Back Office Computer,… are all part of an IP network. Via this menu item, you can check from the Fuel POS whether the link with one or several devices in the network is still operational.

The screen will look like this:

This screen will only be used on request of the Tokheim helpdesk.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

3-355

4. A

PPENDIX

4.1 Card codes

A card code is linked to each fuel type and to each shop article. For the fuels, this card code will be defined at the installation and can only be modified by a technician. For the shop articles, you allocate the card codes yourself.

4.1.1 UK & Ireland

SHOP ARTICLES

Card code

FUELS

720

721

722

723

724

Oil (MOC type 1)

Oil (MOC type 2)

Oil (MOC type 3)

Oil (MOC type 4)

Oil (MOC type 5)

725 Oil (MOC type 6)

819 Batteries

924 Exhaust

925 Tyres

1217

1218

1219

1300

Breakdown Services

Repair / Bodywork

Repair / maintenance

Special services

1319 Services

1419 Antifreeze

1519 Paraffin

3019 Sweets

3200 Snacks

3219 Snacks

3300 Groceries

3600 Bakery

3619 Bakery

227 E10

230 E85

240 Pure Plant Oil

325

335

425

430

439

Normal Unleaded

Special Unleaded

Diesel

Diesel (Spec./Truck)

Bio-Diesel

445 Kerosene

450 AdBlue

525 LPG

530

535

540

625

Natural gas

Hydrogen

LNG

2 Stroke

1519 Paraffin

S

Z

S

Z

3319 Groceries S

3400 Frozen Z

3419 Frozen S

Z

S

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-1

5100 Reading

5119 Reading

S

Z

S

6000 Miscellaneous Z

6006 Miscellaneous L

6019 Miscellaneous S

9019 Telecom

9221 Vacuum

9500 Lottery

S

4-2 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.2 Examples of reports

4.2.1 Shift report

In this paragraph, you will find a detailed example of a shift report. In reality the different blocks of the report cannot be examined separately, since the information in one block is explained or elaborated in other blocks. The examples below do not allow for the interrelation between the different blocks of information.

STATION NUMBER:8010 SHIFT NUMBER:0528 POS NUMBER:1 PAGE:001/005

Station number:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

SHIFT REPORT

number: 0528

CLOSURE POS NUMBER: 1

OPERATOR: PJ Paul Jackson

days included, numbers: 0226-0226

From: 02-12-2006 14:01

To : 02-12-2006 22:00

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

The shift report is closed per cash desk and receives also a serial number per cash desk. This example concerns shift report number 528 of POS 1. The cashier with identification PJ (Peter Jackson) opened the shift on 02-12-2006 at 14:01 and closed the shift on 02-12-2006 at 22:00. The complete shift took place during the period of the day report with number 0226. At a day closure, it is not imperative to close the current shift. Theoretically this means that for example a shift could be opened during day 0225 and could only be closed in day 0227. The station data (name, address,…) correspond with the header of the first cash desk.

CONTENTS CASH DRAWER (START OF SHIFT)

CASH

USD 20.00 19.39

GBP 10.00 15.39

EUR 250.00

+ ___________________

284.78

This block is only available if the cashier has to enter the starting contents of the cash drawer when opening the shift. When this block is present, there will also be a block with the real contents of the cash drawer at the end of the shift and a block with possible cash differences.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-3

TOTAL TURNOVER POS

SELF-SERVICE

quantity amount

Unleaded 98 361.68 453.53

Diesel 541.20 546.08

Discount -6.79

Unleaded 95 287.04 351.92

+ ___________________________________

1189.92 1344.74

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 362.92

RETURN OF ARTICLES -23.10

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -3.65

RETURNED DEPOSIT -1.20

+ ___________________

1679.71

In this block the total turnover of the cash desk (POS) is calculated, based on the sales of fuel and the sales of shop articles. Deposits, promotions or discounts on shop articles and returned goods are subtracted from this total.

CREDIT PAYMENTS

CUSTOMER PURCHASES 540.49

DELAYED PAYMENTS 169.91

MAGNETIC STRIPE CARDS

VISA 403.04

MASTERCARD 204.17

PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS

BANKTERMINAL 939.65

PROTON 95.57

MAESTRO 365.61

BANK CARD 478.47

I.O.U 28.57

DRIVE OFF 34.91

LOST PRODUCTS 34.72

+ ___________________

2355.46

This block displays the part of the turnover that has been generated by purchases on credit or has not (yet) been paid for a certain reason.

RECEIPTS

CUSTOMER PAYMENTS 315.00

DELAYED PAYMENTS 53.98

INVOICE PAYMENTS 359.41

ADD CHANGE 10.00

REDEEM GIFT COUPON 100.00

+ ___________________

838.39

This block displays all receipts, which did not result from a direct sale. CUSTOMER PAYMENTS are advances that were paid by credit customers. DELAYED PAYMENTS refer to customers who have settled their delayed payments. INVOICE PAYMENTS are for example the credit customers who have settled their invoice at the end of the month at the cash desk. ADD CHANGE and REDEEM GIFT COUPON are two of the ten types of receipts that can be programmed by the manager.

4-4 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

EXPENSES

SAFE DROPS

CASH

USD 150.00 145.45

GBP 100.00 153.89

EUR 1100.00

Cheque 878.37

PAYMENT SUPPLIER

CASH 274.12

PAYMENT LOTERY

CASH 50.00

WITHDRAW

CASH 121.56

B.N.A. REFUND 1.56

+ ___________________

2724.95

This block displays all expenses made during the shift. SAFE DROPS means that for security reasons the cashier has already removed a part of the money from the cash drawer for example by putting it in the safe. PAYMENT SUPPLIER, PAYMENT LOTERY and WITHDRAW are three of the ten types of expenses that can be programmed by the manager.

TOTAL CONTENTS OF THE CASH DRAWER

CONTENTS CASH DRAWER (START SHIFT) 284.78

TOTAL TURNOVER OF THE POS 3310.16

CREDIT PAYMENTS AT THE CASH DESK(S) -1661.32

RECEIPTS AT THE CASH DESK(S) 893.29

EXPENSES AT THE CASH DESK(S) -2724.95

DIFFERENCE BECAUSE OF PREPAYMENT 1.03

+ ___________________

102.99

This block displays the total contents that have to be in the cash drawer at the end of the shift. The first

5 lines always correspond with the total amount of a previous block.

The DIFFERENCE BECAUSE OF PREPAYMENT means that the customer can pay a filling before he actually fills up his car. When he pays for example for € 10.00 of Diesel and he stops the filling already at an amount of € 9.50, he can ask the change of € 0.50 at the cash desk. However when he does not go back to the cash desk to ask for this change, then the amount of € 9.50 will be booked as turnover, while there is an amount of € 10.00 in the cash drawer. The difference because of prepayment is the sum of all these individual differences.

GENERAL RECEIPTS IN DETAIL

Date Time Receipt Payment mode Type of receipt Total amount

03-11-2006 13:44 0185110055 Cash ADD CHANGE 10.00

Additional information: 20 x 0.50 EUR

03-11-2006 13:45 0185110056 Cash REDEEM GIFT COUPON 50.00

+ ___________________

60.00

Under the heading RECEIPTS, the total amount of each type of receipt registered during the shift is displayed. This section gives all individual receipts.

INVOICE PAYMENTS IN DETAIL

Date Time Receipt Total amount

03-11-2006 13:45 0185110057 125.91

03-11-2006 13:45 0185110058 125.36

03-11-2006 13:46 0185110059 108.14

+ ___________________

359.41

Under the heading RECEIPTS, the total amount of all invoice payments registered during the shift is displayed. This section gives all individual payments of invoices.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-5

SAFE DROPS IN DETAIL

Date Time Receipt Payment mode Foreign currency Total amount

03-11-2006 13:46 0185110060 Cash 1100.00

Additional information: 14BF67

03-11-2006 13:46 0185110061 Cheque 623.06

Additional information: 91RD39

03-11-2006 13:47 0185110062 Cash USD 150.00 145.45

Additional information: 25BW99

03-11-2006 13:47 0185110063 Cash GBP 100.00 153.89

Additional information: BG77FQ

03-11-2006 13:47 0185110064 Cheque 255.31

Additional information: PP88NT

+ ___________________

2277.71

Under the heading EXPENSES, the total amount per payment mode of all safe drops, registered during the shift, is displayed. This section gives all individual safe drops.

EXPENSES IN DETAIL

Date Time Receipt Payment mode Expense type Total amount

03-11-2006 13:48 0185110065 Cash PAYMENT SUPPLIER 274.12

Additional information: DELIVERY OF SWEETS

03-11-2006 13:48 0185110066 Cash WITHDRAW 25.00

03-11-2006 13:48 0185110067 Cash WITHDRAW 36.56

03-11-2006 13:48 0185110068 Cash PAYMENT LOTERY 50.00

03-11-2006 13:49 0185110069 Cash WITHDRAW 60.00

+ ___________________

445.68

Under the heading EXPENSES, the total amount per expense type, registered during the shift, is displayed.

This section gives all individual expenses.

BNA REFUNDS IN DETAIL

Date Time Receipt Payment mode Total amount

03-11-2006 13:49 0185110070 Cash 1.56

+ ___________________

1.56

Under the heading EXPENSES, the total amount of all BNA refunds, registered during the shift, is displayed. This section gives all individual BNA refunds.

4-6 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

DETAIL – THEORETICAL CONTENTS CASH DRAWER

#registrations

CASH 39

USD 130.00 126.05

GBP 90.00 138.50

EUR 609.87

Cheque 545.27 14

Manual voucher 51.16 1

Gift coupon 25.00 1

+ ____________________

1495.85

LITRE COUPONS

Embassy coupon 130.00 L 3

MOC coupon 160.00 L 4

+ ______________

290.00 L

This block displays the detail of the theoretical contents of the cash drawer at the end of the shift of each payment mode. The litre coupons are displayed in litres. This can be higher than the number of litres sold.

In case of a surplus payment with a litre coupon, no change will be given. If the exchange rates have not been modified during the shift and no litre coupons have been accepted, the total amount of this section will equal the total of the block TOTAL CONTENTS CASH DRAWER.

CONTENTS CASH DRAWER (END OF SHIFT)

CASH

USD 120.00 116.36

GBP 90.00 138.50

EUR 612.29

Cheque 547.08

Manual voucher 46.58

Gift coupon 25.00

+ ____________________

1485.81

LITRE COUPONS

Embassy coupon 120.00 L

MOC coupon 160.00 L

+ ______________

280.00 L

This block displays the amounts of the different payment modes, counted and entered by the cashier in the

Fuel POS terminal at the end of the shift.

CASH DRAWER DIFFERENCES

CASH

USD -10.00 -9.69

EUR 2.42

Cheque 1.81

+ ____________________

-5.46

LITRE COUPONS

Embassy coupon -10.00 L

+ ______________

-10.00 L

This block displays the differences between the theoretical values that should be in the cash drawer (block

DETAIL – THEORETICAL CONTENTS CASH DRAWER) and the counted contents (block CONTENTS CASH

DRAWER END OF SHIFT). A negative amount implies that the cashier cannot find the amount, which should theoretically in the cash drawer.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-7

EXCHANGE RATES

1 EUR = EUR 1.0000000

1 EUR = USD 1.0313000

1 EUR = GBP 0.6498000

1 EUR = CHF 1.5952000

1 EUR = DKK 7.4324000

1 EUR = NOK 8.2593795

Indication of the exchange rates used at the time of the shift closure.

PROMOTIONS, DISCOUNTS AND LOYALTY

2006NOV027 : Lunch promo 6.72

2006NOV028 : Third for free 76.80

2006NOV029 : Half price 97.72

Discount 35.62

Loyalty 56.60

+ ___________________

273.46

Loyalty points 1711

This block includes first of all the total amount of the discounts given to the customers by the cashier

(both on shop articles and fuels) and the discounts given automatically by reading the loyalty card.

Secondly, it includes the total amount for each type of promotion used during the sales of shop articles during the period of the shift report.

Finally it includes the loyalty points that are given to the customers.

CORRECTION OF TRANSACTIONS

Number of registrations 2

When a transaction is completely settled, it can still be corrected by the cashier under certain conditions.

This block indicates the number of transactions corrected during the shift.

PUMP TESTS, REGISTERED AT THE CASH DESK

#registrations: 3

quantity amount

Unleaded 98 0.41 0.45

Diesel 100.00 80.10

Unleaded 95 100.00 105.90

+ ___________________________________

200.41 186.45

A pump test can be executed by putting a pump in test mode. However it is also possible to execute a filling via self-service and to register it afterwards as pump test at the cash desk. This block displays the last tests that are registered.

4-8 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

ARTICLE SALES PER NUMBER (PLU-NUMBER)

PLU description report code product id. quantity turnover price VAT %

151 Matchbox Ferrari Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.51

152 Matchbox Porsche Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.50

153 Matchbox Mercedes Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.50

154 Matchbox BMW Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.50

40111261 Snickers Sweets Shop 087 1.00 0.44 0.44 6.00

40235776 L&M Lights Cigarettes Shop 020 10.00 38.00 3.80 0.00

50159246 Mars Sweets Shop 087 1.00 0.44 0.44 6.00

54029170 Barclay Cigarettes Shop 020 6.00 19.80 3.30 0.00

87248814 Marlboro Menthol Cigarettes Shop 020 5.00 16.50 3.30 0.00

3415581103113 Haagen-Dazs Coffee Ice cream Shop 098 -1.00 -6.00 6.00 6.00

5010677552035 Bacardi citrus Bacardi Shop 053 5.00 9.00 1.80 21.00

Deposit 5.00 1.00 0.20

+ ________

Total turnover (deposit included) 89.17

Turnover deposit excluded 88.17

Turnover deposit 1.00

The sales data in this block are per article and per unit price. If one and the same article is sold during the shift at three different unit prices, three lines are printed for this article.

The return of deposits has not been incorporated in this block, unless the article itself has been returned

(deposit included).

SALES PER REPORT CODE (ARTICLES AND FUELS)

report code quantity turnover

0125 1208.52 1336.63

Discount/promotion -20.63

0225 460.29 507.69

0325 466.54 494.05

0425 1104.64 877.80

Car wash 9.00 89.10

Discount/promotion -1.00

Lubricants 25.00 154.75

Discount/promotion -1.98

Snacks 12.00 20.00

Soft drinks 43.00 42.57

Tobacco 62.00 207.70

+ ___________________

3706.68

To each type of fuel and to each shop article, the manager can program a report code to his own liking.

This block displays the sales per report code.

SALES PER PRODUCT ID. (ARTICLES AND FUELS)

product id. quantity turnover

Fuel 3239.99 3195.54

SH028C9 5.00 8.05

Discount/promotion -0.72

SH222B5 184.00 665.17

SH380C1 30.00 29.70

+ ___________________

3897.74

This block is only applied if the station has to assign a group code or a product id to each fuel type or each shop article. The sales per group code or product id will be displayed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-9

RETURNED DEPOSITS PER ARTICLE NUMBER (PLU-NUMBER)

PLU description quantity turnover value

54491069 Sprite 19.00 2.28 0.12

54491472 Coca cola 31.00 3.72 0.12

54492493 Fanta 7.00 0.84 0.12

+ ___________________________________

57.00 6.84

This block gives for each article the returned deposit during the shift.

OPERATOR SURVEILLANCE

Date Time Receipt Type Article/payment quantity price amount Additional info.

25-11-2006 13:33 0009110002 CORR Marlboro 5.00 3.20 16.00

25-11-2006 13:34 0009110003 QUANT Camel 2.00 3.69 7.38

25-11-2006 13:36 0009110004 CORR Diesel 17.32 0.798 13.82 Pump 2

25-11-2006 13:37 0009110005 CORR Cheque 10.00

25-11-2006 13:37 0009110006 VOID Coca cola 1.00 0.99 0.99

25-11-2006 13:37 0009110006 VOID Fanta 1.00 0.99 0.99

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110007 VOID Unleaded 98 22.18 1.106 24.53 Pump 1

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110007 VOID Twix 1.00 1.61 1.61

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110008 VOID Fanta 10.00 0.99 9.90

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110008 VOID Cheque 10.00

25-11-2006 14:24 0009110009 CANCEL VISA 24.53 Cancelled by the

25-11-2006 15:37 0009110013 CORR Return Marlboro 10.00 3.20 -32.00

25-11-2006 16:02 0009110018 CORR Cash 9.70

This block gives an overview of the special actions that have been performed by the cashier during the shift.

CORR refers to the removal of a shop article, a filling or a mode of payment during a transaction.

VOID refers to the removal of a complete transaction before it has been settled by which all selected shop articles, fillings and modes of payment will be erased.

QUANT means that the cashier lowered the quantity of a selected article. For example, when he has selected 10 packages of Camel and modifies this again into 8 packages, this means that 2 packages have been removed.

STOP means that a card transaction has been ended even before it is settled completely.

RETURNED ARTICLES

Number of articles returned with original price : 6.00

Number of articles returned with promotion price: 1.00

Date Time Receipt Cashier Article Prom. price Orig. price Quantity Amount

15-11-2006 11:02 0010110002 PJ Snickers ice 0.55 (0.62) 1.00 0.55

15-11-2006 11:02 0010110010 PJ Bounty ice 0.62 1.00 0.62

15-11-2006 11:04 0010110019 PJ Sportlife 0.64 5.00 3.20

This block lists the shop articles that have been returned during the shift. If an article was returned with the promotion price, then the original price is for your information mentioned between brackets.

4-10 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.2.2 Day report

In this paragraph, you will find a complete example of a day report. In reality, the different blocks of the report cannot be viewed separately because the information in one block is explained or elaborated in other blocks. The examples mentioned-below do not allow for the interrelation between these different blocks of information.

The different information blocks can be divided into seven parts:

• Part 1 of the day report includes all information blocks concerning the cash desk transactions.

• Part 2 of the day report includes all fuel transactions that the cashier did not perform on the cash desk, such as transactions started on the outdoor payment terminal or a bank note acceptor and transactions in manual service.

• Part 3 of the day report includes the data of all sales, whether or not the transactions were registered by the cashier in the Fuel POS. This is the sum of part 1 and part 2 of the day report.

• Part 4 of the day report includes all possible indexes.

• Part 5 of the day report includes all relevant information concerning the fuel stock management.

• Part 6 of the day report provides all credit transactions of local customers.

• Part 7 includes general extra information.

The day report always begins with the following heading:

STATION NUMBER:8010 DAY NUMBER:0185 PAGE:001/021

Station number:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

DAY REPORT

number: 0185

From: 02-12-2006 23:59

To : 03-12-2006 23:57

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

The day in this example began on 02-12-2006 at 23.59 and closed on 03-12-2006 at 23.57. The station data (name, address,…) correspond with the heading of the first cash desk.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-11

4.2.2.1 Part 1 : POS transactions

TOTAL TURNOVER OF ALL POS

SELF-SERVICE

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 843.36 1057.56 1.254

Diesel 1021.44 1030.63 1.009

Discount -6.79

Unleaded 95 672.24 824.16 1.226

405.46 499.53 1.232

+ ___________________________________

2942.50 3405.09

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 460.60

RETURN OF ARTICLES -29.10

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -5.66

RETURNED DEPOSIT -1.40

+ ___________________

3829.53

In this block the total turnover of all terminals is calculated, based on the sales of fuel and the sales of shop articles. At his total, discounts or promotions that were given, shop articles and returned goods are taken into account.

CREDIT PAYMENTS AT THE CASH DESKS

CUSTOMER PURCHASES 540.49

DELAYED PAYMENTS 169.91

MAGNETIC STRIPE CARDS

VISA 403.04

EUROCARD 204.17

PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS

BANKTERMINAL 939.65

PROTON 95.57

MAESTRO 365.61

BANK CARD 478.47

I.O.U. 28.57

DRIVE OFF 34.91

LOST PRODUCTS 34.72

POWER DOWN 39.25

+ ___________________

2394.71

This block displays the part of the total turnover that has been generated by purchases on credit or that has not (yet) been paid for a certain reason. Each total amount in this block will be analysed in another block.

RECEIPTS AT THE CASH DESKS

CUSTOMER PAYMENTS 315.00

DELAYED PAYMENTS 53.98

INVOICE PAYMENTS 359.41

ADD CHANGE 10.00

REDEEM GIFT COUPON 100.00

+ ___________________

838.39

This block displays all receipts that did not result from a direct sale. CUSTOMER PAYMENTS are the advances paid by the credit customers. DELAYED PAYMENTS refer to the customers that have settled their delayed payment. INVOICE PAYMENTS refer to the credit customers that for example have settled their invoice at the cash desk at the end of the month. ADD CHANGE and REDEEM GIFT COUPON are two of the ten types of receipts that can be programmed as desired.

4-12 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

EXPENSES VIA THE POS

SAFE DROPS

CASH

USD 150.00 145.45

GBP 100.00 153.89

EUR 1100.00

Cheque 878.37

PAYMENT SUPPLIER

CASH 274.12

PAYMENT LOTERY

CASH 50.00

WITHDRAW

CASH 121.56

B.N.A. REFUND 1.56

+ ___________________

2724.95

This block displays all expenses made during the day. SAFE DROPS means that the cashier for safety reasons has taken some money from the cash drawer to put it for example in the safe. PAYMENT

SUPPLIER, PAYMENT LOTERY and WITHDRAW are three of the ten types of expenses that can be programmed as desired.

TOTAL AMOUNT IN THE CASH DRAWER(S)

TOTAL TURNOVER OF THE POS 3310.16

CREDIT PAYMENTS AT THE CASH DESK(S) -1661.32

RECEIPTS AT THE CASH DESK(S) 893.29

EXPENSES AT THE CASH DESK(S) -2724.95

DIFFERENCE BECAUSE OF PREPAYMENT 1.03

+ ___________________

102.99

This block displays the computation of the total contents of the cash drawers (of all cash desks together) at the end of the day. The first 4 lines always correspond with the total amount of a previous block.

However, the result does not necessarily equal the contents of the cash drawers. First of all, the initial amount of the cash drawers or the shift changes are not taken into consideration. Secondly, the computation is based on the actual sales (for example it is possible that more has been received as sold with litre coupons).

The DIFFERENCE BECAUSE OF PREPAYMENT comes from the following: The customer can pay a fuel transaction before the actual filling. If the customer pays for example for € 10.00 of Diesel, but he already stops the transaction at € 9.50, then he can go back to the cash desk to ask for the change of € 0.50. In case the customer does not come back for the change money, then there is an amount of € 9.50 booked as turnover, while there is an amount of € 10.00 euro in the cash drawer. The difference because of prepayment is the sum of all these individual differences.

DETAIL OF THE AMOUNT IN THE CASH DRAWER(S)

#registrations

CASH 39

USD 130.00 126.05

GBP 90.00 138.50

EUR 609.87

Cheque 545.27 14

Manual voucher 51.16 1

Gift coupon 25.00 1

+ ____________________

1495.85

LITRE COUPONS

Embassy coupon 130.00 L 3

MOC coupon 160.00 L 4

+ ______________

290.00 L

The detail of the total amount in the cash drawers is used to check the contents of the cash drawers at the end of the day (excluding the amounts of the cash drawers at the beginning of the day). For the litre coupons, the number of litres received are displayed. This can be more than the number of litres that were actually sold. In case of a surplus payment with a litre coupon, no change money will be given. If no litre coupons have been accepted and if the exchange rates have not been modified, the total amount of this block will equal the total of the block TOTAL AMOUNT IN THE CASH DRAWER(S).

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-13

CORRECTION OF TRANSACTIONS

Number of registrations 2

When a transaction is completely settled, the cashier can still correct this under certain conditions. This block indicates the number of transactions corrected during the day.

EXCHANGE RATES

1 EUR = EUR 1.0000000

1 EUR = USD 1.0313000

1 EUR = GBP 0.6498000

1 EUR = CHF 1.5952000

1 EUR = DKK 7.4324000

1 EUR = NOK 8.2593795

Indication of the exchange rates used when the day was closed.

DETAIL CASH MONEY (STATISTICAL)

USD #registrations: 1

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 15.84 19.86 1.254

+ ___________________________________

15.84 19.86

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 4.38

+ _________________

24.24

EUR #registrations: 55

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 420.72 527.57 1.254

Diesel 571.20 576.35 1.009

Discount -6.79

Unleaded 95 316.56 388.11 1.226

+ ___________________________________

1308.48 1485.24

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 454.40

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -5.66

DELAYED PAYMENTS 53.98

CUSTOMER PAYMENTS 315.00

INVOICE PAYMENTS 718.82

ADD CHANGE 20.00

REDEEM GIFT COUPON 150.00

PAYMENT SUPPLIER -548.24

PAYMENT LOTERY -100.00

WITHDRAW -243.12

B.N.A. REFUND -3.12

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW -2200.00

SAFE DROPS -24.30

+ _________________

73.00

This block displays the statistical information about the cash money that has been received and spent during the day at the cash desks. The overview is statistically since at a sale of fuels and shop articles, where the cash money is combined with another payment mode, the Fuel POS will relate automatically the first article to the first entered payment mode.

The overview is displayed per currency. The amounts that are displayed, are always expressed in euro.

The total amount per currency in this block must equal the corresponding total amount in the block DETAIL

TOTAL CONTENTS OF THE CASHDRAWER(S).

4-14 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

DETAIL EXTRA PAYMENT MODES (STATISTICAL)

Cheque #registrations: 1

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 179.28 224.82 1.254

Diesel 160.56 162.01 1.009

Discount -2.07

Unleaded 95 156.24 191.55 1.226

+ ___________________________________

496.08 576.31

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 220.01

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 7.33

+ _________________

803.65

Gift coupon #registrations: 1

quantity amount price

Diesel 111.12 112.12 1.009

+ ___________________________________

111.12 112.12

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 12.88

+ _________________

125.00

This block displays statistical information about the use of the extra payment modes. The overview is statistically since at a sale of fuels and shop articles, where the extra payment mode is combined with another payment mode, the Fuel POS will relate automatically the first article to the first entered payment mode.

The total amount per currency in this block must equal the corresponding total amount in the block DETAIL

TOTAL CONTENTS OF THE CASHDRAWER(S).

DETAIL LITRE COUPONS

Embassy coupon #registrations: 7

quantity amount price (paid)

Unleaded 98 126.88 159.11 1.254 140.00

Diesel 78.08 78.78 1.009 80.00

Unleaded 95 100.00 122.60 1.226 100.00

+ ___________________________________ + ______________

304.96 360.49 320.00

For each type of litre coupon and for each product type, the number of sold litres and the total number of litres paid by the customers are displayed. In case of a surplus payment with a litre coupon, no change money will be given.

DETAIL CUSTOMER PURCHASES AT THE CASH DESKS

#registrations: 21

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 244.32 306.38 1.254

Diesel 275.04 277.52 1.009

Discount -3.14

Unleaded 95 213.12 261.29 1.226

+ ___________________________________

732.48 842.05

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 153.36

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -13.00

+ _________________

982.41

This block sums up the data of the credit transactions registered on the accounts of local customers.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-15

DETAIL DELAYED PAYMENTS (STATISTICAL)

#registrations: 3

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 22.08 27.69 1.254

Diesel 23.21 23.42 1.009

Unleaded 95 45.12 55.32 1.226

+ ___________________________________

90.41 106.43

This block will summarise the data for all the transactions that were booked as delayed payment. The overview is considered statistical for the following reason: if the payment mode ‘cash’ of one transaction

(for example including fuels and shop articles) is combined with a delayed payment, the Fuel POS will relate the first article to the first entered payment mode.

MAGNETIC STRIPE CARDS (INDOOR)

VISA #registrations: 7

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 110.40 138.44 1.254

Diesel 73.44 74.10 1.009

Discount -1.89

Unleaded 95 72.96 89.45 1.226

+ ___________________________________

256.80 300.10

INVOICE PAYMENTS 136.36

+ _________________

436.46

EUROCARD #registrations: 7

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 67.92 85.17 1.254

Diesel 102.00 102.92 1.009

Discount -1.68

Unleaded 95 69.84 85.63 1.226

+ ___________________________________

239.76 272.04

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 21.66

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -0.21

DELAYED PAYMENTS 25.81

+ _________________

319.30

This block gives a detailed overview of the transactions that have been processed with a credit card at the cash desk, and this by using the magstripe of the card. In case there are subtypes for a certain card in this overview, then a block will be added with the same lay-out containing the data of the subtypes:

SUBTYPES MAGNETIC STRIPE CARDS (INDOOR)

When chip cards are accepted via the Fuel POS, then these transactions are included in the following

2 blocks that again have the same lay-out:

CHIP CARDS (INDOOR)

SUBTYPES CHIP CARDS (INDOOR)

PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS

BANKTERMINAL #registrations: 244

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 125.03 161.48 1.291

Diesel 1933.43 2032.10 1.051

152.11 157.44 1.035

Unleaded 95 763.22 970.80 1.272

+ ___________________________________

2973.89 3321.82

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 2489.69

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 387.00

+ _________________

6198.51

An external payment terminal can be linked to the Fuel POS. This block displays the sales per terminal type that are linked to the cash desks at the station. The overview concerns all cash desks together and all different card types that are accepted via these terminals.

4-16 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS – SUMMARY PER POS

POS 1/BANKTERMINAL #registrations: 176

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 47.59 61.44 1.291

Diesel 1401.92 1473.42 1.051

152.11 157.44 1.035

Unleaded 95 605.15 769.74 1.272

+ ___________________________________

2206.77 2462.04

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 1798.84

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 297.00

+ _________________

4557.88

POS 2/BANKTERMINAL #registrations: 68

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 77.49 100.04 1.291

Diesel 531.56 558.68 1.051

Unleaded 95 158.07 201.06 1.272

+ ___________________________________

767.12 859.78

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 690.85

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 90.00

+ _________________

1640.63

An external payment terminal is always linked to an individual cash desk. This block sums up the sales per terminal type and per cash desk.

SUBTYPES PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS (POS)

PROTON (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 20

amount

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 103.79

+ _________________

103.79

BANK CARD (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 144

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 62.33 80.47 1.291

Diesel 541.27 568.87 1.051

10.63 11.00 1.035

Unleaded 95 341.78 434.74 1.272

+ ___________________________________

956.01 1095.08

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 1413.25

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 387.00

+ _________________

2895.33

This block displays the sales per type of payment terminal linked in the station and per card type that is accepted via the terminal. The overview concerns all cash desks together.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-17

SUBTYPES PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS – SUMMARY PER POS

POS 1/PROTON (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 15

amount

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 85.19

+ _________________

85.19

POS 1 /BANK CARD (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 100

quantity amount price

Diesel 289.94 304.73 1.051

10.63 11.00 1.035

Unleaded 95 223.02 283.68 1.272

+ ___________________________________

523.59 599.41

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 1087.50

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 297.00

+ _________________

1983.91

POS 2/PROTON (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 5

amount

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 18.60

+ _________________

18.60

POS 2 /BANK CARD (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 44

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 62.33 80.47 1.291

Diesel 251.33 264.14 1.051

Unleaded 95 118.76 151.06 1.272

+ ___________________________________

432.42 495.67

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 325.75

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 90.00

+ _________________

911.42

An external payment terminal is always linked to an individual cash desk. This block sums up the sales per type of payment terminal, per cash desk and per card type that is accepted via the terminal.

DETAIL I.O.U.

#registrations: 4

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 113.04 141.75 1.254

Diesel 47.76 48.19 1.009

Unleaded 95 28.80 35.31 1.226

+ ___________________________________

189.60 225.25

When a customer cannot pay for whatever reason, the transaction can be settled as a delayed payment or as an IOU. In case of a delayed payment, it is assumed that the customer comes back to the station afterwards to settle the payment. In case of an IOU, it is assumed that the customer for example transfers the amount. This block gives detailed information concerning all transactions registered as IOU’s.

DETAIL DRIVE OFF

#registrations: 3

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 51.36 64.41 1.254

Diesel 35.28 35.60 1.009

Unleaded 95 61.44 75.33 1.226

+ ___________________________________

148.08 175.34

This block gives all detailed information concerning the transactions that were registered as drive offs during the day.

4-18 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

DETAIL LOST PRODUCTS AT THE CASH DESKS

#registrations: 2

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 0.48 0.60 1.254

Diesel 0.24 0.24 1.009

+ ___________________________________

0.72 0.84

This block gives all detailed information concerning the transactions that were registered at the cash desk as lost products during the day.

DETAIL POWER DOWN

#registrations: 5

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 127.20 159.51 1.254

Diesel 125.04 126.17 1.009

Unleaded 95 62.64 76.80 1.226

+ ___________________________________

314.88 362.48

In case of a power-down, the running fillings can still be settled within 5 minutes. The fillings that are not yet settled, are automatically considered as settled by the Fuel POS and are displayed in this block since the mode of payment is unknown.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-19

4.2.2.2 Part 2 : Outdoor payment terminal transactions + manual service

PAYMENT TERMINAL (OPT) – SALES PER TERMINAL

#registrations amount

Terminal 1 58 2505.09

Terminal 2 37 1567.73

Up to 32 outdoor terminals can be linked. This block gives an overview of the sales per terminal.

TOTAL TURNOVER OF ALL OPT

#registrations: 280

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 334.07 411.24 1.231

Diesel 11265.20 10375.22 0.921

Unleaded 95 1859.96 2124.13 1.142

+ ___________________________________

13459.23 12910.59

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 29.70

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -1.00

+ _________________

12939.29

All card transactions performed on an outdoor terminal, are displayed in this block. The sales of articles refer to the car wash programs that can be sold via the outdoor terminal. However, this is only possible if the car wash is linked to the Fuel POS.

PAYMENT TERMINAL (OPT) – CUSTOMER PURCHASES

#registrations: 255

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 75.93 93.47 1.231

Diesel 1813.74 1675.07 0.921

Unleaded 95 441.18 503.84 1.142

+ ___________________________________

2335.85 2272.38

This block displays the data of the credit transactions, which have been registered on the local customers’ accounts. This block is only available in case client cards are used. Since this is the only way to start a purchase on credit via an outdoor terminal.

4-20 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

MAGNETIC STRIPE CARDS (OUTDOOR)

DKV-CARD #registrations: 21

quantity amount price

Diesel 915.71 843.35 0.921

Unleaded 95 177.33 202.52 1.142

+ ___________________________________

1093.04 1045.87

UTA #registrations: 144

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 258.14 317.77 1.231

Diesel 6835.65 6295.63 0.921

Unleaded 95 416.37 475.52 1.142

+ ___________________________________

7510.16 7088.92

This block gives a detailed overview of the transactions processed with a credit card via the outdoor terminal by using the magstripe of the card. When there are subtypes defined for a certain card in this overview, then another block will be added with the same lay-out containing the data per subtype:

SUBTYPES MAGNETIC STRIPE CARDS (OUTDOOR)

When also chip cards are accepted via the outdoor terminal, then the transactions with these cards are included in the following 2 blocks that again will have the same lay-out:

CHIP CARDS (OUTDOOR)

SUBTYPES CHIP CARDS (OUTDOOR)

MANUAL SERVICE

#registrations: 52

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 460.08 576.91 1.254

Diesel 651.12 656.99 1.009

Unleaded 95 398.40 488.44 1.226

+ ___________________________________

1509.60 1722.34

All fillings that were not processed at a cash desk due to manual service, are automatically displayed in this block. The Fuel POS assumes that they were paid, but does not know the payment mode. However, these fillings will usually be paid in cash.

DETAIL LOST PRODUCTS (OUTDOOR)

#registrations: 1

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 2.52 3.16 1.254

+ ___________________________________

2.52 3.16

When a pump is released via the bank note reader, then this pump is released for the amount that the customer has entered. When there is a problem with the valve in the pump, which has to make sure that the pump stops at the correct amount, it might be possible that the pump passes this amount. In this case the selected nozzle will automatically be put out of service to avoid that this happens again. The surplus litres that the customer received, will not be paid in this situation and will be reported separately in this block.

BNA EXCHANGE RATES

1 EUR = GBP 0.6498000

If a bank note acceptor accepts foreign currencies, then this block gives an indication of the exchange rates used when the day report was closed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-21

BNA

#registrations: 5

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 29.95 37.56 1.254

Diesel 99.10 100.00 1.009

Unleaded 95 16.31 20.00 1.226

+ ___________________________________

145.36 157.56

BNA inserted money 160.00

EUR 160.00

All transactions via the bank note acceptor are displayed in this block. Next to the total amount of the sales, the total amount inserted by the customers in the bank note acceptor is also displayed.

OPENING OF THE BANK NOTE ACCEPTOR(S) (BNA)

Sequence number : 531

Terminal : 1

Start date and time : 03-11-2006 08:00

End date and time : 04-11-2006 14:00

Total amount inserted: EUR 425.00

EUR 425.00

Sequence number : 532

Terminal : 2

Start date and time : 03-11-2006 08:02

End date and time : 04-11-2006 14:07

Total amount inserted: EUR 25.00

EUR 25.00

The bank note acceptors can be emptied several times a day. Each time the BNA is opened, a report will be created that indicates the total amount that should be theoretically in the BNA and this for each currency. All these reports are included in this block.

BANK NOTE ACCEPTOR(S) CONTENTS AT DAY CLOSURE

Terminal : 1

Total amount inserted: EUR 190.00

EUR 190.00

Terminal : 2

Total amount inserted: EUR 260.00

EUR 190.00

This block indicates how much money is still in each bank note acceptor on the moment the day report is closed. This amount will be zero if no more money has been inserted since the last time the BNA has been emptied.

4-22 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.2.2.3 Part 3 : Total

UNIT PRICES

Unleaded 98 1.254 1.274

Diesel 1.009

Unleaded 95 1.226 1.246

This block displays all unit prices that have been used for the different fuels, which were sold during the day.

TOTAL FUEL SALES (POS + OUTDOOR PAYMENT TERMINALS + MANUAL SERVICE)

TOTAL FUEL SALES PER FUEL TYPE

#registrations: 54

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 552.48 703.86 1.274

219.12 274.77 1.254

Diesel 1777.92 1793.94 1.009

Discount -11.17

L.P.G. 237.96 95.42 0.401

Unleaded 95 772.08 962.02 1.246

+ ___________________________________

3559.56 3818.84

TOTAL FUEL SALES PER NOZZLE

PUMP NUMBER: 1 quantity amount

L.P.G. 87.22 34.97

PUMP NUMBER: 2 quantity amount

LPG 150.74 60.45

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity amount

Unleaded 98 438.48 555.38

Diesel 941.28 949.76

Unleaded 95 438.24 546.05

PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity amount

Unleaded 98 333.12 423.25

Diesel 836.64 844.18

Unleaded 95 333.84 415.97

This block displays all fillings of that day, both per product and per nozzle. The pump tests are not included in this overview but will be reported separately.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-23

PUMP TESTS (NEUTRALISATIONS)

PUMP TESTS (NEUTRALISATIONS) PER FUEL TYPE

#registrations: 6

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 100.00 125.40 1.254

Diesel 100.00 100.90 1.009

Unleaded 95 100.00 124.60 1.246

+ ___________________________________

300.00 350.90

PUMP TESTS (NEUTRALISATIONS) PER NOZZLE

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity amount

Unleaded 98 50.00 62.70

Diesel 50.00 50.45

Unleaded 95 50.00 62.30

PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity amount

Unleaded 98 50.00 62.70

Diesel 50.00 50.45

Unleaded 95 50.00 62.30

This block displays the pump tests that took place during the period of the day report.

PROMOTIONS, DISCOUNTS AND LOYALTY

2006NOV027 : Lunch promo 6.72

2006NOV028 : Third for free 76.80

2006NOV029 : Half price 97.72

Discount 35.62

Loyalty 56.60

+ ___________________

273.46

Loyalty points 1711

First of all, this block includes the total amount of the discounts given to the customers by the cashiers

(both on shop articles and fuels) and the discounts given automatically by reading in a loyalty card.

Secondly, it includes the total amount for each type of promotion used during the sales of shop articles during the period of the day report.

Finally, it includes the number of loyalty points that were given to the customers.

FUEL SALES PER FUEL TYPE

No. description report code product id. quantity turnover price VAT %

2 Unleaded 98 unleaded Fuel 552.48L 703.86 1.274 21.00

2 Unleaded 98 unleaded Fuel 219.12L 274.77 1.254 21.00

3 Diesel diesel Fuel 1777.92L 1793.94 1.009 21.00

Discount -11.17

4 L.P.G. gaz Fuel 237.96L 95.42 0.401 21.00

5 Unleaded 95 unleaded Fuel 772.08L 962.02 1.246 21.00

+ __________________________________

3559.56 3818.84

This block displays the total sales of fuel per product and per unit price.

4-24 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

ARTICLE SALES PER NUMBER (PLU-NUMBER)

PLU description report code product id. quantity turnover price VAT %

151 Matchbox Ferrari Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.51

152 Matchbox Porsche Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.50

153 Matchbox Mercedes Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.50

154 Matchbox BMW Toys Shop 101 1.00 3.00 3.00 21.00

Discount/promotion -0.50

40111261 Snickers Sweets Shop 087 1.00 0.44 0.44 6.00

40235776 L&M Lights Cigarettes Shop 020 10.00 38.00 3.80 0.00

50159246 Mars Sweets Shop 087 1.00 0.44 0.44 6.00

54029170 Barclay Cigarettes Shop 020 6.00 19.80 3.30 0.00

87248814 Marlboro Menthol Cigarettes Shop 020 5.00 16.50 3.30 0.00

3415581103113 Haagen-Dazs Coffee Ice cream Shop 098 -1.00 -6.00 6.00 6.00

5010677552035 Bacardi citrus Bacardi Shop 053 5.00 9.00 1.80 21.00

Deposit 5.00 1.00 0.20

+ ________

Total turnover (deposit included) 89.17

Turnover deposit excluded 88.17

Turnover deposit 1.00

The sales data in this block are per article and per unit price. If one and the same article is sold during the day at three different unit prices, three separate lines are printed for this article.

The return of deposits in not incorporated in this block, unless the article itself has been returned (deposit included).

SALES PER REPORT CODE (ARTICLES AND FUELS)

report code quantity turnover

0125 1208.52 1336.63

Discount/promotion -20.63

0225 460.29 507.69

0325 466.54 494.05

0425 1104.64 877.80

Car wash 9.00 89.10

Discount/promotion -1.00

Lubricants 25.00 154.75

Discount/promotion -1.98

Snacks 12.00 20.00

Soft drinks 43.00 42.57

Tobacco 62.00 207.70

+ ___________________

3706.68

The manager can program a report code to each fuel type and to each shop article as desired. This block displays the sales for each report code.

SALES PER PRODUCTID. (ARTICLES AND FUELS)

product id. quantity turnover

Fuel 3239.99 3195.54

SH028C9 5.00 8.05

Discount/promotion -0.72

SH222B5 184.00 665.17

SH380C1 30.00 29.70

+ ___________________

3897.74

This block is only applied if the station has to assign a group code or a product id to each shop article and each fuel type. The sales per group code or per product id will be displayed.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-25

RETURNED DEPOSITS PER ARTICLE NUMBER (PLU-NUMBER)

PLU description quantity turnover value

54491069 Sprite 19.00 2.28 0.12

54491472 Coca cola 31.00 3.72 0.12

54492493 Fanta 7.00 0.84 0.12

+ ___________________________________

57.00 6.84

This block gives for each article the returned deposit during the period of the day report.

CUSTOMERS PURCHASES TOTAL (INDOOR + OUTDOOR)

#registrations: 21

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 244.32 306.38 1.254

Diesel 275.04 277.52 1.009

Discount -3.14

Unleaded 95 213.12 261.29 1.226

+ ___________________________________

732.48 842.05

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 153.36

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -13.00

+ _________________

982.41

In this block, the data of all credit transactions registered on the accounts of local customers are summed up. This concerns the transactions that are processed at the cash desk as well as the transactions that were started at the outdoor terminal by means of a client card.

ALL CARDS (INDOOR + OUTDOOR)

VISA #registrations: 7

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 110.40 138.44 1.254

Diesel 73.44 74.10 1.009

Discount -1.89

Unleaded 95 72.96 89.45 1.226

+ ___________________________________

256.80 300.10

INVOICE PAYMENTS 136.36

+ _________________

436.46

EUROCARD #registrations: 7

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 67.92 85.17 1.254

Diesel 102.00 102.92 1.009

Discount -1.68

Unleaded 95 69.84 85.63 1.226

+ ___________________________________

239.76 272.04

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 21.66

DISCOUNT/PROMOTION -0.21

DELAYED PAYMENTS 25.81

+ _________________

319.30

This block gives a detailed overview of the transactions that were handled with a credit card, both via the cash desk and the outdoor terminal, as well as the magstripe cards and the chip cards. When for certain cards in this overview subtypes are defined, then a block will also be added with the same lay-out containing the data per subtype:

ALL CARD SUBTYPES (INDOOR + OUTDOOR)

4-26 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

ALL PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS (INDOOR + OUTDOOR)

BANKTERMINAL #registrations: 244

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 125.03 161.48 1.291

Diesel 1933.43 2032.10 1.051

152.11 157.44 1.035

Unleaded 95 763.22 970.80 1.272

+ ___________________________________

2973.89 3321.82

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 2489.69

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 387.00

+ _________________

6198.51

This block displays the total sales of each type of linked payment terminal in the station. This concerns the transactions that are processed at the cash desk as well as the transactions that were started at the outdoor terminal regardless of the type of card that was accepted.

ALL SUBTYPES PAYMENT TERMINAL CARDS (INDOOR + OUTDOOR)

PROTON (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 20

amount

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 103.79

+ _________________

103.79

BANK CARD (BANKTERMINAL) #registrations: 144

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 62.33 80.47 1.291

Diesel 541.27 568.87 1.051

10.63 11.00 1.035

Unleaded 95 341.78 434.74 1.272

+ ___________________________________

956.01 1095.08

TOTAL SALES OF ARTICLES 1413.25

OVERPAYMENT / WITHDRAW 387.00

+ _________________

2895.33

This block displays the total sales of each type of linked payment terminal in the station and of each card type that was accepted. This concerns the transactions that are processed at the cash desk as well as the transactions via the outdoor terminal.

DETAIL LOST PRODUCTS (INDOOR + OUTDOOR)

#registrations: 2

quantity amount price

Unleaded 98 1.04 1.30 1.254

Diesel 3.11 3.14 1.009

+ ___________________________________

4.15 4.44

Part 1 of the day report includes the transactions that the cashier registered as lost products.

Part 2 of the day report includes the transactions that the Fuel POS automatically registered as lost product. When for example a pump is released via the bank note acceptor, it will be released for the amount that the customer has inserted. When there is a problem with the valve in the pump, which has to make sure that the pump stops at the correct amount, it might be possible that the pump exceeds this amount. In this case the selected nozzle will automatically be put out of service to avoid that this happens again. The surplus litres that the customer received, will not be paid in this situation and will be booked automatically as lost product.

This block sums up the lost products from part 1 and part 2.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-27

VAT REPORT ARTICLES AND FUELS

VAT REPORTING – ARTICLE SALES

VAT % VAT excluded VAT amount VAT included

0.00 5093.05 0.00 5093.05

6.00 6315.61 377.87 6693.48

21.00 1146.95 241.15 1388.10

+ _____________________________________________________________

12555.61 619.02 13174.63

VAT REPORTING – FUEL SALES

VAT % VAT excluded VAT amount VAT included

21.00 27048.48 5680.33 32728.81

+ _____________________________________________________________

27043.48 5680.33 32728.81

For each used VAT percentage, for both shop articles and fuels, the VAT amount and the total amounts inclusive and exclusive of VAT are displayed. The different amounts are obtained by counting the amounts of the individual transactions. However, minor rounding off differences may occur. The overview includes all sales, regardless of the payment mode.

OPERATOR SURVEILLANCE

PJ

Date Time Receipt Type Article/payment quantity price amount Additional info.

25-11-2006 13:33 0009110002 CORR Marlboro 5.00 3.20 16.00

25-11-2006 13:34 0009110003 QUANT Camel 2.00 3.69 7.38

25-11-2006 13:36 0009110004 CORR Diesel 17.32 0.798 13.82 Pump 2

25-11-2006 13:37 0009110005 CORR Cheque 10.00

25-11-2006 13:37 0009110006 VOID Coca cola 1.00 0.99 0.99

AK

Date Time Receipt Type Article/payment quantity price amount Additional info.

25-11-2006 13:37 0009110006 VOID Fanta 1.00 0.99 0.99

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110007 VOID Unleaded 98 22.18 1.106 24.53 Pump 1

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110007 VOID Sandwich 1.00 1.61 1.61

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110008 VOID Fanta 10.00 0.99 9.90

25-11-2006 13:38 0009110008 VOID Cheque 10.00

25-11-2006 14:24 0009110009 CANCEL VISA 24.53 cancelled by the opera

25-11-2006 15:37 0009110013 CORR Return Marlboro 10.00 3.20 -32.00

25-11-2006 16:02 0009110018 CORR Cash 9.70

This block gives an overview of a few special handlings that have been performed by the cashiers during the day. It is split up per cashier.

CORR refers to the removal of a shop article, a filling or a payment mode when processing a transaction.

VOID refers to the removal of a complete transaction even before it was settled, including the removal of the selected shop articles, fillings and payment modes.

QUANT means that the cashier lowered the amount of a selected article. For example, he had chosen

10 packs of Camel and changed this again into 8. This means that 2 packs were removed.

STOP means that a card transaction is ended even before it was completely settled.

RETURNED ARTICLES

Number of articles returned with original price : 6.00

Number of articles returned with promotion price: 1.00

Date Time Receipt Cashier Article Prom. price Orig. price Quantity Amount

15-11-2006 11:02 0010110002 PJ Snickers ice 0.55 (0.62) 1.00 0.55

15-11-2006 11:02 0010110010 PJ Bounty ice 0.62 1.00 0.62

15-11-2006 11:04 0010110019 PJ Sportlife 0.64 5.00 3.20

This block lists the shop articles that have been returned during the day. If an article was returned with the promotion price, then the original price is for your information displayed between brackets.

4-28 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

FUEL BONUS

Number of issued receipts: 147

A fuel bonus is a separate receipt, which mentions a special action for the customer and that is printed automatically when the customer has taken a minimum number of litres of a certain product. For example, the customer receives a free cup of coffee at the purchase of at least 40 litres of Diesel. This block displays the number of fuel bonus receipts issued.

STATISTICS ON-LINE CREDIT CARDS

TRAVELCARD (OASE)

Number of on-line authorised transactions 95

Number of off-line authorised transactions 2

Total amount of on-line authorised transactions 13669.33

Total amount of off-line authorised transactions 87.14

Number of transactions with manual input of the card number 0

Number of EMV transactions with magnetic stripe fall back 0

This block will sum up a few statistical data for each the credit cards that are accepted on-line.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-29

4.2.2.4 Part 4 : Indexes

START NEUTRALISATION INDEX (PUMP TESTS)

quantity amount

Unleaded 98 200.13 250.96

Diesel 231.21 233.29

L.P.G. 2.27 0.91

Unleaded 95 200.13 245.36

+ ___________________________________

633.74 730.52

The neutralisation index displays all pump tests for each product that have taken place since the installation of the Fuel POS. An index continues to be counted after a closure and cannot be modified neither by the station, nor by a technician.

This block provides the values at the beginning of the day.

NEUTRALISATION INDEX (PUMP TESTS)

quantity amount

Unleaded 98 300.13 376.36

Diesel 331.21 334.19

L.P.G. 2.27 0.91

Unleaded 95 300.13 369.96

+ ___________________________________

933.74 1081.42

The neutralisation index displays all pump tests for each product that have taken place since the installation of the Fuel POS An index continues to be counted after a closure and cannot be modified neither by the station, nor by a technician.

This block provides the values on the moment of the day closure.

START GLOBAL FUEL INDEX (FUEL SALES)

quantity amount

Unleaded 98 1306635.63 1587243.74

Diesel 25579103.65 22903344.88

Unleaded 95 4826377.34 5558872.01

The global index displays all fillings for each product that have taken place since the installation of the

Fuel POS. An index continues to be counted after a closure and cannot be modified neither by the station, nor by a technician.

This block provides the values at the beginning of the day.

GLOBAL INDEX (FUEL SALES)

quantity amount

Unleaded 98 1308053.07 1588981.52

Diesel 25623320.98 22942925.51

Unleaded 95 4832521.34 5565827.01

The global index displays all fillings for each product that have taken place since the installation of the

Fuel POS. An index continues to be counted after a closure and cannot be modified neither by the station, nor by a technician.

This block provides the values on the moment of the day closure.

4-30 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

START PUMP INDEX (SALES+TESTS; PER NOZZLE)

PUMP NUMBER: 1 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 2 quantity

Unleaded 98 137380.10 Unleaded 98 237945.86

Diesel 2623398.72 Diesel 4876161.96

Unleaded 95 586738.01 Unleaded 95 783245.84

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity

Unleaded 98 173146.06 Unleaded 98 300003.58

Diesel 6252794.77 Diesel 11829105.89

Nozzle 2 (2695024.70) Nozzle 2 (6017980.63)

Nozzle 4 (3557770.07) Nozzle 4 (5811125.26)

Unleaded 95 715028.70 Unleaded 95 1004670.96

The pump index display all fillings for each nozzle (both fuel sales and pump tests) that have taken place since the installation of the Fuel POS. When two nozzles give the same product, then the total of this product is also displayed. An index continues to be counted after a closure and cannot be modified neither by the station, nor by a technician.

This block provides the values at the beginning of the day.

PUMP INDEX (SALES+TESTS; PER NOZZLE)

PUMP NUMBER: 1 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 2 quantity

Unleaded 98 137563.48 Unleaded 98 238296.97

Diesel 2628715.86 Diesel 4884345.68

Unleaded 95 588005.18 Unleaded 95 784263.67

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity

Unleaded 98 173326.57 Unleaded 98 300405.72

Diesel 6264606.63 Diesel 11848010.50

Nozzle 2 (2700199.85) Nozzle 2 (6027368.91)

Nozzle 4 (3564406.78) Nozzle 4 (5820641.59)

Unleaded 95 716007.65 Unleaded 95 1005626.61

The pump index display all fillings for each nozzle (both fuel sales and pump tests) that have taken place since the installation of the Fuel POS. When two nozzles give the same product, then the total of this product is also displayed. An index continues to be counted after a closure and cannot be modified neither by the station, nor by a technician.

This block provides the values on the moment of the day closure.

START TOTALISERS (SALES+TESTS, PER NOZZLE)

PUMP NUMBER: 1 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 2 quantity

Unleaded 98 137380.10 Unleaded 98 237945.86

Diesel 2623398.72 Diesel 4876161.96

Unleaded 95 586738.01 Unleaded 95 783245.84

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity

Unleaded 98 173146.06 Unleaded 98 300003.58

Diesel 6252794.77 Diesel 11829105.89

Nozzle 2 (2695024.70) Nozzle 2 (6017980.63)

Nozzle 4 (3557770.07) Nozzle 4 (5811125.26)

Unleaded 95 715028.70 Unleaded 95 1004670.96

At the installation of the Fuel POS, the value of the mechanical index of each nozzle can be inserted in the

Fuel POS. This Fuel POS meter is named a ‘totaliser’. All fillings are counted up the corresponding totaliser, which causes that they should always have the same value as the mechanical index.

When two nozzles give the same product, then the total of this product is also displayed. A totaliser can only be changed when for example a new pump is installed, a damaged mechanical index is replaced,…

This change can be entered by both the station and the technician.

This block provides the values at the beginning of the day.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-31

TOTALISERS (SALES+TESTS; PER NOZZLE)

PUMP NUMBER: 1 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 2 quantity

Unleaded 98 137563.48 Unleaded 98 238296.97

Diesel 2628715.86 Diesel 4884345.68

Unleaded 95 588005.18 Unleaded 95 784263.67

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity

Unleaded 98 173326.57 Unleaded 98 300405.72

Diesel 6264606.63 Diesel 11848010.50

Nozzle 2 (2700199.85) Nozzle 2 (6027368.91)

Nozzle 4 (3564406.78) Nozzle 4 (5820641.59)

Unleaded 95 716007.65 Unleaded 95 1005626.61

At the installation of the Fuel POS, the value of the mechanical index of each nozzle can be inserted in the

Fuel POS. This Fuel POS meter is named a ‘totaliser’. All fillings are counted up the corresponding totaliser, which causes that they should always have the same value as the mechanical index.

When two nozzles give the same product, then the total of this product is also displayed. A totaliser can only be changed when for example a new pump is installed, a damaged mechanical index is replaced,…

This change can be entered by both the station and the technician.

This block provides the values on the moment of the day closure.

CHECKS AND/OR CHANGES OF TOTALISERS

No.: 30 PUMP NUMBER: 1 Nozzle: 3 Unleaded 95 09-11-2006 09:50

CHANGE TOTALISER PUMP : 2500.00 L

TOTALISER FUEL POS: 13025153.16 L

DIFFERENCE : -13022653.16 L

INFO: Installation new pump

USER: Service

NAME: ZP

No: 29 PUMP NUMBER: 4 Nozzle: 1 Unleaded 98 09-11-2006 09:50

CHECK TOTALISER PUMP : 7543081.00 L

TOTALISER FUEL POS: 7543081.12 L

DIFFRENCE : -0.12 L

INFO: Weekly check

USER: General manager

NAME: AVDW

A totaliser can only be changed when for example a new pump is installed, a damaged mechanical index is replaced,… This change can be entered by both the station and the technician. Furthermore, it is also possible to check the value of the totaliser at any moment by entering the current value of the mechanical index.

All checks and modifications performed during the day will be displayed in this block.

START CALCULATOR TOTES (PER NOZZLE)

PUMP NUMBER: 1 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 2 quantity

L.P.G. Not available L.P.G. Not available

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity

Unleaded 98 173146.06 Unleaded 98 300003.58

Diesel Diesel

Nozzle 2 2695024.70 Nozzle 2 6017980.63

Nozzle 4 3557770.07 Nozzle 4 5811125.26

Unleaded 95 715028.70 Unleaded 95 1004670.96

In the calculator of the pump, very often an index for each nozzle is kept. For some types of calculators that are linked to the Fuel POS via IFSF, the Fuel POS collects this counter.

This block displays the values at the start of the day report. The calculators that do not support this type of counters or that are not linked to the Fuel POS via IFSF, the message ‘Not available’ will appear.

4-32 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

CALCULATOR TOTES (PER NOZZLE)

PUMP NUMBER: 1 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 2 quantity

L.P.G. Not available L.P.G. Not available

PUMP NUMBER: 3 quantity PUMP NUMBER: 4 quantity

Unleaded 98 173326.57 Unleaded 98 300405.72

Diesel Diesel

Nozzle 2 2700199.85 Nozzle 2 6027368.91

Nozzle 4 3564406.78 Nozzle 4 5820641.59

Unleaded 95 716007.65 Unleaded 95 1005626.61

In the counter of the pump, an index is very often kept for each nozzle. For some types of calculator that are linked to the Fuel POS via IFSF, this counter is collected by the Fuel POS.

This block displays the values at the day report closure. For the calculators that do not support this type of counter, ‘Not available’ will be mentioned.

CHECK OF THE FUEL THROUGHPUT BY MEANS OF THE CALCULATOR TOTES

PUMP NUMBER: 1

Nozzle Fuel Calculator quantity Fuel POS quantity Difference

1 Diesel 186.95 186.95 0.00

PUMP NUMBER: 2

Nozzle Fuel Calculator quantity Fuel POS quantity Difference

1 Diesel 332.73 332.73 0.00

In the calculator of the pump, very often an index is kept for each nozzle. For some types of calculator that are linked to the Fuel POS via IFSF, this counter is collected by the Fuel POS. When the counter is available at the start of the day report and at the closure, then it is known how much the calculator has counted during the day. This is mentioned in the column ‘Calculator Quantity’. The column ‘Fuel POS

Quantity’ indicates how much the Fuel POS has actually counted during the day. This means that the difference between both values always has to be 0.00 litres.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-33

4.2.2.5 Part 5 : Tank data

TANK GROUP DATA

Tank group real stock theoretical stock stock difference temp. comp. diff.

1 Unleaded 98 21246.26 21249.00 -2.74 0.00

2 Diesel 31389.98 31390.00 -0.02 1.92

3 L.P.G. 2951.00 2951.00 0.33 0.00

4 Unleaded 95 14918.97 14928.00 -9.03 1.71

5 Unleaded 98 23199.89 23198.00 1.89 0.00

The theoretical stock is saved per tank group in the Fuel POS. This block displays the data of each tank group at the moment of the day closure.

The real stock and the stock difference are only shown in case an automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS system.

The fuels that are sold during the day, will only rarely have an exact temperature of 15.0 °C. The sales of fuel is always booked at ambient temperature. For the modification of the theoretical stock, each filling is converted to 15.0 °C. The column ‘Temp. comp. Diff.’ Gives for each tank group the total difference between the sold volumes at ambient temperature and the sold volumes compensated to 15.0 °C.

REAL TANK DATA (PER TANK)

TANK NUMBER: 1

Unleaded 98 21246.26 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 21246.26 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

PROBE STATUS 0

TANK STATUS OK

TANK NUMBER: 2

Diesel 25471.83 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE: 15.3 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 25465.64 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

PROBE STATUS 0

TANK STATUS Delivery in progress

TANK NUMBER: 3

L.P.G. 2951.33 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE: 15.1 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 2951.33 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

PROBE STATUS 0

TANK STATUS OK

TANK NUMBER: 4

Unleaded 95 14924.61 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE: 15.3 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 14918.97 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

WATER: 100.00 mm PROBE STATUS 0

TANK STATUS OK

TANK NUMBER: 5

Unleaded 98 23199.89 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 23199.89 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

PROBE STATUS 0

TANK STATUS OK

TANK NUMBER: 6

Diesel 5925.30 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE: 15.2 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 5924.34 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

PROBE STATUS 0

TANK STATUS OK

This block gives the status of the different tanks at the moment of the day closure. This block is only present in case the automatic tank level gauge has been connected to the Fuel POS.

4-34 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

DELIVERIES AND/OR STOCK DECREASES

No.: 100 TANK GROUP: 2 Diesel

GAUGED : 09-11-2006 12:24

VOLUME : 12253.05 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE : 15.3 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 12250.07 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

START TEMPERATURE : 15.2 °C STOP TEMPERATURE : 15.2 °C

DELIVERY SPEED : 210.86 Litres/minute

MAXIMUM FUEL HEIGHT REACHED IN TANK 2: 1425.00 mm

MAXIMUM FUEL HEIGHT REACHED IN TANK 6: 980.00 mm

ENTERED: 09-11-2006 12:24

VOLUME : 12250.00 L

INFO : Delivery note 2006/455.366

USER : General Manager

NAME : AVDW

No: 101 TANK GROUP: 3 L.P.G.

GAUGED : 09-11-2006 12:24

VOLUME : 3051.68 L PRODUCT TEMPERATURE : 15.1 °C

COMPENSATED VOLUME: 3051.68 L COMPENSATION TEMPERATURE: 15.0 °C

START TEMPERATURE : 15.1 °C STOP TEMPERATURE : 15.1 °C

DELIVERY SPEED : 367.16 Litres/minute

MAXIMUM FUEL HEIGHT REACHED IN TANK 3: 780.00 mm

ENTERED: 09-11-2006 12:24

VOLUME : 3050.00 L

INFO : Delivery note 2006/455.365

USER : General Manager

NAME : AVDW

This block gives an overview of all fuel deliveries that were registered during the period of the day report.

TANK LEAKS

No.: 16 TANK NUMBER 2 Diesel

START DATE: 09-11-2006 10:15 END DATE: 09-11-2006 11:33

HEIGHT: 1061.10 mm HEIGHT: 1056.70 mm

VOLUME: 17719.71 L VOLUME: 17629.58 L

TEMP. : 15.1 °C TEMP. : 15.1 °C

All tank leaks that are detected during the day, will be displayed in this block.

MANUAL GAUGINGS

No.: 19 TANK GROUP: 4 Unleaded 95 09-11-2006 13:24

THEORETICAL STOCK: 14928.00 L

GAUGED VOLUME : 14920.00 L

DIFFRENCE : 8.00 L

INFO : Weekly check

USER : General Manager

NAME : AVDW

No.: 20 TANK GROUP: 1 Unleaded 98 09-11-2006 13:24

THEORETICAL STOCK: 21249.00 L

GAUGED VOLUME : 21275.00 L

DIFFERENCE : -26.00 L

INFO : Weekly check

USER : General Manager

NAME : AVDW

In order to check the theoretical stock, the result of a manual gauging can be entered in Fuel POS. This block contains all stock controls that were executed during that day.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-35

STOCK ADJUSTMENT

No.: 66 TANK GROUP: 1 Unleaded 98 09-11-2006 13:41

THEORETICAL STOCK: 16245.00 L

NEW STOCK : 21246.00 L

DIFFERENCE : -5001.00 L

INFO : Correction after wrong input delivery

USER : General Manager

NAME : AVDW

The theoretical stock can be exceeded if this would deviate at a certain moment too much from the real stock. Each stock modification is displayed in this block.

4-36 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.2.2.6 Part 6 : Local customers

PURCHASES ON CREDIT

Date Time Receipt Customer number Name Total amount

09-11-2006 14:31 0212110025 11002 Bank Of Belgium 75.99

09-11-2006 14:37 0212110033 11000 Belgium Chocolates 53.64

09-11-2006 14:45 0212110039 11004 Interbrew 71.52

09-11-2006 14:58 0212110058 335 Paul Jackson & sons 25.33

+ ____________________

226.48

This block displays all purchases on credit by local customers. Keep this part of the day report as backup!

CUSTOMER PAYMENTS

Date Time Receipt Customer number Name Total amount

09-11-2006 15:06 0212110110 11006 Flower shop 250.00

+ ____________________

250.00

This block gives all accelerated payments of local customers. Keep this part of the day report as backup!

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-37

4.2.2.7 Part 7 : Additional information

FISCAL JOURNAL CHECKSUMS AT THE END OF THIS DAY

Device Sequence number checksum

POS 1 11 045687 72718885

POS 2 12 009634 04100494

PCU 1 21 002547 21449920

OPT 51 031574 17348931

Every transaction is registered in the fiscal journal. A reference to the fiscal journal is printed on the transaction receipt. First of all this is a transaction number, secondly a checksum which is calculated for each transaction. The day report shows for every connected device the fiscal information of the last transaction registered before the day closure.

RESULT QUERY

LOST TRANSACTION

# OPT 1 09-11-2006 15:32:29 #

Unleaded 98 3 EUR 23.14

(PUMP 3; 18.45 Ltr * EUR 1.254/Ltr)

VAT(3=21.00%) EUR 4.02 Nett=EUR 19.12

Start date and time: 09-11-2006 15:31:54

51-1-9124696

Lost product pump 3 Unleaded 98 EUR 3.14, preset (EUR 20.00) overshot on nozzle 1

IQ OPT/BNA-01 Transaction number 0213510001, inserted: EUR 20.00

Very exceptional, a transaction can be lost during the day. The following two examples illustrate this:

Example 1: When a pump is released via the bank note acceptor, this pump will be released for the amount that the customer has inserted. If there is a problem with the valve in the pump, which causes that the pump stops at the correct amount, it might be possible that the pump exceeds this amount. In this case the selected nozzle will automatically be put out of service to avoid that this occurs again. In this situation, the surplus litres will not be paid by the customer and are therefore lost for the station.

Example 2: When the customer inserts a credit card in the outdoor terminal and the on-line host gives permission for the filling, then afterwards the transaction is again sent to the host to be booked on the account of the customer. The host must accept this transaction. However when the host refuses the transaction, the filling will finally not be paid and the product will be lost for the station.

Each time a product is lost, this will be registered in the electronic journal. At the day closure, the electronic journal will automatically be checked for the corresponding period and the lost products that are retrieved in this way, will be given in this block. In normal circumstances, part 7 of the day report will never be printed.

4-38 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.2.3 Cash sheet

STATION NUMBER:8010 NUMBER CASH SHEET:0112 PAGE:001/002

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

CASH SHEET

number: 0112

From: 13-09-2006 00:01

To : 14-09-2006 00:01

(Prices and amounts are in EUR)

CASH MONEY

Theoretical Real Difference Difference EUR

EUR 1498.41 1562.20 63.79 63.79

USD 320.00 320.00 0.00 0.00

GBP 223.44 220.00 -3.44 -5.29

EXTRA PAYMENT MODES

Theoretical Real Difference EUR

Cheque 842.72 816.37 -26.35

Gift coupon 50.00 50.00 0.00

DKV manual voucher

Theoretical litres Real liters Difference litres Fuel price Difference EUR

Diesel 180.44 180.44 0.00 0.974 0.00

Diesel 352.80 352.80 0.00 1.009 0.00

Unleaded 95 30.25 0.00 -30.25 1.226 -37.09

Theoretical Real Difference EUR

NON-FUEL 10.84 10.84 0.00

LITRE COUPONS

Embassy coupon

Theoretical litres Real litres Difference litres Fuel price Difference EUR

Unleaded 98 30.00 30.00 0.00 1.254 0.00

Diesel 20.00 20.00 0.00 0.974 0.00

Diesel 48.72 50.00 1.28 1.009 1.29

Unleaded 95 30.00 30.00 0.00 1.226 0.00

PUMP TESTS

Theoretical litres Real litres Difference litres Fuel price Difference EUR

Unleaded 98 200.00 200.00 0.00 1.254 0.00

Diesel 200.00 200.00 0.00 1.009 0.00

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-39

STATION NUMBER:8010 NUMBER CASH SHEET:0112 PAGE:002/002

Unleaded 95 200.00 200.00 0.00 1.226 0.00

OTHER PAYMENT MODES

Theoretical Real Difference EUR

DRIVE OFF 50.00 50.00 0.00

LOST PRODUCTS 1.05 1.05 0.00

I.O.U. 46.19 46.19 0.00

DELAYED PAYMENTS 53.79 53.79 0.00

CUSTOMER PAYMENTS 1126.74 1126.74 0.00

TOTAL

Difference EUR

-3.65

4-40 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.2.4 Accounting day

This mechanism is used to close the normal day report at the moment that the shifts of all cash desks are closed. At the closure of an accounting day, a normal day report will be closed and printed. Furthermore an overview is printed of all shifts and day reports that were closed since the previous accounting day closure.

STATION NUMBER:8010 ACCOUNTING DAY:2002 PAGE:001/001

STATION NUMBER:8010

Station Tokheim

Unit 1 Baker Road

West Pitkerro Industrial Estate

DD5 3RT Dundee

Scotland

ACCOUNTING DAY

number: 2002

From: 08-11-2006 05:59

To : 09-11-2006 05:58

Relating reports : From - To

Day report(s) : 2130 - 2130

Shift report(s) (POS 1): 2737 - 2739

Shift report(s) (POS 2): 5885 - 5886

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-41

4.2.5 Month report

The month report has the same lay-out as the day report. Therefore, we refer to the description of a day report for a description of the month report.

However not all parts that are available in the day report are also available in the month report. The month report contains for example only the first 4 parts of the day report.

Since the month report is always closed together with a day report, it is avoided that a lot of information will be printed twice. For example the tank data at the end of the month are the same as the tank data at the day report that is closed at the month closure. For example on the month report, you will not find an overview of all fuel deliveries of the past month. After all you can find these at the day reports that were made daily.

4-42 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.3 Division of the journal

All transactions, notifications and error messages are registered in the electronic journal, which will be saved for 2 years. By means of a query mechanism, you can always consult this electronic journal.

In order to execute the queries efficiently, the journal registrations of the Fuel POS are divided into a large number of subtypes. There are registrations related to reporting, deliveries, cash transactions, etc… If you want to execute a query, you have to select the required subtypes from the entire journal.

To divide the journal into different parts, two levels are used. The first level is called the journal type, the second level is called the journal sub type. This chapter describes the journal types and the journal subtypes that give interesting information to manage your service station. Not all sections will be discussed, since a large number of sections are intended for the Tokheim service department.

4.3.1 Journal type ‘System condition’

This journal type contains a number of loggings related to the condition of the

Fuel POS system. This journal type is divided into the following journal subtypes:

• Login

The general manager, the station manager, as well as the cashiers and the

Tokheim technicians, use the function ‘Login’ to gain access to the functions they are allowed to use in the eMIS or programming screen.

The use of the login in the programming screen is each time registered in the

Fuel POS journal.

Also the login on an outdoor terminal is put in this subtype. The user can put an outdoor terminal in a mode ‘Maintenance’ to e.g. change the paper role, and the

Tokheim technicians can put an outdoor terminal in a mode ‘Service’.

Each time this happens, it will be registered in the Fuel POS journal.

• Logout

’Logout’ is used to go back to the lowest access level in the programming screen.

The use of logout in the programming screen is each time registered in the

Fuel POS journal.

Also a logout on an outdoor terminal (put it back in the mode “Normal”). Is put in this subtype.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-43

Each modification of the pump modes in the programming screen and each switch between day and night mode of the pumps, will be place in this journal subtype. drawer

Each time the cash drawer has reached its maximum limit, a message will appear for the cashier. This message will also be registered in the Fuel POS journal. When the contents of the cash drawer is made lower than the programmed limit (by closing the shift or by means of a safe drop), a registration will also appear in the journal.

In the operator screen ,the cashier can open the cash drawer without starting a transaction. Nevertheless, if the manager did not give him the authorisation to do this, then another user who has the correct user rights can do this for him, if necessary. In the journal you can find by whom and at what time the cash drawer has been opened this way.

4-44 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.3.2 Journal type ‘Local customer’

All journal registrations relating to the local customers are grouped in this journal type.

This journal type is divided into the following journal subtypes:

• Purchase on credit

This item refers to all purchases on credit made by local customers who have a personal account.

The purchases on credit of one specific customer can be looked up by entering the customer number. payment

This item refers to all interim payments made by credit customers.

The interim payments of one specific customer can be looked up by entering the customer number.

• Purchase without credit

This item refers to all purchases of local customers who do not receive credit and for whom the invoice still has to be made.

The purchases of one specific customer can be looked up by entering the customer number.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-45

4.3.3 Journal type ‘Special payment mode’

Apart from the regular transaction registration, there is an extra registration in the

Fuel POS journal for a number of special payment modes. These extra registrations are to be found in the journal type ‘Special payment mode’. This journal type is divided into the following journal subtypes: payment

This subtype refers to both the registration and the settlement of a delayed payment. A query can be executed for the registration of one particular delayed payment by entering the sequence number of the delayed payment. payment

This subtype refers to the invoices paid by the customers at the cash desk. A query can be executed for a registration of one particular payment by entering the invoice number. payment

This subtype refers to the following payment modes that can be used by the cashier: I.O.U., Pump test, Drive off and Lost product.

4-46 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.3.4 Journal type ‘Operator surveillance’

The journal type ‘Operator surveillance’ refers to a number of specific manipulations of the cashier. This journal type is divided into the following journal subtypes: signature

For a number of payment modes, the Fuel POS will always print two receipts. The first receipt has to be signed by the customer (and the customer’s signature has to be checked by the cashier). The second one is a copy for the customer.

This procedure is used for credit cards accepted on the basis of a signature, for purchases on credit on the basis of a signature and for delayed payments.

The journal subtype ‘VOID signature’ contains all journal registrations generated at the moment the cashier answers that the signature is not ok. article

The cashier can delete one article from a sales transaction. This journal registration can be found in this subtype.

A query can be executed for the correction of one specific article by entering the article number. fuel

The cashier can delete a filling from a sales transaction. This journal registration can be found in this subtype.

A query can be executed for the correction of one specific fuel type.

• CORR payment mode

After the cashier has entered a payment mode (provide that the total payable amount has not been exceeded yet), he can delete the payment mode again. This journal registration can be found in this subtype.

A query can be executed for the correction of one specific payment mode.

• VOID

The cashier can delete or cancel an entire sales transaction, including the articles.

This journal registration can be found in this subtype.

A query can be executed for the cancellation of one specific article by entering the article number. fuel

The cashier can delete or cancel an entire sales transaction, including the fillings.

This journal registration can be found in this subtype.

A query can be executed for the cancellation of one particular fuel type.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-47

• VOID payment mode

After the cashier has entered a payment mode (provided that the total payable amount has not been exceeded yet), he can delete or cancel the entire sales transaction. If a payment mode has actually been selected, the journal registration can be found in this subtype.

A query can be executed for the cancellation of one particular payment mode. lowered

During a sale, the cashier can lower the already entered quantity of a shop article again. This will be registered each time in the journal.

A query can be executed for lowering the quantity of one specific article by entering the article number. goods

A sold article can be returned. This will be registered each time in the journal.

A query can be executed for the return of one specific article by entering the article number.

• Manual input card number

For some cards, the cashier can manually enter the card number if e.g. the magnetic stripe is damaged. This will always be registered in the journal.

PIN

For some cards, the cashier can process a transaction based on the signature instead of letting the customer enter his PIN code. This will each time be registered in the journal.

• Magn. stripe fall back

For some chip cards, the cashier can start the transaction by reading the magnetic stripe of the card and not the chip. This will always be registered in the journal. messages

You can program that the cash point displays a message for the cashier each time he adds a certain shop article to a transaction. The corresponding journal registration is part of this subtype.

The journal registration shows whether or not the cashier has refused to actually add the article to the transaction.

4-48 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.3.5 Journal type ‘Transaction registrations’

Each transaction will be registered in the Fuel POS journal. All these journal registrations are grouped in the journal type ‘Transaction reg.’. This journal type is divided into the following journal subtypes:

This journal subtype contains all journal registrations resulting from the sale of a shop article.

The sales of one specific shop article can be looked up by entering the article number.

• Fuels

This journal subtype contains all transactions containing fuels.

The transaction in which occur one specific fuel type, can be looked up.

• Pumps

This journal subtype contains all transactions containing fuels.

The transactions of one specific pump can be looked up by entering the pump number.

• Prepayment

This journal subtype contains all prepaid fuel transactions, whether those transactions already have been finished or not. If the transaction has already been finished, then the real dispensed number of litres are filled in. If the transaction has been started, but has not been finished yet, then the paid litres are filled in.

The transaction in which occur one specific fuel type can be looked up. difference

This journal subtype contains all finished prepaid fuel transactions, for which the dispensed amount does not correspond with the paid amount.

The transactions of one specific pump can be looked up by entering the pump number. finished

This journal subtype contains all finalised prepaid fuel transactions.

The transactions of one specific pump can be looked up by entering the pump number.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-49

This journal subtype contains all journal registrations resulting from a return of a shop article.

The returns of one specific shop article can be looked up by entering the article number.

• Payment

This journal subtype can be used to look up all transactions that contain a specific payment mode.

• Discount/promotion

This journal subtype contains all transactions in which occur shop articles and/or fuels with a discount or promotion.

• Deposit

This journal subtype contains all journal registrations resulting from the sale of shop articles with deposit.

The sales of one specific shop article with deposit can be looked up by entering the article number. deposit

This journal type contains all journal registrations in which occur a return of deposit.

The deposit returns of one specific shop article can be looked up by entering the article number. transaction

Journal registrations resulting from a correction made to an already finalised transaction. The corrections of transactions are not included in the normal transactions that are looked up with the previous journal subtypes.

• Corr. trans. with article

Journal registrations resulting from a correction made to a finalised sales transaction of a shop article.

The corrections of transactions of one specific shop article can be looked up by entering the article number.

• Corr. trans. with return

Journal registrations resulting from a correction made to a finalised return of a shop article.

The corrections of transactions including the return of a specific shop article, can be looked up by entering the article number.

4-50 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

• Corr. trans. with pump

Journal registrations resulting from a correction made to a finalised transactions including at least one filling.

The corrections of transactions of one specific pump, can be looked up by entering the pump number.

• Corr. trans. with payment

This journal subtype can be used to look up the corrections to already finalised transactions with a specific payment mode.

• Corr. trans. with %/promo

This journal subtype contains all corrections of finalised transactions including shop articles and/or fuels with a discount or promotion.

• Corr. trans. with deposit

Journal registrations resulting from the correction made to an already finalised sale of a shop article with deposit.

The corrections of transactions of one specific shop article with deposit, can be looked up by entering the article number.

• Corr. trans. return deposit

Journal registrations resulting from a correction made to a finalised return of deposit.

The corrections of transactions including the return of deposit of one specific shop article can be looked up by entering the article number.

• Corr. trans. with fuel

Journal registrations resulting from a correction made to a finalised transaction including at least one filling.

The corrections of transactions containing one specific fuel type, can be looked up.

• Receipts

Journal registrations resulting from a receipt.

The receipts that were registered by means of one specific payment mode, can be looked up.

• Expenses

Journal registrations resulting from expenses.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-51

Journal registrations resulting from invoice payments at the cash desk.

The invoice payments that were registered by means of one specific payment mode, can be looked up. payment

This subtype contains a number of transaction that are processed without intervention of the cashier. This concerns the following types of transactions:

-

-

- transactions.

- Transactions that are automatically settled at a power-down.

- Zero transactions via an outdoor terminal.

The transactions containing one specific fuel type, can be looked up. drops

Journal registrations resulting from safe drops.

The safe drop from one particular payment mode can be looked up.

• BNA

Journal registrations resulting from a refund originating from a BNA transaction.

This subtype contains all transactions of the bank note acceptor. credit

This subtype contains all transactions of the bank note acceptor for which the customer did not reach the inserted amount. logging

This subtype contains all transactions that were also registered in the fiscal journal. invoice

Each simplified invoice handed out to the customer, will be registered in the journal.

The simplified invoices of one specific local customer can be looked up by entering the customer number.

4-52 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.3.6 Journal type ‘Card registrations’

The journal type ‘card registrations’ contains all journal registrations for transactions settled with a card. This journal type is divided into the following journal subtypes: card

This subtype contains all loggings, created when a credit card that is recognised by the Fuel POS system, is used to settle a transaction (cash desk) or to start a transaction (OPT).

The loggings for one specific type of credit card can be looked up.

This subtype contains all loggins, created when a customer card that is recognised by the Fuel POS system, is used to settle a transaction (cash desk) or to start a transaction (OPT).

The loggins related to the customer cards of one particular customer can be looked up by entering the customer number. authorisation

This subtype concerns all transactions registered on-line.

• Card via connected terminal

This subtype concerns all journal registrations created at the moment that a transaction is settled via a payment terminal linked to the Fuel POS.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-53

4.3.7 Journal type ‘Reporting’

All journal registrations related to the reporting of the Fuel POS system are grouped in this journal type. This journal type is divided into the following journal subtypes: report

If shift report is selected, the number of one specific shift report can be entered.

This concerns the registrations related to:

- the opening of a shift;

- the closing of a shift;

- the reprinting of a shift report;

- the retrieval of a subtotal of a shift.

If day report is selected, the number of one specific day report can be entered.

This concerns the registrations related to:

- the day closure;

- the reprinting of a day report;

- the entering of additional information. report

If month report is selected, the number of one specific month report can be entered.

This concerns the registrations related to:

- the month closure;

- the reprinting of a month report. sheet

When cash sheet is selected, the number of one specific cash sheet can be entered.

This concerns the registrations related to:

- the cash sheet closure;

- the reprinting of a cash sheet. day

If an accounting day is selected, the number of one specific accounting day can be entered.

This concerns the registrations related to:

- accounting day closure;

- the reprinting of an accounting day.

4-54 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

If a BNA report is selected, the number of one specific report can be entered.

All reports that are created when a bank note acceptor is emptied, can be retrieved by means of this subtype.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-55

4.3.8 Journal type ‘Articles’

This journal type contains a number of registrations related to the shop article management. This journal type is divided into the following subtypes:

• Activation future price

From a Back Office Computer a unit price can be programmed for a shop article, if the Fuel POS has been enabled for this, that will be activated on a specific moment of time (= a future price).

When a future price is activated, a registration will be made in the Fuel POS journal.

The activation of a future price for one particular shop article can be looked up by entering the article number. modification

This subtype contains all modifications made to the theoretical stock of a shop article via the programming screen.

The stock modifications for one particular article can be looked up by entering the article number. modifications

If the Back Office Computer has transmitted an article modification to the

Fuel POS, which contains information that the Fuel POS cannot accept, a registration in the journal will appear, indicating for which article the modification has not been possible.

These failed modifications can be looked up for one particular article by entering the article number.

• Alarm

This subtype contains the registrations made when the minimum stock of a shop article has been reached.

4-56 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.3.9 Journal type ‘Fuels’

This journal type contains a number of registrations related to the fuel management.

This journal type is divided into the following subtypes: programming

The programming of new fuel prices, apart from the activation, is logged in the journal.

New fuel prices can be programmed via the programming screen of the Fuel POS or via a Back Office Computer. Each time, it will be indicated how the prices have been entered. activation

The activation of new fuel prices is logged in the journal. The activation is done when the day is closed, immediately after the programming or on a previously specified moment (date and time). gauging

This subtype refers to the manual gaugings that are performed and entered in the

Fuel POS system.

• Delivery

This subtype refers to all deliveries, added manually or automatically detected by the Fuel POS system.

• Delivery note printed; OPT

If an OPT has been connected to the Fuel POS system, the driver who makes the delivery can print a delivery note on the OPT receipt printer by means of a card which has been specially designed for this. This delivery note contains the data, provided by the automatic tank level gauge, of the detected delivery. The data printed on the delivery note, are also registered in the Fuel POS journal. Via the journal subtype ‘Delivery note’ these data can be looked up again. Each delivery has a reference number. A delivery not concerning one particular delivery can be looked up by entering the reference number. decrease

The journal subtype ‘Stock decrease’ refers to all registrations made due to the fact that the real stock of a tank group decreases faster than the theoretical stock.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-57

• Alarm

This subtype refers to the alarm which go off when one of the following four programmed limits has been reached:

- a maximum water level;

a maximum fuel level;

- a minimum real stock per per tank;

- a minimum theoretical stock per tank group.

This subtype also contains the registrations made when the Fuel POS system detects a leak. check

This subtype contains the results of the manual started tank check. modifications

In case a modification was sent from the Back Office Computer to the Fuel POS, which contained information that was not accepted by the Fuel POS, then a registration in the journal will occur. adjustment

This subtype is related to each adjustment of the theoretical stock.

4-58 © 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4.3.10 Journal type ‘Totalisers’

The journal type ‘Totalisers’ contains all journal registrations related to the modifications made to the electronic totalisers and tot the checks of the mechanical indexes entered in the Fuel POS system. We will find the following journal subtypes:

The changes of one particular pump can be looked up by entering the pump number. totaliser

The checks of one particular pump can be looked up by entering the pump number.

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

4-59

5. I

NDEX

- A -

Acceptance card, 3-260

Access, 3-1

Access code, 3-2, 3-10

Accounting day, 3-80, 4-54

Activation future price, 4-56

Add, 2-5

Additional info, 3-259

Additional information, 3-71, 3-261, 3-

310

Address, 3-254

Alarm, 3-132, 3-187, 3-193, 4-56, 4-

58

Allowed fuels, 3-262

Alternative prices, 3-94

Amount bar code, 3-203

Article buttons, 3-218

Article list, 3-215

Article message, 3-206

Articles, 4-56

Articles (shop), 4-49

Automatic, 3-156

Automatic closure, 3-83

Automatic payment, 4-52

- B -

Back Office Computer, 3-323

Balance, 3-257

Bar code, 3-211

Base price, 3-89, 3-93

Blending, 3-104

Blocked, 3-260

BNA, 3-186, 3-196

BNA credit, 4-52

BNA money, 3-197

BNA refund, 4-52

BNA report, 4-55

BNA transaction, 4-52

BOC, 3-334

Buffers, 3-169

- C -

Cancel / Refresh, 2-3

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

Car wash, 3-206, 3-262

Card code, 3-100, 3-205, 4-1

Card registrations, 4-53

Card via connected terminal, 4-53

Cash, 3-238

Cash drawer, 3-288, 4-44

Cash drawer limit, 3-294

Cash sheet, 3-56, 4-54

Change totaliser, 3-172, 4-59

Check report, 3-56

Check totaliser, 3-172, 4-59

City, 3-254

Class, 3-331, 3-332

Clean day end, 3-51

Clear, 3-133

Close, 2-4

Codes, 3-99

Colour, 3-111, 3-220, 3-223

Colours, 3-100

Communication, 3-318

Communication test, 3-355

Compensated ullage, 3-141

Configuration, 3-41, 3-50, 3-77

CORR article, 4-47

CORR fuel, 4-47

CORR payment mode, 4-47

Corr. trans. return deposit, 4-51

Corr. trans. with %/promo, 4-51

Corr. trans. with article, 4-50

Corr. trans. with deposit, 4-51

Corr. trans. with fuel, 4-51

Corr. trans. with payment, 4-51

Corr. trans. with pump, 4-51

Corr. trans. with return, 4-50

Correction transaction, 4-50

Credit card, 4-53

Credit cards, 3-243

Criteria alternative prices, 3-107

Criterion, 3-115

Critical water level, 3-129, 3-145

CSC, 3-187

Current stock, 3-209

Customer card, 4-53

Customer display, 3-289

Customer list, 3-266

Customer number, 3-253

5-1

Customer payment, 4-45

CVGA, 3-186

- D -

Date and time, 3-317

Day, 3-45, 4-11

Day limit, 3-261

Day report, 4-54

Day total, 3-261

Day/night, 3-168

Delayed payment, 4-46

Delayed payments, 3-281

Delete, 2-7

Deleted, 2-13

Deliveries, 3-152

Delivery, 4-57

Delivery note printed, 4-57

Deposit, 4-50

Deposit value, 3-203

Detail registrations, 3-330

Detailed selection, 3-331, 3-333

Detailed selection type, 3-331, 3-333

Device, 3-326, 3-331, 3-333

Difference, 3-124

Discount, 3-103, 3-207, 3-255

Discount on price sign, 3-90, 3-94

Discount/promotion, 4-50

Dispensing, 3-334

Display journal, 3-325

DIT, 3-186

Drive off, 4-46

Driver ID, 3-261

- E -

Edit, 2-5 eMIS, 1-2

Envelope, 2-14

Error, 2-13

E-voucher, 3-206

Exchange rates, 3-239

Exchange rates BNA, 3-198

Execute, 3-133

Execute a query, 3-336

Expenses, 4-51

Export day reports, 3-349

Export fiscal journal, 3-341

Export journal files, 3-347

Extra payment modes, 3-275

5-2

- F -

Favorites, 2-8, 3-26

File, 2-3

Find, 2-7

Fiscal journal logging, 3-339

Fiscal logging, 4-52

Fixed queries, 3-328

Flow rate, 3-131

Fraud alarm, 2-14, 3-195

Fuel bonus, 3-103, 3-118

Fuel level, 3-141

Fuel number, 3-93

Fuel volume, 3-140

Fuels, 3-86, 4-49, 4-57

- G -

Gauge status, 3-142

Gauged (real) stock, 3-126

Group code, 3-100, 3-205

Group/Prod id, 3-100, 3-205

- H -

Height, 3-129, 3-145

High flow rate level, 3-131

High water level, 3-129, 3-145

- I -

I.O.U., 4-46

Icon, 3-235

Identification, 3-259

IFSF, 3-131

Info receipt, 3-189

Invoice payment, 4-46, 4-52

IP, 3-355 iQ, 3-186

- J -

Journal, 4-43

Journal query, 3-330

Journal type, 4-43

- L -

Language, 3-1

Language selection, 3-312

Layout, 3-43, 3-53, 3-78

Leak, 3-146

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

License, 3-31

Link, 2-5

Linked article, 3-203

List, 2-11

List print jobs, 3-353

Litre coupons, 3-278

Local card settings, 3-248

Local customer, 4-45

Local customers, 3-250

Login, 3-1, 4-43

Logo, 3-190

Logout, 3-5, 4-43

Lost product, 4-46

Low flow rate level, 3-131

Loyalty, 3-102, 3-255

Loyalty %, 3-207

Loyalty reference, 3-103

- M -

Mail, 3-318

Maintenance, 3-187, 3-192

Manual, 3-157, 3-159

Manual gauging, 4-57

Max. discount %, 3-103, 3-207

Max. price change allowed %, 3-94

Maximum credit, 3-258

Maximum fuel, 3-129, 3-145

Menu bar, 2-2

MID, 3-351

Min. lines, 3-189

Minimum fuel, 3-129, 3-145

Minimum stock, 3-210

Minimum theoretical stock, 3-124, 3-

125

Mode, 3-116, 3-187, 3-192

Modem, 3-322

Modified, 2-13

Month report, 3-73, 4-54

Mouse, 2-2

Multiplier, 3-256

- N -

Name, 3-11, 3-253

New stock, 3-209

No minimum, 3-210

Normal, 3-187, 3-193

Nozzle, 2-14

Nozzles, 3-121

Number plate, 3-261

- O -

Odometer, 3-260

On-line authorisation, 4-53

Operational capacity, 3-128, 3-140, 3-

144

Operator messages, 3-206, 3-233, 4-

48

Operator surveillance, 4-47

OPT, 3-181, 3-186, 3-334

- P -

Paper cut, 3-189

Payment, 4-50

Petrol server, 3-334

PIN code, 3-260

PLU number, 3-202

Points per litre, 3-103

Points per unit, 3-208

Pop-up window, 2-10

POS, 3-38, 3-285, 3-334

Postal code, 3-254

Power down, 3-168

Prepayment, 4-49

Preset, 3-101

Preset type, 3-248

Price activation, 3-90, 3-95, 4-57

Price changeable, 3-203

Price programming, 4-57

Print, 2-3, 2-15

Print base price, 3-112

Print preview, 2-15

Print price difference, 3-112

Printer, 2-15

Priority, 3-111

Product restrictions, 3-248, 3-262

Profile, 3-12

Profiles, 3-15

Promotions, 3-224

Pump, 3-334

Pump mode, 3-164, 4-44

Pump test, 4-46

Pumps, 3-120, 3-162, 4-49

Purchase on credit, 4-45

Purchase without credit, 4-45

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

5-3

- Q -

Quantity lowered, 4-48

Query, 3-327, 4-43

- R -

Real stock, 3-123

Receipt, 3-185, 3-290

Receipts, 4-51

Remote eMIS, 3-334

Replace paper, 3-191

Replacement car, 3-260

Report code, 3-100, 3-205

Report code message, 3-206

Report codes, 3-227

Reporting, 4-54

Reports, 3-33

Reset, 3-133

Reset balance, 3-258

Result modifications, 4-58

Resultat modifications, 4-56

Return goods, 4-48, 4-50

Returned deposit, 4-50

Rounding off, 3-241

- S -

Safe drop, 4-52

Save, 2-3

Screen structure, 2-1

Service, 3-187, 3-192

Shared nozzle number, 3-131

Shared pump number, 3-131

Shift, 3-34, 4-3

Subtotal, 3-38

Shift report, 4-54

Shop articles, 3-262

Programming, 3-199

Simplified invoice, 3-292, 4-52

Software versions, 3-351

Special bar codes, 3-225

Special payment, 4-46

Special payment mode, 4-46

Station, 3-324

Status, 3-184

Status bar, 2-14, 3-2

Stock adjustment, 4-58

Stock change, 3-209

Stock decrease, 3-152, 4-57

Stock difference, 3-126, 3-156, 3-159

5-4

Stock modification, 4-56

Stock out, 3-129, 3-141, 3-145

Stoplist, 3-247

Sysdef, 3-245

System, 3-334

System condition, 4-43

- T -

Tab, 2-11

Tank, 3-334

Tank check, 3-146, 4-58

Tank group, 3-123, 3-154, 3-334

Tank groups, 3-120

Tank status, 3-142

Tanks, 3-120, 3-137

Temp. compensated, 3-157

Temperature, 3-141

Temperature compensated, 3-123, 3-

127, 3-140

Terminal, 3-186

Theoretical capacity, 3-128, 3-140, 3-

144

Theoretical stock, 3-124, 3-125

Timetable, 3-113

Title bar, 2-1

Toolbar, 2-9

Totalisers, 3-170, 4-59

Touchscreen calibration, 3-299

Transaction lists, 3-268

Transaction reg., 4-49

Tree, 2-12

Type, 3-186

Type of customer, 3-253

Types of additional information, 3-310

Types of expenses, 3-308

Types of receipts, 3-306

- U -

Ullage, 3-141

Unit of measure, 3-93, 3-202

Unit price, 3-203

Unlink, 2-7

User, 3-1, 3-10

Users, 3-6

- V -

Variable queries, 3-328

VAT code, 3-99, 3-204

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

VAT codes, 3-301

VAT number, 3-254, 3-304

VOID article, 4-47

VOID fuel, 4-47

VOID payment mode, 4-48

VOID signature, 4-47

- W -

Water level, 3-141

Working area, 2-10

© 1993-2009 Tokheim

February 16, 2009/V24

5-5

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents